<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?><rss version="2.0"
	xmlns:content="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/content/"
	xmlns:wfw="http://wellformedweb.org/CommentAPI/"
	xmlns:dc="http://purl.org/dc/elements/1.1/"
	xmlns:atom="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom"
	xmlns:sy="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/syndication/"
	xmlns:slash="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/slash/"
	xmlns:media="http://search.yahoo.com/mrss/" xmlns:itunes="http://www.itunes.com/dtds/podcast-1.0.dtd" >

<channel>
	<title>DVRCMS.Com</title>
	<atom:link href="https://www.dvrcms.com/tag/dvr-solutions/feed/" rel="self" type="application/rss+xml" />
	<link>https://www.dvrcms.com</link>
	<description>Survelliance CMS and VMS Support</description>
	<lastBuildDate>Wed, 20 Dec 2023 19:21:41 +0000</lastBuildDate>
	<language>en-US</language>
	<sy:updatePeriod>
	hourly	</sy:updatePeriod>
	<sy:updateFrequency>
	1	</sy:updateFrequency>
	<generator>https://wordpress.org/?v=6.9.4</generator>
	<itunes:subtitle>DVRCMS.Com</itunes:subtitle>
	<itunes:summary>Survelliance CMS and VMS Support</itunes:summary>
	<itunes:explicit>false</itunes:explicit>
	<item>
		<title>The best video doorbells for 2023</title>
		<link>https://www.dvrcms.com/the-best-video-doorbells-for-2023/</link>
					<comments>https://www.dvrcms.com/the-best-video-doorbells-for-2023/#respond</comments>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[admin]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Wed, 20 Dec 2023 19:21:41 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[Shopping Guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[2K video doorbell]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Arlo Video Doorbell]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[camera]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[CCTV]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[cloud]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Connect]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[download]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[DVR solutions]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Google Home app]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Google Nest Doorbell]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[How To]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[How to Connect]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Installation]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Instructions]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ios]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[live video]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[MONITOR]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Motion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Motion Detection]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[NVR]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[premium video doorbell]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Record]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Recording]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Ring Video Doorbell]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[SD card]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Security Camera]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Setting]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[settings]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Support]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Turing]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Two-Way Talk]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Video Doorbell Pro 2]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Video Recording]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Wyze Video Doorbell v2]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.dvrcms.com/?p=10561</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[The best video doorbells of 2023 are being produced by household names like Wyze, Arlo, Nest, and Ring. Products from ... <p class="read-more-container"><a title="The best video doorbells for 2023" class="read-more button" href="https://www.dvrcms.com/the-best-video-doorbells-for-2023/#more-10561" aria-label="Read more about The best video doorbells for 2023">Read More</a></p>]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 22.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">The best video doorbells of 2023 are being produced by household names like Wyze, Arlo, Nest, and Ring. Products from these companies span all budgets and offer a wide range of features &#8212; including HD video capture, customizable motion zones, two-way audio, and the ability to save footage for later reference.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 22.5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 22.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">While most of the video doorbells available today are up to the task of guarding your front door, some of them are better-equipped than others. For example, some offer head-to-toe resolutions that are ideal for certain porches, while others provide enhanced night vision footage for easier detection.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 22.5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 22.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">You also need to consider ongoing costs like </span><span style="color: #0000ff; font-size: 13.5pt;">monthly subscriptions</span><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">, as the best video doorbells often cost an additional $3 to $5 per month to access everything they have to offer. And if you&#8217;re picking up a battery-powered unit, you&#8217;ll want to know </span><span style="color: #0000ff; font-size: 13.5pt;">how long it&#8217;ll last</span><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;"> before it needs a recharge.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 22.5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 22.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">Below, you’ll find the five best video doorbells of 2023. Be sure to check all the entries before making a purchase, as they each bring something unique to your front door.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="font-size: 11pt;"><img fetchpriority="high" decoding="async" width="720" height="480" class="wp-image-10562 size-full" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-1-1.jpeg" alt="google nest doorbell battery review 3 of 13" title="The best video doorbells for 2023 6" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-1-1.jpeg 720w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-1-1-300x200.jpeg 300w" sizes="(max-width: 720px) 100vw, 720px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #707070; font-size: 11pt;">John Velasco / Digital Trends</span></p>
<h2 style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3; color: #2e74b5; font-size: 13pt;"><a href="https://store.google.com/gb/category/nest_doorbells?hl=en-GB&amp;pli=1" target="_blank" rel="dofollow noopener"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 21pt;">Google Nest Doorbell</span></a></h2>
<h3 style="margin-top: 11.25pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3; color: #1f4d78; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 15pt;">Best video doorbell overall</span></h3>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 22.5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 22.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">Google didn&#8217;t hold back with this Nest video doorbell, which blends practical features into a modern design that&#8217;s easy on the eyes. Even better, Nest offers free video history out of the box, which is notable because this sort of feature typically requires users to pay for a subscription service.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 22.5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 22.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">This model is arguably one of the best-designed wireless doorbell options to date, sporting a matte plastic chassis that blends well with any décor. You&#8217;ll also be treated to intelligent alerts because the smart doorbell&#8217;s 1.3-megapixel security camera features HDR video, night vision, and detection for pets, people, vehicles, and motion. If you&#8217;re not able to answer the doorbell, you can select any of the available Quick Responses options through the </span><span style="color: #0000ff; font-size: 13.5pt;">Google Home app </span><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">to have the doorbell speak answers to whoever is at the door. A subscription adds more intelligent features, but this model is excellent all on its own thanks to the free hours of video storage, something few models ever offer.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 22.5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 22.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">There is also a wired version of this Nest doorbell, a 2022 model with a smaller design that adds always-one power, which enables extra features like continuous video recording, two-second previews, and more. Both are very good choices, but we&#8217;re still favoring the battery model as it&#8217;s so easy to install, and the battery lasts for a good three months before needing to recharge.</span></p>
<h2>The best video doorbells for 2023</h2>
<p>Read More : <a href="https://www.dvrcms.com/best-20-free-open-source-cctv-nvr-and-dvr-solutions/">Best 20 Free Open source CCTV, NVR and DVR solutions</a></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="font-size: 11pt;"><img decoding="async" width="720" height="480" class="wp-image-10563 size-full" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-3-1.jpeg" alt="ring video doorbell 2nd gen 2020 review 2 and mail person" title="The best video doorbells for 2023 7" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-3-1.jpeg 720w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-3-1-300x200.jpeg 300w" sizes="(max-width: 720px) 100vw, 720px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #707070; font-size: 11pt;">Ring</span></p>
<h2 style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3; color: #2e74b5; font-size: 13pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 21pt;">Ring Video Doorbell (2nd Gen)</span></h2>
<h3 style="margin-top: 11.25pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3; color: #1f4d78; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 15pt;">Best video doorbell (runner-up)</span></h3>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 22.5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 22.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">The Ring Video Doorbell (2nd Gen) is a massive update to the original Ring model. The 2020 version is ready for the modern home in every way, while remaining more affordable than elite models with features you may not need.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 22.5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 22.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">The main changes to the smart doorbell include an upgrade to 1080p resolution (up from 720p), two-way audio with noise cancellation, and adjustable motion zones that will monitor specific areas to lessen false alerts. You can also set “Privacy Zones” that allow you to exclude areas of the camera’s field of view from recording. Improve the Ring Video Doorbell (2nd Gen) with the $50 </span><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">Solar</span><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;"> Charger, which fits over the doorbell to supply it with power — reducing the need to remove the Ring doorbell and recharge its battery.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 22.5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 22.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">While the Ring Video Doorbell (2nd gen) may not offer some high-end qualities found in other cams, like 2K resolution or object recognition, it&#8217;s hard to overlook its very affordable price, as well as options like the Solar Charger that other doorbells don&#8217;t really offer. However, you will need to sign up for </span><span style="color: #0000ff; font-size: 13.5pt;">Ring&#8217;s security subscription</span><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;"> to get any cloud storage, with the Protect plans starting at $3 per month.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="font-size: 11pt;"><img decoding="async" width="720" height="540" class="wp-image-10564 size-full" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-5-1.jpeg" alt="ring video doorbell pro 2 review angle2" title="The best video doorbells for 2023 8" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-5-1.jpeg 720w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-5-1-300x225.jpeg 300w" sizes="(max-width: 720px) 100vw, 720px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #707070; font-size: 11pt;">Image used with permission by copyright holder</span></p>
<h2 style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3; color: #2e74b5; font-size: 13pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 21pt;">Ring Video Doorbell Pro 2</span></h2>
<h3 style="margin-top: 11.25pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3; color: #1f4d78; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 15pt;">Best premium video doorbell</span></h3>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 22.5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 22.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">The Ring Video Doorbell Pro 2 is a substantial improvement not just over its predecessor, but to all video doorbells because it adopts a radar </span><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">sensor</span><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;"> to offer 3D motion detection technology. This model has the ability to tell exactly where it has detected people on your property, thus giving users a bird&#8217;s-eye view of their movement across the front door.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 22.5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 22.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">You could say it&#8217;s a game-changer, and beyond this new piece of tech, the Ring Video Doorbell 2 Pro also features a 1536p HD live video camera complete with color night vision, wide 150-degree views both on the horizontal and vertical, built-in Alexa greetings, two-way communication, and more. </span><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">It&#8217;s one thing to know who&#8217;s at the front door, but it&#8217;s also another to know their movements before and after.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="720" height="405" class="wp-image-10565 size-full" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-7-1.jpeg" alt="The Wyze Video Doorbell v2 installed near a front door." title="The best video doorbells for 2023 9" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-7-1.jpeg 720w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-7-1-300x169.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 720px) 100vw, 720px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #707070; font-size: 11pt;">Wyze</span></p>
<h2 style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3; color: #2e74b5; font-size: 13pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 21pt;">Wyze Video Doorbell v2</span></h2>
<h3 style="margin-top: 11.25pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3; color: #1f4d78; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 15pt;">Best budget video doorbell</span></h3>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 22.5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 22.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">Clocking in at less than $50, the Wyze Video Doorbell v2 is an incredible deal. It offers 2K video capture, two-way talk, and a generous 166.8-degree field-of-view that allows you to see packages at your doorstep without putting tall guests out of the frame.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 22.5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 22.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">One of its most unique features is a built-in microSD card slot that allows you to store footage locally. That makes this product incredibly budget-friendly, as you won&#8217;t need to opt for a monthly subscription that offers access to cloud history. You can use a card up to 256GB, and if you don&#8217;t want to shop for your own card, you can bundle in a 128GB card for an extra $15.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 22.5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 22.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">Wyze also designed the video doorbell to handle extreme weather, with an IP65 rating and operating temperatures ranging from -4 degrees to 122 degrees Fahrenheit. It doesn&#8217;t look quite as premium as the more expensive items on this list, but when it costs less than $50, that&#8217;s a minor complaint.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 22.5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 22.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">You should also take </span><span style="color: #0000ff; font-size: 13.5pt;">Wyze&#8217;s previous privacy concerns</span><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;"> into consideration before making a purchase, but there&#8217;s no doubt that frugal shoppers will find much to love about this video doorbell.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="font-size: 11pt;"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="720" height="405" class="wp-image-10566 size-full" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-14.jpeg" alt="The Arlo Video Doorbell 2nd Gen in the rain." title="The best video doorbells for 2023 10" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-14.jpeg 720w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Picture-14-300x169.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 720px) 100vw, 720px" /></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="color: #707070; font-size: 11pt;">Arlo</span></p>
<h2 style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3; color: #2e74b5; font-size: 13pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 21pt;">Arlo Video Doorbell 2nd Gen</span></h2>
<h3 style="margin-top: 11.25pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3; color: #1f4d78; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 15pt;">Best 2K video doorbell</span></h3>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><span style="display: inline-block; height: 1em;"><span style="display: none;">.</span></span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 22.5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 22.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">This powerful video doorbell is offered in both 2K and HD models – and aside from video resolution, they&#8217;re nearly identical. Both models are loaded with useful features such as two-way audio, weatherproofing, and support for both wired and battery installations.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 22.5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 22.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">A big selling point is the video doorbell&#8217;s 180-degree field-of-view, which is great for capturing a large section of your porch without cutting off packages at the foot of your door. The 2K model is the most compelling, though the HD model and its $80 price tag is perfect for frugal shoppers.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 22.5pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 22.5pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">One minor caveat is that it doesn&#8217;t offer color night vision. That&#8217;s a minor knock for an otherwise well-rounded product, so be sure to give it consideration if you&#8217;re looking to upgrade your video doorbell.</span></p>
<h2 style="margin-top: 33.75pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3; color: #2e74b5; font-size: 13pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 21pt;">Frequently Asked Questions</span></h2>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><strong><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 15pt;">How do you compare different video doorbells?</span></strong></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 20pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">Video doorbells have many features in common, including video, alerts, motion detectors, night vision, two-way audio, and more. However, there are a few important specs to compare between models:</span></p>
<div class="ul" style="margin: 0;">
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt; margin-left: 7.5pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #000000; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 11pt;">Size: Will the video doorbell fit in the space you have in mind?</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt; margin-left: 7.5pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #000000; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 11pt;">Power: Do you need a doorbell with a battery? How easy is the battery to recharge?</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt; margin-left: 7.5pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #000000; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 11pt;">Resolution: Usually, 1080p/HD is fine for video doorbells, but if you want more, you’ll need to look for a 2K resolution or higher model.</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt; margin-left: 7.5pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #000000; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 11pt;">Storage: Does the video doorbell offer onboard storage? Any room for SD cards? Does it offer cloud storage? Do you have to pay for cloud storage, or do you get it free?</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt; margin-left: 7.5pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #000000; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 11pt;">Detection: Some video doorbells are smarter than others. Newer models may have options to detect faces, cars, pets, and packages. Sometimes these features are free, but often you have to pay for a subscription to enable them.</span></div>
</div>
</div>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><strong><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 15pt;">How do you install a video doorbell?</span></strong></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 20pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">Video doorbells can be relatively easy to install, especially if it’s battery-powered. All video doorbells are typically installed by fastening a mounting plate to an area near your door, whether that’s around the outside frame or somewhere else nearby. Once you screw the mounting plate into place, most video doorbells are then positioned on them — requiring a special release key to remove the doorbell to recharge it.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 20pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 20pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">However, things can get a bit more complicated if you choose to install a video doorbell to an existing wired connection. Instructions on how to connect the appropriate wires to your doorbell vary, but you may want to hire a professional to ensure </span><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">that it’s installed properly. The benefit of choosing to go with a wired connection versus a battery-operated model is that you never need to worry about recharging it. If you’re installing a Ring video doorbell, we break down </span><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #0000ff; font-size: 13.5pt;">the instructions on how to do it with our guide</span><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><strong><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 15pt;">Where can you get video doorbells?</span></strong></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 20pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">Video doorbells are extremely popular. If you’ve </span><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">done</span><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;"> your research, you can choose to purchase one online through retailers such as Best Buy, Amazon, and Newegg. Some popular consumer electronics stores like Best Buy have some on display to check out in person. You shouldn’t forget about home improvement stores like Home Depot and Lowes. Those stores can be great places to ask questions about installation specifics.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 20pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 20pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">Or, if you’d like to save a little time and money, we keep an </span><span style="text-decoration: underline; color: #0000ff; font-size: 13.5pt;">updated list of the best current video doorbell deals</span><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;"> you should check out.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><strong><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 15pt;">Do video doorbells need a subscription?</span></strong></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 20pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">No, video doorbells don’t need a subscription to work, but a subscription may be particularly important for some models. Subscriptions usually add a few features to doorbells, including:</span></p>
<div class="ul" style="margin: 0;">
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt; margin-left: 7.5pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #000000; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 11pt;">Cloud storage: This allows you to save video to the cloud for a certain period of time, where you can view and download it at will. Some plans, like Ring Protect, only add cloud storage if you pay for it. Others expand cloud storage capabilities or make them more useful.</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt; margin-left: 7.5pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #000000; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 11pt;">Better detection options: Subscriptions usually allow for more in-depth AI detection of faces, cars, packages, and so on. This comes with rich alerts that specify what looks like happened, such as, “It appears a package was just dropped off at your door.”</span></div>
</div>
<div class="li" style="margin: 0;">
<div style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt; margin-left: 7.5pt;"><span style="display: inline-block; position: relative; text-indent: -18pt; color: #000000; font-size: 10pt;"><span style="position: absolute; top: -0.34em; left: 0; font-size: 2em;">•</span> </span><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 11pt;">More customization: Subscriptions may also add customization options for your alerts, as well as the motion zones that trigger the doorbell.</span></div>
</div>
</div>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><strong><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 15pt;">Is my door large enough for a video doorbell?</span></strong></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 20pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">First, there are narrow video doorbells, like the Nest Doorbell and similar models, that are designed to fit in narrow spaces. If your doorway has a reasonable amount of trim, that’s often sufficient. Doorbells may come with methods to angle them during installation so they face away from walls.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 20pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 20pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">Second, you don’t have to put a video doorbell right by the door. It can go on a nearby wall or away from the entryway on an exterior wall. You will want to make sure they have some protection from the elements, though. Also, note that some siding is a </span><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">lot</span><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;"> harder to drill into than others (fiber cement. for example), and you’ll want to avoid any potential water damage.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><strong><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 15pt;">Are video doorbells legal?</span></strong></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 20pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">Privacy laws vary by state, but you don’t need to worry about using a video doorbell. By their nature, video doorbells are designed to view public entryway places and street sides where there’s no real expectation of privacy. They can’t really be repositioned to spy on neighbors or anything else illegal.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 20pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 20pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">While many video doorbells do allow for two-way communication, they don’t actually record the audio, which is what can trigger privacy laws, so there’s no concern there, either.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><strong><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 15pt;">Does my video doorbell record all the time?</span></strong></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 20pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">No. That would be impractical for storage and would quickly wear out battery models. Video doorbells only record when their motion sensors are triggered, and many models have motion zones and other settings you can change so that only certain types of motion will trigger the video. Some models also have a </span><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">background</span><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;"> recording function that allows them to preview the first couple of seconds before the motion sensor is triggered.</span></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 8pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.3;"><strong><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 15pt;">How long does a battery on a video doorbell last?</span></strong></p>
<p style="margin-top: 0pt; padding-top: 0; margin-bottom: 20pt; padding-bottom: 0; line-height: 1.2; font-size: 12pt;"><span style="color: #000000; font-size: 13.5pt;">That can depend on how often the doorbell is triggered by motion. In the best-case scenarios, we&#8217;ve found doorbells last around three to six months. But a doorbell on a busy street that gets triggered by cars or dog walkers will last far less, and a doorbell watching a long driveway that&#8217;s only occasionally used can last much longer.</span></p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
					<wfw:commentRss>https://www.dvrcms.com/the-best-video-doorbells-for-2023/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
			<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual</title>
		<link>https://www.dvrcms.com/bosch-bvms-lite-operation-manual/</link>
					<comments>https://www.dvrcms.com/bosch-bvms-lite-operation-manual/#respond</comments>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[admin]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Mon, 10 Jul 2023 20:11:02 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[PC Software]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[User Guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Access Control]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[administrator]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Alarm Notifications]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Bosch]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[BVMS Lite]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Camera manual]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Configuration]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[DVR solutions]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Easy7]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Favorites]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Firmware]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[How To]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Installation Guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Intercom]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[IP Camera]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[iPhone]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Live view]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Network Video Recorder]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[onvif]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Operation manual]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Panoramic cameras]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Password]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Play Video]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Port Forwarding]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[PTZ cameras]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[PTZ Control]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Record]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Recording setting]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[settings]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Smart Client Express]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[SMART Station]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[software]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Support]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Surveillance]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Tiandy]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Troubleshooting]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Turing]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[User management]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[User manual]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[VMS Enterprise]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[web browser]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.dvrcms.com/?p=2789</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual, The BVMS Viewer is an IP video security application for live viewing and playback video ... <p class="read-more-container"><a title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual" class="read-more button" href="https://www.dvrcms.com/bosch-bvms-lite-operation-manual/#more-2789" aria-label="Read more about Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual">Read More</a></p>]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual, The BVMS Viewer is an IP video security application for live viewing and playback video of Bosch network attached cameras and recorders. The software package consists of an Operator Client for live viewing and playback of video and a Configuration Client. The BVMS Viewer supports the current Bosch IP video product portfolio as well as legacy Bosch video devices.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark0"></a> 2 Introduction</p>
<p>Click the link to access the Open Source Software licenses used by BVMS and the Mobile App: <a href="http://www.boschsecurity.com/oss/" rel="dofollow noopener" target="_blank">http://www.boschsecurity.com/oss/</a> he<strong> HEwAdenoe&#8217;</strong></p>
<p>Covered by one or more claims of the patents listed at patentlist.hevcadvance.com. This manual guides you through the basic steps of the operation with BVMS.</p>
<p>For detailed help and step-by-step instructions read the User Manual or use the Online Help.</p>
<p><strong>BVMS</strong></p>
<p><strong>BVMS Export Player</strong></p>
<p>BVMS Export Player displays exported recordings.</p>
<p><strong>BVMS Viewer</strong></p>
<p>The BVMS Viewer is an IP video security application for live viewing and playback video of Bosch network attached cameras and recorders. The software package consists of an Operator Client for live viewing and playback of video and a Configuration Client. The BVMS Viewer supports the current Bosch IP video product portfolio as well as legacy Bosch video devices.</p>
<p>Click the link to access the Open Source Software licenses used by BVMS Viewer: <a href="http://www.boschsecurity.com/oss" rel="nofollow noopener" target="_blank">http://www.boschsecurity.com/oss</a>.</p>
<p><strong>BVMS Configuration Client</strong></p>
<p><strong>BVMS Operator Client</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1043" height="587" class="wp-image-2790" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-1.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 1" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 269" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-1.jpeg 1043w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-1-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-1-1024x576.jpeg 1024w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-1-768x432.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 1043px) 100vw, 1043px" /></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>1</strong></td>
<td>Menu bar</td>
<td>Allows you to select a menu command.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>2</strong></td>
<td>Toolbar</td>
<td>Displays the available buttons. Point to an icon to display a tooltip.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>3</strong></td>
<td>Playback controls</td>
<td>Allows you to control instant playback or a camera sequence or alarm sequence.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>4</strong></td>
<td>Performance meter</td>
<td>Displays the CPU usage.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>5</strong></td>
<td>Time zone selector</td>
<td>Select an entry for the time zone to be displayed in most time related fields.</p>
<p>Only available if at least one Management Server or unmanaged site in the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark472"> Logical Tree </a>is located in another time zone as your Operator Client.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>6</strong></td>
<td>Controls for Image panes</td>
<td>Allows you to select the required number of<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image</a> <a href="#post-2789-bookmark461">panes </a>and to close all Image panes.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>7</strong></td>
<td>Image window</td>
<td>Displays the Image panes. Allows you to arrange the Image panes.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>8</strong></td>
<td>Image pane</td>
<td>Displays a camera, a map, an image, a document (HTML file).</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>9</strong></td>
<td><strong>L&#8217; t <sub>d </sub>Alarm List </strong>window</td>
<td>Displays all alarms that the system generates.</p>
<p>Allows you to accept or clear an alarm or to start a workflow, for example, by sending an E-mail to a maintenance person.</p>
<p>The Alarm List is not being displayed, when the connection to the Management Server is lost.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>10</strong></td>
<td><strong>PTZ Control </strong>window</td>
<td>Allows you to control a<a href="#post-2789-bookmark482"> PTZ </a>camera.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>11</strong></td>
<td><strong>Logical tree </strong>window</td>
<td>Displays the devices your user group has access to. Allows you to select a device for assigning it to an Image pane.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Favorites Tree </strong>window</td>
<td>Allows you to organize the devices of the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark472"> Logical Tree</a> as required.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Bookmarks </strong>window</td>
<td>Allows to manage<a href="#post-2789-bookmark442"> bookmarks</a>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>o</p>
<p><strong>Map </strong>window</td>
<td>Displays a site map. Allows you to drag the map to display a particular section of the map.</p>
<p>If activated, a map is displayed automatically for each camera displayed in an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane</a>. In this case, the camera must be configured on a map.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2789-bookmark2"></a> BVMS editions</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>The different BVMS editions offer you full scalability, so you can expand your video surveillance system according to your needs.</p>
<p>The following editions of BVMS are available:</p>
<ul>
<li>BVMS Professional</li>
<li>BVMS Enterprise</li>
<li>BVMS Plus</li>
<li>BVMS Lite</li>
<li>BVMS Viewer</li>
</ul>
<p>BVMS Viewer and BVMS Professional are Software Only products. You can not use them on Bosch DIVAR IP devices.</p>
<p>You can use BVMS Lite and BVMS Plus on Bosch DIVAR IP devices or as Software Only products on any other hardware.</p>
<h2>Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual</h2>
<p>Read Next :</p>
<ol>
<li><a href="https://www.dvrcms.com/cms-software/2682/turing-smart-station-installation-guide/" rel="nofollow">Turing SMART Station Installation Guide</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.dvrcms.com/cms-software/1670/trendnetview-evo-administration-guide/" rel="nofollow">FLIR United VMS Installation Guide</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.dvrcms.com/cms-software/1151/tiandy-easy7-smart-client-express-user-manual/" rel="nofollow">Tiandy Easy7 Smart Client Express User Manual</a></li>
</ol>
<p>For detailed information about the different BVMS editions refer to <a href="https://www.boschsecurity.com/xc/en/solutions/management-software/bvms/" rel="nofollow noopener" target="_blank">www.boschsecurity.com</a> and the BVMS Quick Selection Guide:</p>
<p><a href="https://media.boschsecurity.com/fs/media/en/pb/images/products/management_software/bvms/bvms_quick-selection-guide.pdf" rel="nofollow noopener" target="_blank">BVMS Quick Selection Guide</a>.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td colspan="2">BVMS</td>
<td>System overview | en <strong>13</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>3</strong></td>
<td><strong>System overview</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>This document describes some functions that are not available for BVMS Viewer.</p>
<p>For detailed information about the different BVMS editions refer to <a href="https://www.boschsecurity.com/xc/en/solutions/management-software/bvms/" rel="nofollow noopener" target="_blank">www.boschsecurity.com</a> and the BVMS Quick Selection Guide:<a href="https://media.boschsecurity.com/fs/media/en/pb/images/products/management_software/bvms/bvms_quick-selection-guide.pdf" rel="nofollow noopener" target="_blank"> BVMS Quick Selection Guide</a>.</p>
<p>If you plan to install and configure BVMS, participate in a system training on BVMS.</p>
<p>Refer to the Release Notes of the current BVMS version for supported versions of firmware and hardware and other important information.</p>
<p>See data sheets on Bosch workstations and servers for information on computers where BVMS can be installed.</p>
<p>The BVMS software modules can optionally be installed on one PC.</p>
<p><strong>Important components</strong></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Component</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Management Server (selectable in Setup)</td>
<td>Stream management, alarm management, priority management, Management<a href="#post-2789-bookmark470"> logbook</a>, user management, device state management. Additional Enterprise System license: Managing<a href="#post-2789-bookmark455"> Enterprise User Groups </a>and<a href="#post-2789-bookmark453"> Enterprise</a> <a href="#post-2789-bookmark453">Accounts</a>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Config Wizard</td>
<td>Easy and fast setup of a recording system.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Configuration Client (selectable in Setup)</td>
<td>System configuration and administration for Operator Client.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Operator Client (selectable in Setup)</td>
<td>Live monitoring, storage retrieval and playback, alarm and accessing multiple Management Server computers simultaneously.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Video Recording Manager (selectable in Setup)</td>
<td>Distributing storage capacities on iSCSI devices to the encoders, while handling load balancing between multiple iSCSI devices.</p>
<p>Streaming playback video and audio data from iSCSI to Operator Clients.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Mobile Video Service (selectable in Setup)</td>
<td>Provides a transcoding service that transcodes the live and recorded video stream from a camera configured in BVMS to the available network bandwidth. This service enables video clients like an iPhone or a Web client to receive transcoded streams, for example for unreliable network connections with limited bandwidth.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Web Client</td>
<td>You can access live and playback videos via Web browser.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Mobile App</td>
<td>You can use the Mobile App on iPhone or iPad to access live and playback video.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Bosch Video Streaming Gateway (selectable in Setup)</td>
<td>Provides the integration of 3rd party cameras, e.g. in low- bandwidth networks.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Cameo SDK (selectable in</p>
<p>Setup)</td>
<td>The Cameo SDK is used to embed BVMS live and playback <a href="#post-2789-bookmark461">Image panes </a>to your external third-party application. The Image panes follow the BVMS based user permissions.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Component</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>The Cameo SDK provides a subset of the BVMS Operator Client functionalities that enables you to create applications similar to the Operator Client.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Client Enterprise SDK</td>
<td>The Client Enterprise SDK is meant to control and monitor the behaviour of Operator Client of an Enterprise System by external applications. The SDK allows to browse devices that are accessible by the running, connected Operator Client and to control some UI functionalities.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Client SDK / Server SDK</td>
<td>The Server SDK is used to control and monitor the Management Server by scripts and external applications. You can use those interfaces with a valid administrator account.</p>
<p>The Client SDK is used to control and monitor the Operator Client by external applications and scripts (part of the related server configuration).</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2789-bookmark5"></a> Hardware requirements</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>See the data sheet for BVMS. Data sheets for platform PCs are also available.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2789-bookmark7"></a> Software requirements</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can not install the BVMS Viewer where any other BVMS component is installed. See the data sheet for BVMS.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2789-bookmark9"></a> License requirements</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>See the data sheet for BVMS for the available licenses.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>4</strong></td>
<td><strong>Concepts</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Notice!</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>% î J</strong></td>
<td>BVMS Viewer offers only basic features. Advanced features are included in BVMS Professional. For detailed information about the different BVMS editions refer to <a href="https://www.boschsecurity.com/xc/en/solutions/management-software/bvms/" rel="nofollow noopener" target="_blank">www.boschsecurity.com </a>and the BVMS Quick Selection Guide:<a href="https://media.boschsecurity.com/fs/media/en/pb/images/products/management_software/bvms/bvms_quick-selection-guide.pdf" rel="nofollow noopener" target="_blank"> BVMS Quick Selection Guide</a>.</p>
<p>This chapter provides background information on selected issues.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>4.1</strong></td>
<td><strong>BVMS design concepts</strong></p>
<p><a href="#post-2789-bookmark13"><strong><em>Single Management Server System, page 15</em></strong></a></p>
<p>A single BVMS Management Server System provides management, monitoring and control of up to 2000 cameras/encoders.</p>
<p><a href="#post-2789-bookmark16"><strong><em>Enterprise System, page 16</em></strong></a></p>
<p>An Enterprise Management Server provides simultaneous access to multiple Management Servers. The Enterprise System allows full access to events and alarms from multiple subsystems.</p>
<p><a href="#post-2789-bookmark23"><strong><em>Server Lookup, page 17</em></strong></a></p>
<p>The Server Lookup feature provides a list of available BVMS Management Servers to the BVMS Operator Client. The Operator can select a server out of the list of available server. Connected to the Management Server the Client has full access to the Management Server.</p>
<p><a href="#post-2789-bookmark26"><strong><em>Unmanaged site, page 18</em></strong></a></p>
<p>Devices can be grouped to unmanaged sites. Devices under unmanaged sites are not monitored by the Management Server. The Management Server provides a list of unmanaged sites to the Operator Client. The Operator can connect on demand to the site and gets access to live video data and recorded video data. Event and alarm handling is not available in the unmanaged site concept.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>4.1.1</strong></td>
<td><a id="post-2789-bookmark13"></a><strong>Single Management Server System</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>A single BVMS Management Server can manage up to 2000 channels.</li>
<li>A BVMS Management Server provides management, monitoring, and control of the entire system.</li>
<li>The BVMS Operator Client is connected to the Management Server and receives events and alarms from the BVMS Management Server and shows live and playback.</li>
<li>In most cases all devices are in one local area network with a high bandwidth and a low latency.</li>
</ul>
<p>Responsibilities:</p>
<ul>
<li>Configuring data</li>
<li>Event log (logbook)</li>
<li>User profiles</li>
<li>User priorities</li>
<li>Licensing</li>
<li>Event- and alarm-management</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="855" height="275" class="wp-image-2791" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-2.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 2" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 270" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-2.jpeg 855w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-2-300x96.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-2-768x247.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 855px) 100vw, 855px" /> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="859" height="724" class="wp-image-2792" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-3.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 3" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 271" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-3.jpeg 859w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-3-300x253.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-3-768x647.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 859px) 100vw, 859px" /> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="155" height="105" class="wp-image-2793" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-4.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 4" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 272"></p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark16"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark17"></a> Enterprise System</p>
<p><strong>4.1.2</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>The target of a BVMS<a href="#post-2789-bookmark454"> Enterprise System </a>is to enable a user of an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark477"> Operator Client </a>to simultaneously access multiple Management Servers (subsystems).</li>
<li>Clients connected to an Enterprise Server have full access to all cameras and recordings from the subsystems.</li>
<li>Clients connected to an Enterprise Server have full real time awareness of events and alarms of all subsystems.</li>
<li>Typical application areas:</li>
<li>Metros</li>
<li>Airports</li>
</ul>
<p>Live, playback, events, alarms</p>
<p>BVMS Enterprise Management Server</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="855" height="350" class="wp-image-2794" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-5.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 5" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 273" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-5.jpeg 855w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-5-300x123.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-5-768x314.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 855px) 100vw, 855px" /> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="125" height="94" class="wp-image-2795" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-6.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 6" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 274"></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="155" height="105" class="wp-image-2796" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-7.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 7" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 275"></p>
<p>BVMS Operator Client / Configuration Client</p>
<p>BVMS Subsystem</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="155" height="104" class="wp-image-2797" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-8.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 8" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 276"></p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211; </em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark65"><em>Accessing the system, page 35</em></a></p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark23"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark24"></a> 4.1.3 Server Lookup</p>
<ul>
<li>The BVMS Server Lookup feature allows Operators to connect to a BVMS Management Server out of a provided list of servers.</li>
<li>A single user of Configuration Client or Operator Client can connect to multiple system access points sequentially.</li>
<li>System access points can be Management Server or Enterprise Management Server.</li>
<li>Server Lookup uses dedicated Management Server to host the Server List.</li>
<li>Server Lookup and Management Server or Enterprise Management Server functionally can be run on one machine.</li>
<li>Server Lookup supports you in locating system access points by their names or descriptions.</li>
<li>Once connected to the Management Server the Operator Client receives events and alarms from the BVMS Management Server and shows live and playback</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="855" height="339" class="wp-image-2798" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-9.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 9" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 277" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-9.jpeg 855w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-9-300x119.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-9-768x305.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 855px) 100vw, 855px" /></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>On demand live, playback, events, alarms &#8211; connected</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>On demand live, playback, events, alarms &#8211; not connected</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>J</strong></td>
<td>Management Server</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>ÎIÎÏ,</strong></td>
<td>Server list</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Operator Client</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>BBtIB Sj-fiD 0^</strong></td>
<td>Connected BVMS from server list</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>! BItUB ! </strong>1 1</td>
<td>Not connected BVMS from server list</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark67"><em>Using Server Lookup, page 35</em></a></li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark26"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark27"></a> 4.1.4 Unmanaged site</p>
<ul>
<li>A system design option in BVMS with a large number of small subsystems.</li>
<li>It allows to configure up to 9999 locations in one BVMS Management Server</li>
<li>Operators can access live and recorded video data from up to 20 sites simultaneously.</li>
<li>For an easy navigation sites can be grouped in folders or can be placed on maps.</li>
</ul>
<p>Predefined username and password allow operators to quickly connect to a site .</p>
<p>The unmanaged site concept supports IP based BVMS system as well as analog DVR solutions: &#8211; Bosch DIVAR AN 3000 / 5000 analog recorders</p>
<p>DIVAR hybrid recorders</p>
<p>DIVAR network recorders</p>
<p>DIP 3000/7000 units IP based recording</p>
<p>Single BVMS Management Server System</p>
<p>Adding a site for central monitoring only requires a license per site and is independent of the number of channels in the site.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="855" height="486" class="wp-image-2799" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-10.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 10" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 278" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-10.jpeg 855w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-10-300x171.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-10-768x437.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 855px) 100vw, 855px" /></p>
<p><strong>4.2</strong></p>
<table>
<thead>
<tr>
<th>&lt;—&gt;</th>
<th>Live, playback, events, alarms</th>
</tr>
</thead>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>On demand live and playback video traffic</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>-S</strong></td>
<td>Management Server</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>g 19</strong></td>
<td>Operator Client / Configuration Client</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>9</strong></td>
<td>site</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>R.</strong></td>
<td>DVR</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Recording</strong></p>
<p>This chapter explains the different recording and replay related functions in the system.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="75" height="75" class="wp-image-2800" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-11.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 11" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 279"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="856" height="472" class="wp-image-2801" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-12.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 12" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 280" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-12.jpeg 856w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-12-300x165.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-12-768x423.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 856px) 100vw, 856px" /></p>
<p><strong>4.2.1</strong></p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark20"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark21"></a> Automated Network Replenishment (ANR)</p>
<p><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>BVMS Viewer offers only basic features. Advanced features are included in BVMS Professional. For detailed information about the different BVMS editions refer to <a href="https://www.boschsecurity.com/xc/en/solutions/management-software/bvms/" rel="nofollow noopener" target="_blank">www.boschsecurity.com </a>and the BVMS Quick Selection Guide:<a href="https://media.boschsecurity.com/fs/media/en/pb/images/products/management_software/bvms/bvms_quick-selection-guide.pdf" rel="nofollow noopener" target="_blank"> BVMS Quick Selection Guide</a>.</p>
<p><strong>Intended use</strong></p>
<p>When a failure of the network or the central storage occurs, the <a href="#post-2789-bookmark439">ANR </a>function ensures that the <a href="#post-2789-bookmark452">encoder</a> transmits the locally buffered recording of the missing time period to the central storage after the failure is fixed.</p>
<p>The following graphic shows the transmission of video data after a network or storage failure is fixed.</p>
<p><strong>Example: Work around network failure</strong></p>
<p>If the network fails unexpectedly, the ANR function completes the central storage with the locally buffered recording when the network is available again.</p>
<p><strong>Example: Store video data when network is not available</strong></p>
<p>A subway has no network connection to the central storage when located between stations. Only during regular stops the buffered recording can be transmitted to the central storage. Ensure that the time period that is required for transferring the buffered recording, does not exceed the time period of a stop.</p>
<p><strong>Example: ANR for alarm recording</strong></p>
<p>The pre-alarm recording is stored locally. Only in case of an alarm, this pre-alarm recording is transmitted to the central storage. If no alarm occurs, the obsolete pre-alarm recording is not transmitted to the central storage and, hence, does not burden the network.</p>
<p><strong>Limitations</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="75" height="75" class="wp-image-2802" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-13.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 13" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 281"><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>You cannot use playback from the local storage media when the passwords for &#8216;user&#8217; and &#8216;live&#8217; are set on the encoder. Remove the passwords if required.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>BVMS</td>
<td>Concepts | en <strong>21</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>4.2.2</strong></td>
<td>The ANR function only works with VRM recording.</p>
<p>The ANR function does not work with an encoder for which a secure connection for live display is configured.</p>
<p>You must have configured the storage media of an encoder to use the ANR function.</p>
<p>The encoder for which you configure the ANR function, must have firmware version 5.90 or later. Not all encoder types support the ANR function.</p>
<p>You cannot use the ANR function with dual recording.</p>
<p>Your<a href="#post-2789-bookmark469"> iSCSI storage system </a>must be properly configured.</p>
<p>The following list contains the possible reasons if you cannot configure the ANR function:</p>
<ul>
<li>Encoder is not reachable (wrong IP address, network failure, etc.).</li>
<li>Storage media of the encoder not available or read-only.</li>
<li>Wrong firmware version.</li>
<li>Encoder type does not support the ANR function.</li>
<li>Dual recording is active.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Overview of the storage related events</strong></p>
<p>This chapter describes the different storage related events.</p>
<p><strong>Buffer Storage State</strong></p>
<p>When a failure of the network or the central storage occurs, the <a href="#post-2789-bookmark439">ANR </a>function ensures that the <a href="#post-2789-bookmark452">encoder</a> transmits the locally buffered recording of the missing time period to the central storage after the failure is fixed.</p>
<p>The buffer storage states are:</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Storage State Unknown</strong></li>
<li><strong>Storage State OK</strong></li>
<li><strong>Storage State Critical Buffer Fill Level</strong></li>
<li><strong>Storage State Failure</strong></li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Buffer Storage Overflow</strong></p>
<p>This event indicates that the storage buffer is already full and the recording is not transmitted to the central storage anymore.</p>
<p><strong>Storage State / Secondary Storage State</strong></p>
<p>The <strong>Storage State </strong>indicates the status of the connection between a camera and the central storage. The <strong>Storage State Failure </strong>event is triggered if the camera loses the connection to the central storage. If the disconnection only lasts a short moment, this event does not necessarily indicate that video data is lost.</p>
<p>The storage states are:</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Storage State Unknown</strong></li>
<li><strong>Storage State OK</strong></li>
<li><strong>Storage State Failure</strong></li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Recording monitor state / Secondary recording monitor state</strong></p>
<p>This event indicates a recording monitoring. As long as the camera can buffer recording in the RAM, no alarm is triggered. The <strong>Recording monitor state recording loss </strong>event is only triggered if within the last two minutes video data can no longer be buffered in the RAM and is lost. The event also indicates the time period when video data was lost.</p>
<p>The recording monitor states are:</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Recording monitor state unknown</strong></li>
<li><strong>Recording monitor state ok</strong></li>
<li><strong>Recording monitor state recording loss</strong></li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211; </em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark20"><em>Automated Network Replenishment (ANR), page 20</em></a></p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark31"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark32"></a> 4.3 Alarm handling</p>
<p>Alarms can be individually configured to be handled by one or more user groups. When an alarm occurs, it appears in the Alarm List of all users in the user groups configured to receive that alarm. When any one of these users starts to work on the alarm, it disappears from the Alarm List of all other users.</p>
<p>Alarms are displayed on a workstation’s alarm monitor. This behavior is described in the following paragraphs.</p>
<p><strong>Alarm flow</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>An alarm occurs in the system.</li>
<li>Alarm notifications appear in the Alarm Lists of all users configured for this alarm. Alarm video is immediately displayed on configured monitors. If it is an automatically displayed alarm (auto pop-up), the alarm video is also automatically displayed on the Operator Client workstation’s alarm monitors.</li>
</ol>
<p>If the alarm is configured as an auto-clear alarm, the alarm is removed from the Alarm List after the auto-clear time (configured in the Configuration Client).</p>
<p>On monitors, any quad views from VIP XDs are temporarily replaced by full-screen displays.</p>
<ol>
<li>One of the users accepts the alarm. The alarm video is then displayed on this user&#8217;s workstation (if it is not already displayed via auto pop-up). The alarm is removed from all other Alarm Lists and alarm video displays.</li>
<li>The user who accepted the alarm invokes a workflow that can include reading an action plan and entering comments. This step is optional &#8211; requirements for workflow can be configured by the administrator.</li>
<li>Finally, the user clears the alarm. This removes the alarm from his Alarm List and alarm display.</li>
</ol>
<p>On a<a href="#post-2789-bookmark474"> monitor group</a>, the monitors return to the cameras that were displayed before the alarm occurred.</p>
<p><strong>Alarm Image window</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>To display alarm video, the <a href="#post-2789-bookmark435">Alarm Image window </a>replaces the Live or Playback<a href="#post-2789-bookmark463"> Image</a> <a href="#post-2789-bookmark463">window</a> on the monitor that has been configured for alarm display.</li>
<li>Each alarm gets a row of<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane</a>s. Up to 5 Image panes can be associated with each alarm. These Image panes can display live video, playback video, or maps.</li>
</ol>
<p>On a monitor group, each alarm can call up cameras on a row of monitors. The number of cameras in the row is limited by the number of columns in the monitor group. Monitors in the row that are not used for alarm video can be configured to either continue with their current display or to display a blank screen.</p>
<ol>
<li>Higher priority alarms are displayed above lower priority alarms on both monitor rows and the Operator Client workstation display alarm rows.</li>
<li>If the Alarm image window is completely full of Alarm image rows and an additional alarm must be displayed, the lowest priority alarms &#8220;stack up&#8221; in the bottom row of the Alarm image window. You can step through the stacked alarms with the controls at the left side of the alarm row.</li>
</ol>
<p>You can step through the alarm stacks on monitor groups with control buttons in the <strong>Monitors </strong>window of the Operator Client workstation display. Monitors in alarm are indicated by red icons with blinking &#8220;LEDs&#8221;.</p>
<p>The alarm title, time, and date can be optionally be displayed on all monitors, or only the first monitor in the alarm row.</p>
<ol>
<li>For equal priority alarms, the administrator can configure the order behavior:</li>
</ol>
<ul>
<li>Last-in-First-out (LIFO) mode: in this configuration, new alarms are inserted <em>above </em>older alarms of the same priority.</li>
<li>First-in-First-out (FIFO) mode; in this configuration, new alarms are inserted <em>below </em>older alarms of the same priority.</li>
</ul>
<ol>
<li>An alarm&#8217;s Image row can appear in the Alarm Image window in one of two ways:</li>
</ol>
<ul>
<li>When it is generated (auto pop-up). This occurs when the alarm priority is higher than display priority.</li>
<li>When the alarm is accepted. This occurs when the alarm priority is lower than display priority.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Auto pop-up alarms</strong></p>
<p>Alarms can be configured to automatically display (pop up) in the Alarm Image window, based on the alarm priority. Each user group&#8217;s live and playback displays are also assigned priorities. When alarms are received with priority higher than that of the user&#8217;s display, the alarm automatically displays its alarm row in the Alarm Image window. If the Alarm Image window is not currently displayed, it automatically replaces the Live or Playback Image window on the alarm-enabled monitor.</p>
<p>Although auto pop-up alarms are displayed in the Alarm Image window, they are not automatically accepted. They can be displayed on multiple users&#8217; displays simultaneously. When a user accepts an auto pop-up alarm, it is removed from all other users Alarm Lists and alarm displays.</p>
<p><strong>Alarm handling in case of shutdown</strong></p>
<p>On a server shutdown all active alarms are preserved. The alarms are restored and reappear in the <strong>Alarm List </strong>window, when the system restarts.</p>
<p>Alarms in the state <strong>Accepted </strong>or <strong>Workflow </strong>are automatically set back to the state <strong>Active </strong>when the system restarts. Comments entered for alarms in the state <strong>Workflow </strong>are preserved.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="75" height="75" class="wp-image-2803" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-14.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 14" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 282"><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>The alarm data is automatically saved every minute, so the maximum data loss is the data accumulated in one minute.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211; </em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark372"><em>Alarm display, page 123</em></a></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark297"><em> Handling events and alarms, page 98</em></a></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>4.4</strong></td>
<td><strong>Inactivity logoff</strong></p>
<p><strong>Intended use</strong></p>
<p>Intended use of inactivity logoff is to protect an Operator Client or Configuration Client during the absence of the operator or administrator.</p>
<p>You can configure per user group that Operator Client shall be logged off automatically after a specified time period without activity.</p>
<p>For Configuration Client no user groups are available. The inactivity logoff setting is valid only for the <strong>admin </strong>user.</p>
<p>All operations with keyboard, mouse and CCTV keyboard affect the specified time period for inactivity logoff. Automatic activities of Operator Client do not affect the time period. Automatic activities of Configuration Client like firmware upload or<a href="#post-2789-bookmark469"> iSCSI </a>setup prevent the inactivity logoff.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>You can also configure the inactivity logoff for a BVMS Web Client.</p>
<p>Short before an inactivity logoff, a dialog box reminds the user to actively prevent the inactivity logoff.</p>
<p>The<a href="#post-2789-bookmark470"> Logbook</a> records an occurred inactivity logoff.</p>
<p><strong>Example</strong></p>
<p>If a workstation is located in a public area, the inactivity logoff minimizes the risk that on an unattended workstation Operator Client is accessed by an unauthorized person.</p>
<p>An administrator group member shall logoff automatically after inactivity but a desk officer (operator group) might just watch video without operating the system and does not want an inactivity logoff.</p>
<p><strong>Limitations</strong></p>
<p>Client SDK activity does not support the inactivity logoff, this means that the activity of Client SDK does not affect the specified time period.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>4.5</strong></td>
<td><strong>Version independent Operator Client</strong></p>
<p>For Compatibility mode both Operator Client and Management Server must have a version later than 5.5.</p>
<p>A user of Operator Client can successfully log on to a Management Server where a previous software version is running.</p>
<p>If the server provides a newer configuration than available on the Operator Client workstation, this configuration is automatically copied to the Operator Client workstation. The user can decide to download the new configuration.</p>
<p>Operator Client provides a reduced feature set and is connected to this Management Server. The following Management Server related features are available after logon to a Management Server with a previous version: &#8211; User preferences</p>
<ul>
<li>Start manual recording</li>
<li>Display of device states</li>
<li>Toggling relay states</li>
<li>Searching the Logbook</li>
</ul>
<p>Search for events is not possible.</p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark487">Server Lookup</a></li>
<li>Remote export</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>4.5.1</strong></td>
<td><strong>Working with Compatibility Mode</strong></p>
<p>CL</p>
<p>: This Operator Client state displays in case of compatibility mode.</p>
<p>In version later than 5.5, the Operator Client will work in compatibility mode if the version of the Management Server is lower than the version of the Operator Client.</p>
<p>In version later than 10.0, the Operator Client will work in compatibility mode in case of the following:</p>
<ul>
<li>Not all communication services could be connected by Operator Client.</li>
<li>Example: The Management Server is up and running, but WebServiceHost is down.</li>
<li>There are changes within the communication interface between Operator Client and Management Server</li>
</ul>
<p>Only semantic interface changes or partial drop of services may cause that some functionalities can be missing in the Operator Client.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>BVMS</td>
<td>Concepts | en <strong>25</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>4.6</strong></td>
<td><a id="post-2789-bookmark38"></a><strong>Viewing modes of a panoramic camera</strong></p>
<p>This chapter illustrates the viewing modes of a panoramic camera which are available in BVMS.</p>
<p>The following viewing modes are available:</p>
<ul>
<li>Circle view</li>
<li>Panorama view</li>
<li>Cropped view</li>
</ul>
<p>Panorama and cropped view modes are created by the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark445"> dewarping </a>process in BVMS.<a href="#post-2789-bookmark451"> Edge</a> <a href="#post-2789-bookmark451">dewarping </a>is not used.</p>
<p>The administrator must configure the mounting position of a panoramic camera in Configuration Client.</p>
<p>You can resize the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane </a>of a camera as required. The Image pane ratio is not restricted to the 4:3 or 16:9 aspect ratio.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark74"><em>Displaying a panoramic camera, page 37</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark77"><em>Switching the viewing mode of panoramic camera, page 38</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark87"><em>Arranging and resizing Image panes, page 40</em></a></li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>4.6.1</strong></td>
<td><strong>360° panoramic camera &#8211; floor- or ceiling mounted</strong></p>
<p>The following figure illustrates the dewarping of a 360° camera which is floor- or ceiling mounted.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="853" height="575" class="wp-image-2804" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-15.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 15" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 283" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-15.jpeg 853w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-15-300x202.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-15-768x518.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 853px) 100vw, 853px" /></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="782" height="499" class="wp-image-2805" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-16.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 16" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 284" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-16.jpeg 782w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-16-300x191.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-16-768x490.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 782px) 100vw, 782px" /></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>1</td>
<td>Full circle image</td>
<td>3</td>
<td>Dewarping</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2</td>
<td>Snipping line (operator can change its position when not zoomed in)</td>
<td>4</td>
<td>Panorama view</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark42"></a> 180° panoramic camera &#8211; floor- or ceiling mounted</p>
<p><strong>4.6.2</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="851" height="573" class="wp-image-2806" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-17.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 17" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 285" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-17.jpeg 851w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-17-300x202.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-17-768x517.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 851px) 100vw, 851px" /> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="855" height="577" class="wp-image-2807" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-18.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 18" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 286" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-18.jpeg 855w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-18-300x202.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-18-768x518.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 855px) 100vw, 855px" /> The following figure illustrates the dewarping of a 180° camera which is floor- or ceiling mounted.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>1</td>
<td>Full circle image</td>
<td>3</td>
<td>Dewarping</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2</td>
<td>Snipping line (operator can change its position when not zoomed in)</td>
<td>4</td>
<td>Panorama view</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark45"></a> 4.6.3 360° panoramic camera &#8211; wall mounted</p>
<p>The following figure illustrates the dewarping of a 360° camera which is wall mounted.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="449" height="395" class="wp-image-2808" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-19.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 19" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 287" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-19.jpeg 449w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-19-300x264.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 449px) 100vw, 449px" /></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="449" height="385" class="wp-image-2809" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-20.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 20" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 288" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-20.jpeg 449w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-20-300x257.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 449px) 100vw, 449px" /></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>1</td>
<td>Full circle image</td>
<td>3</td>
<td>Panorama view</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2</td>
<td>Dewarping</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark47"></a> 180° panoramic camera &#8211; wall mounted</p>
<p><strong>4.6.4</strong></p>
<p>The following figure illustrates the dewarping of a 180° camera which is wall mounted.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="395" height="390" class="wp-image-2810" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-21.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 21" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 289" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-21.jpeg 395w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-21-300x296.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 395px) 100vw, 395px" /></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="393" height="251" class="wp-image-2811" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-22.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 22" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 290" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-22.jpeg 393w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-22-300x192.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 393px) 100vw, 393px" /></p>
<p><strong>o<br />
▼</strong></p>
<p><strong>o</strong></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>1</td>
<td>Full circle image</td>
<td>3</td>
<td>Panorama view</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2</td>
<td>Dewarping</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark50"></a> Cropped view on a panoramic camera</p>
<p><strong>4.6.5</strong></p>
<p>The following example figure illustrates the cropping of a 360° camera which is floor- or ceiling mounted.</p>
<p>The rectilinear section used for cropping is fixed. You can change the section in the cropped Image pane using the available PTZ controls.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="239" height="239" class="wp-image-2812" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-23.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 23" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 291" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-23.jpeg 239w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-23-150x150.jpeg 150w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 239px) 100vw, 239px" /> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="750" height="145" class="wp-image-2813" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-24.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 24" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 292" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-24.jpeg 750w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-24-300x58.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 750px) 100vw, 750px" /> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="378" height="193" class="wp-image-2814" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-25.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 25" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 293" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-25.jpeg 378w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-25-300x153.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 378px) 100vw, 378px" /></p>
<p><strong>©</strong></p>
<p><strong>o</strong></p>
<p><strong>0</strong></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>1</td>
<td>Full circle image</td>
<td>4</td>
<td>Panorama view</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2</td>
<td>Snipping line (operator can change its position when not zoomed in)</td>
<td>5</td>
<td>Cropping</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>3</td>
<td>Dewarping</td>
<td>6</td>
<td>Cropped<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane</a></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark53"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark54"></a> 4.7 SSH Tunneling</p>
<p>BVMS provides remote connectivity utilizing Secure Shell (SSH) tunneling.</p>
<p>SSH tunneling constructs an encrypted tunnel established by an SSH protocol/socket connection. This encrypted tunnel can provide transport to both encrypted and un-encrypted traffic. The Bosch SSH implementation also utilizes Omni-Path protocol, which is a high performance low latency communications protocol developed by Intel.</p>
<p><strong>Technical aspects and restrictions</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>SSH tunneling utilizes port 5322. This port cannot be modified.</li>
<li>The SSH Service must be installed on the same server as the BVMS Management Server.</li>
<li>(Enterprise) user accounts must have a configured password. (Enterprise) user accounts without a password cannot log on utilizing a SSH connection.</li>
<li>Local storage cameras do not support SSH connection.</li>
<li>Configuration Client cannot connect remotely via SSH. Configuration Client connection must be done via port mapping.</li>
<li>Operator Client checks connection with SSH service every 15 seconds. If the connection is interrupted, Operator Client retests the connection every minute.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Port mapping</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Configure one port forwarding for the BVMS Management Server to utilize port 5322 for both internal and external connections.</p>
<p>This is the only port mapping entry that you need to make for the entire system.</p>
<p>BVMS port mapping is not required.</p>
<p><strong>Encrypted communication</strong></p>
<p>After the connection is established via a SSH tunnel, all communications between the BVMS Management Server and a remote client are encrypted.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark56"></a> 5 Use latest software</p>
<p>Before operating the device for the first time, make sure that you install the latest applicable release of your software version. For consistent functionality, compatibility, performance, and security, regularly update the software throughout the operational life of the device. Follow the instructions in the product documentation regarding software updates.</p>
<p>We only create new updates for software versions in general or limited availability state. For more information, refer to:</p>
<p><a href="https://community.boschsecurity.com/t5/Security-Video/Bosch-Building-Technologies-Software-Service-and-Support/ta-p/10669" rel="nofollow noopener" target="_blank">Bosch Building Technologies Software Service and Support</a>.</p>
<p>The following links provide more information:</p>
<ul>
<li>General information:<a href="https://www.boschsecurity.com/xc/en/support/product-security/" rel="nofollow noopener" target="_blank"> https://www.boschsecurity.com/xc/en/support/product-security/</a></li>
<li>Security advisories, that is a list of identified vulnerabilities and proposed solutions:</li>
</ul>
<p><a href="https://www.boschsecurity.com/xc/en/support/product-security/security-advisories.html" rel="nofollow noopener" target="_blank">https://www.boschsecurity.com/xc/en/support/product-security/security-advisories.html</a> Bosch assumes no liability whatsoever for any damage caused by operating its products with outdated software components.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="75" height="75" class="wp-image-2815" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-26.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 26" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 294"></p>
<p><strong>6</strong></p>
<p><strong>6.1</strong></p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark58"></a> Getting started</p>
<p>This chapter provides information on how to get started with BVMS.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark60"></a> Starting Operator Client</p>
<p><strong>Note:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Before using the system, activate the licenses that you have ordered. The Configuration Manual or the Configuration Client Online Help describe how to activate the licenses.</li>
<li>To be sure that your BVMS uses the language that you need, please configure this language in your Configuration Client. See the Online Help for details.</li>
</ul>
<p>If a newer version of BVMS is running on the Management Server, this version is installed automatically by no-touch deployment when you log on.</p>
<p><strong>To start the Operator Client:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>From the <strong>Start </strong>menu, select <strong>Programs </strong>&gt; BVMS &gt; Operator Client.</li>
</ol>
<p>The dialog box for logging on is displayed.</p>
<ol>
<li>Type your user name in the <strong>User Name: </strong>field.</li>
<li>Type your password in the <strong>Password: </strong>field.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Note: </strong>When you start the application for the first time, type Admin as user name, no password required.</p>
<p>To access multiple Management Server computers simultaneously, type the user name of a member of an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark455"> Enterprise User Group</a>.</p>
<ol>
<li>In the <strong>Connection: </strong>list, select the IP address or the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark446"> DNS </a>name of the Management Server or Enterprise Management Server.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Note: </strong>If you use a SSH connection, select <strong>&lt;New&#8230;&gt; </strong>and enter the address in the following format: <strong>ssh://IP or servername:5322.</strong></p>
<p>To use a SSH connection user accounts must have a configured password (see<a href="#post-2789-bookmark53"> <em>SSH</em></a> <a href="#post-2789-bookmark53"><em>Tunneling, page 31</em></a>).</p>
<ol>
<li>Click <strong>OK</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>If dual authorization has been configured for your user group, the next logon dialog is displayed.</p>
<p>A user of the configured second user group enters the required information.</p>
<p>The application starts.</p>
<p>If dual authorization is optional, just click <strong>OK </strong>again on the second logon dialog box. But you then only have the user rights of your user group and not the potentially extended user rights of your<a href="#post-2789-bookmark448"> dual authorization </a>group.</p>
<p><strong>To start the Operator Client using Single Sign-on:</strong></p>
<p><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>To start the Operator Client using Single Sign-on, the user has to be associated to a LDAP user group that is configured in the Configuration Client.</p>
<p>SSH connection and dual authorization are not supported if a user connects to the Operator Client using Single Sign-on.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>1.</td>
<td>From the <strong>Start </strong>menu, select <strong>Programs </strong>&gt; BVMS &gt; Operator Client. The dialog box for logging on is displayed.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2.</p>
<p>3.</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Use Windows session credentials </strong>check box.</p>
<p>In the <strong>Connection: </strong>list, select the IP address or the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark446"> DNS </a>name of the Management Server or Enterprise Management Server.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>4.</td>
<td>Click <strong>OK</strong>.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>To quit Operator Client:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>On the <strong>System </strong>menu, click <strong>Exit</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>The application quits.</p>
<p>If you logged on to Operator Client as a user who is not authorized to quit the application, the <strong>Enter Logoff Password </strong>dialog box is displayed.</p>
<ol>
<li>Ask a user with corresponding user rights to enter his user name and password to confirm the process.</li>
</ol>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark53"><em> SSH Tunneling, page 31</em></a></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>6.2</strong></td>
<td><strong>Starting Operator Client with command line parameters</strong></p>
<p>The BVMS Operator Client provides automatic logon by using a parameterized startup. Therefore, create a new shortcut to the OperatorClient.exe and adjust the target of the shortcut.</p>
<p>Adjust the text between ** to the specific situation.</p>
<p>*BVMS installation directory*\bin\OperatorClient.exe&#8221; /user=&#8221;*username*&#8221; / password=&#8221;*password*&#8221; /connection=&#8221;*ip address*&#8221;</p>
<p><strong>Example:</strong></p>
<p>C:\Program Files\BOSCH\VMS\bin\OperatorClient.exe&#8221; /user=&#8221;Admin&#8221; / password=&#8221;password123&#8243; /connection=&#8221;192.168.20.120&#8243;</p>
<p>The connection parameter works from BVMS 9.0 and newer. The username and password parameters work from BVMS 5.0 onwards.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="75" height="75" class="wp-image-2816" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-27.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 27" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 295"><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>Username and password are stored as clear text in the target of the shortcut. This can be considered a security risk.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark63"></a> 6.3 Accepting a new configuration</p>
<p>When the system administrator activates a new configuration from within Configuration Client, each Operator Client is either immediately restarted automatically or the user of a workstation is informed about the new configuration and can accept it later. The system administrator configures which of these 2 cases occurs.</p>
<p>If the system administrator activated a new configuration without forcing each Operator Client workstation to accept the new configuration, a dialog box is displayed on all Operator Client workstations. The users can refuse or accept the new configuration. The dialog box is closed after a few seconds without user interaction. In this case the new configuration is refused. If a device (for example a camera) is removed from the system in the new configuration, some functions of this device are not available if you have refused the new configuration.</p>
<p>If you change the password for a user or delete a user while this user is logged on, this user can still continue working with Operator Client after password change or deletion. If after password change or deletion the connection to Management Server is interrupted (for example after activating the configuration), the user cannot automatically reconnect to the Management Server again without logoff/logon at Operator Client.</p>
<p><strong>To accept a new configuration:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Log off and then log on again.</p>
<p>The new configuration is used now.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>BVMS</td>
<td colspan="2">Getting started | en <strong>35</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>6.4</strong></td>
<td colspan="2"><a id="post-2789-bookmark65"></a><strong>Accessing the system</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2">You access a system performing the following steps:</p>
<ol>
<li>Perform one of the following steps to select the network address of the desired system:</li>
</ol>
<ul>
<li>Click a preselected list entry.</li>
<li>Enter a network address manually.</li>
<li>Select a network address using<a href="#post-2789-bookmark487"> Server Lookup</a>.</li>
</ul>
<ol>
<li>Log on to the desired system:</li>
</ol>
<ul>
<li>Single server system</li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark454">Enterprise System</a></li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>6.5</strong></td>
<td colspan="2"><a id="post-2789-bookmark67"></a><strong>Using Server Lookup</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>—</p>
<p>—</p>
<p>— — —</p>
<p>—</p>
<p>—</td>
<td>The BVMS Server Lookup feature allows Operators to connect to a BVMS Management Server out of a provided list of servers.</p>
<p>A single user of Configuration Client or Operator Client can connect to multiple system access points sequentially.</p>
<p>System access points can be Management Server or Enterprise Management Server.</p>
<p>Server Lookup uses dedicated Management Server to host the Server List.</p>
<p>Server Lookup and Management Server or Enterprise Management Server functionally can be run on one machine.</p>
<p>Server Lookup supports you in locating system access points by their names or descriptions.</p>
<p>Once connected to the Management Server the Operator Client receives events and alarms from the BVMS Management Server and shows live and playback</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>To</strong></p>
<p>10.</td>
<td><strong>access:</strong></p>
<p>Start Operator Client or Configuration Client.</p>
<p>The logon dialog box is displayed.</p>
<p>In the <strong>Connection: </strong>list, select <strong>&lt;Address Book&#8230;&gt; </strong>for Configuration Client or <strong>&lt;Address Book&#8230;&gt; </strong>for Operator Client.</p>
<p>If private and public IP address has been configured for a server, this is indicated.</p>
<p>If you select <strong>&lt;Address Book&#8230;&gt; </strong>or <strong>&lt;Address Book&#8230;&gt; </strong>for the first time, the <strong>Server lookup </strong>dialog box is displayed.</p>
<p>In the <strong>(Enterprise) Management Server address </strong>field, type in a valid network address of the desired server.</p>
<p>Enter a valid user name and password.</p>
<p>If required, click <strong>Remember settings</strong>.</p>
<p>Click <strong>OK</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Server lookup </strong>dialog box is displayed.</p>
<p>Select the desired server.</p>
<p>Click <strong>OK</strong>.</p>
<p>If the selected server has both a private and a public network address, a message box is displayed asking whether you are using a computer located in the private network of the selected server.</p>
<p>The server name is added to the <strong>Connection: </strong>list in the logon dialog box.</p>
<p>Select this server in the <strong>Connection: </strong>list and click <strong>OK</strong>.</p>
<p>If you have selected the <strong>Remember settings </strong>check box, you can select this server directly when you again want to access this server.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>7</strong></td>
<td><strong>Displaying camera images</strong></p>
<p>This chapter provides information on how to display camera images.</p>
<p>Some of the features described in this chapter can be deactivated for your user group.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>( Î j</strong></td>
<td><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>This document describes some functions that are not available for BVMS Viewer.</p>
<p>For detailed information about the different BVMS editions refer to <a href="https://www.boschsecurity.com/xc/en/solutions/management-software/bvms/" rel="nofollow noopener" target="_blank">www.boschsecurity.com</a> and the BVMS Quick Selection Guide:<a href="https://media.boschsecurity.com/fs/media/en/pb/images/products/management_software/bvms/bvms_quick-selection-guide.pdf" rel="nofollow noopener" target="_blank"> BVMS Quick Selection Guide</a>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>7.1</strong></td>
<td><strong>Selecting a time zone</strong></p>
<p>Main window</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>( Î j</strong></td>
<td><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>Ensure that the time on all computers of your system is set correctly according to each time zone where the computers are located.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Management Server or unmanaged site and all connected devices including encoders, decoders, VRM Server computers, and DVR devices must be in the same time zone. Operator Client computers (including Client SDK and Cameo SDK) and Configuration Client computers can be in other time zones than the Management Server or unmanaged site.</p>
<p>If your Operator Client is located in another time zone than one or more connected Management Server or unmanaged site, you can select one of the following time displays: &#8211; Your local time &#8211;<a href="#post-2789-bookmark494"> UTC</a></p>
<p>&#8211; Time zone of the Management Server or unmanaged site you are connected to The Image panes displaying a camera (live and playback) always show the time of the corresponding Management Server or unmanaged site.</p>
<p>©</p>
<p>In the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark472"> Logical Tree</a>, is displayed on the device icon of each server or unmanaged site that do not share the time zone that is currently selected in the Operator Client:</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="321" height="379" class="wp-image-2817" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-28.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 28" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 296" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-28.jpeg 321w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-28-254x300.jpeg 254w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 321px) 100vw, 321px" /></p>
<p>You can select the time zone of a server or unmanaged site for displaying this time zone in Operator Client.</p>
<p><strong>To select the time zone:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>In the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark472"> Logical Tree</a>, right-click a server icon to select the time zone of this server.</li>
<li>In the time zone selector list, select the desired entry.</li>
</ol>
<ul>
<li><strong>Operator Client Time</strong>: Operator Client</li>
</ul>
<p>&#8211; <strong>UTC</strong></p>
<p><strong>UTC-x</strong>: time zone of each available Management Server</p>
<p>The time based on the selected time zone is displayed in the menu bar:</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="758" height="168" class="wp-image-2818" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-29.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 29" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 297" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-29.jpeg 758w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-29-300x66.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 758px) 100vw, 758px" /></p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark395"><em>Logical Tree window, page 136</em></a></li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark71"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark72"></a> 7.2 Displaying a camera in an Image pane</p>
<p>Main window</p>
<p><strong>To assign a camera image to an Image pane:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Drag a camera from the <strong>Logical tree </strong>window to an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane</a>.<br />
The selected camera image is displayed in the Image pane.</p>
<p>Or:</p>
<ol>
<li>. Select an Image pane.</li>
<li>. In the <strong>Logical tree </strong>window, double-click a camera.</li>
</ol>
<p>The selected camera image is displayed in the Image pane.</p>
<ol>
<li>. Repeat the above steps for every camera you want to display.</li>
</ol>
<p>You can also drag maps and documents to Image panes.</p>
<p>Or:</p>
<ol>
<li>In the Logical Tree, right-click a camera and click <strong>in next free image pane</strong>. The camera is displayed.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>To move a camera within the Image window:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Drag the camera into another Image pane.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>To zoom digitally:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Rotate the wheel button forward or backward to zoom in or zoom out.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark395"><em>Logical Tree window, page 136</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark402"><em>Image window, page 138</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark405"><em>Image pane, page 139</em></a></li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark74"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark75"></a> 7.3 Displaying a panoramic camera</p>
<p>Main window</p>
<p>You can display<a href="#post-2789-bookmark479"> panoramic cameras</a>. The original full image circle of a panorama camera is automatically<a href="#post-2789-bookmark445"> dewarped </a>when displayed in an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane</a>.</p>
<p>You can display panoramic cameras and use PTZ in Live Mode and Playback Mode</p>
<p>You can select a point of interest of the panorama image for display in another Image pane. This Image pane displays the cropped image. Cropping and using PTZ in a cropped image is possible in Live and Playback Mode.</p>
<p>The<a href="#post-2789-bookmark463"> Image window</a> allows a flexible resizing of the Image pane that displays a panoramic camera or any other camera.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>38 </strong>en</td>
<td>| Displaying camera images BVMS</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>To display a panoramic camera:</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>
<ol>
<li>Drag a camera with the icon to an Image pane.</li>
</ol>
<p>The camera image is displayed in panorama view.</p>
<ol>
<li>Use the available control elements in the Image pane for navigating in the image.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>To display a cropped image:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Display a panoramic camera in panorama view.</li>
<li>Press and hold the CTRL-key.</li>
</ol>
<p>The mouse pointer changes accordingly.</p>
<ol>
<li>Click and hold a point of interest.</li>
<li>Drag the selected point to another Image pane and drop it. Release the CTRL-key.</li>
</ol>
<p>A section of the panorama view around the selected point is displayed.</p>
<p>You can create another cropped image from this cropped image with the same procedure.</p>
<p>We recommend displaying maximum 10 cropped Image panes simultaneously.</p>
<ol>
<li>Use the available control elements in the Image pane for navigating in the image.</li>
</ol>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>7.4</strong></td>
<td><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark77"><em>Switching the viewing mode of panoramic camera, page 38</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark87"><em>Arranging and resizing Image panes, page 40</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark38"><em>Viewing modes of a panoramic camera, page 25</em></a></li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark77"></a><strong>Switching the viewing mode of panoramic camera</strong></p>
<p>A panoramic camera must be configured in the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark472"> Logical Tree </a>for this user.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>You can switch the viewing mode for a panoramic camera displayed in an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane</a>.</p>
<p>The following modes are available:</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>O Circle view</strong></li>
<li><strong>□ Panorama view </strong>(initial view)</li>
<li>O <strong>Cropped view</strong></li>
</ul>
<p><strong>To switch:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>In the title bar of an Image pane displaying a panoramic camera, click the <strong>Switch panoramic mode </strong>icon and select the desired entry.</p>
<p>When the Image pane for this camera is closed and opened again, the <strong>Panorama view </strong>mode is displayed.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>7.5</strong></td>
<td><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark74"><em>Displaying a panoramic camera, page 37</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark38"><em>Viewing modes of a panoramic camera, page 25</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark405"><em>Image pane, page 139</em></a></li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Displaying a dual thermal/optical camera</strong></p>
<p>In Operator Client you can display the thermal and optical mode of a dual camera either separately or simultaneously.</p>
<p><strong>To display the desired viewing mode of the camera:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Drag the camera to an Image pane or</p>
<p>Select an Image pane and in the <strong>Logical Tree </strong>window, double-click the desired camera.</p>
<p>The selected camera image is displayed in the Image pane.</p>
<p>The viewing mode is displayed in the title bar of the Image pane:</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="325" height="46" class="wp-image-2819" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-30.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 30" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 298" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-30.jpeg 325w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-30-300x42.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 325px) 100vw, 325px" /> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="142" height="45" class="wp-image-2820" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-31.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 31" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 299"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="56" height="56" class="wp-image-2821" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-32.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 32" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 300"></p>
<p><strong>7.6</strong></p>
<p><strong>7.7</strong></p>
<p><strong>7.8</strong></p>
<p><strong>Optical îü Thermal</strong></p>
<p><strong>To switch the viewing mode of the camera:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>In the title bar of the Image pane displaying the camera, select the desired viewing mode.</p>
<p><strong>To display the thermal and optical mode of the camera simultaneously:</strong></p>
<p>1.</p>
<p>2.</p>
<p>Select the Image pane displaying the camera.</p>
<p>Press the CTRL-key and drag and drop the camera image to another Image pane.</p>
<p>The second viewing mode of the camera is displayed in the new Image pane.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark80"></a> Displaying cameras from multiple Management Servers</p>
<p>Main window &gt; <strong>Enterprise Logical Tree</strong></p>
<p>Log on as a user of an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark455"> Enterprise User Group</a>.</p>
<p>In the Enterprise<a href="#post-2789-bookmark472"> Logical Tree</a>, expand the item of the desired<a href="#post-2789-bookmark473"> Management Server</a>. You can use the devices that are configured for this Management Server.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark82"></a> Finding an item in the Logical Tree</p>
<p>Main window</p>
<p><strong>To find an item in the Logical Tree:</strong></p>
<p>1.</p>
<p>2.</p>
<p>3.</p>
<p>4.</p>
<p>Right-click the root node or a child node of the Logical Tree and click <strong>Tree search </strong>Or:</p>
<p>In the Logical Tree window press Ctrl + F.</p>
<p>The search box is displayed</p>
<p>Type a search string representing the display name of an item.</p>
<p>The search is triggered immediately during typing and the first item that matches the search string is marked. If you want to display it in an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane</a>, double-click it. If the search string is not found, the background color of the search box changes.</p>
<p>Click or <sup>v</sup> to mark the previous or the next matching item.</p>
<p>Click X to close the search box.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark407"><em> Search box, page 139</em></a></p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark84"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark85"></a> Changing the number of Image pane rows</p>
<p>Main window</p>
<p>You can change the number of Image pane rows displayed in the Image window.</p>
<p><strong>To show fewer image pane rows:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>On the <strong>Tools </strong>menu, click <strong>Show fewer Image pane rows </strong>or</p>
<p>Move the <strong>Change image pane rows </strong>slider or</p>
<p>to the left</p>
<p>Click</p>
<p>or</p>
<p>Press F7.</p>
<p><strong>To show more Image pane rows:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>On the <strong>Tools </strong>menu, click <strong>Show more Image pane rows </strong>or</p>
<p>Move the <strong>Change image pane rows </strong>slider to the right</p>
<p>or</p>
<p>Click ® or</p>
<p>Press F8.</p>
<p><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="75" height="75" class="wp-image-2822" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-33.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 33" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 301"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="75" height="75" class="wp-image-2823" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-34.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 34" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 302"> The maximum number of Image pane rows displayed in the Image window is configured in the BVMS Configuration Client.</p>
<p>If you have reached this number, the <strong>Show more Image pane rows </strong>menu command and the</p>
<p>o</p>
<p>button are disabled.</p>
<p>If the maximum number of Image pane rows has been set to 1, the <strong>Change image pane rows</strong></p>
<p>slider is not displayed.</p>
<p><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>This limitation does not affect the BVMS Export Player.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark87"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark88"></a> 7.9 Arranging and resizing Image panes</p>
<p>Main window</p>
<p><strong>To arrange Image panes:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Drag an item from the <strong>Logical tree </strong>window to an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane</a>. Repeat this until all required cameras are displayed.</li>
</ol>
<p>If an object is already displayed in a target Image pane, this object is replaced.</p>
<ol>
<li>Drag a camera from one Image pane to another, if required.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>To resize an Image pane:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Point to a border or corner of an Image pane. The pointer appears as a double-headed arrow.</li>
</ol>
<p>You can resize diagonally, vertically or horizontally.</p>
<p>The resulting size of the Image pane is limited to the grid of the select Image pane pattern.</p>
<p>The Image pane ratio is not restricted to the 4:3 or 16:9 aspect ratio.</p>
<ol>
<li>Drag to resize the Image pane.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark402"><em> Image window, page 138</em></a></p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark90"></a> 7.10 Displaying the Alarm Image window</p>
<p>Main window</p>
<p>You can switch from the Image window to the <a href="#post-2789-bookmark435">Alarm Image window</a> if at least one alarm is in the Alarm List.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="75" height="75" class="wp-image-2824" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-35.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 35" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 303"><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>A site map displayed in an alarm image pane is optimized for display and contains only the initial view of the original map file.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>To display the Alarm Image window:</strong></p>
<p><em>a*-</em></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>In an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark463"> Image window</a>, click .</p>
<p>The Alarm Image window is displayed.</p>
<p><strong>To display the Image window again:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>In an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark463"> Image window</a>, click .</p>
<p>Live Mode or Playback Mode is displayed depending on the Mode that was displayed before.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark372"><em>Alarm display, page 123</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark402"><em>Image window, page 138</em></a></li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>7.11</strong></td>
<td><strong>Starting manual recording</strong></p>
<p>Main window</p>
<p>You can start recording for each camera manually. The quality level of alarm recording mode is used. The duration of alarm recording is configured in the Configuration Client.</p>
<p>If the selected camera is already recording, the quality level is changed to alarm recording mode. With VRM recording, the alarm recording is not protected.</p>
<p><strong>To start recording:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Select an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane </a>displaying a camera.</li>
<li>Click * .</li>
</ol>
<p>Recording is started.</p>
<p>VRM recordings only: You cannot manually stop recording. The recording stops after the configured alarm recording time. In the Timeline of the camera, the pre-alarm recording is displayed as alarm recording, if pre-alarm recording is configured in Configuration Client.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark405"><em>Image pane, page 139</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark418"><em>Timeline window, page 141</em></a></li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>7.12</strong></td>
<td><a id="post-2789-bookmark93"></a><strong>Starting a pre-configured camera sequence</strong></p>
<p>Main window</p>
<p>With a<a href="#post-2789-bookmark444"> camera sequence</a>, a group of cameras are displayed one after the other. The pre­configured camera sequences are configured in the Configuration Client and appear in the <a href="#post-2789-bookmark472">Logical Tree</a>.</p>
<p>A sequence is configured to use more than one<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> image pane </a>in Operator Client or in a monitor group. If there are not enough<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> image panes </a>or monitor panes to display the whole sequence, only those panes are displayed which fit into the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark463"> image window</a>. The remaining panes are not displayed and an appropriate message is displayed.</p>
<p>Under the following conditions, a sequence is not being displayed:</p>
<ul>
<li>Video loss</li>
<li>Connection to the camera lost</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>4</strong></td>
<td colspan="2"><strong>2 </strong>en | Displaying camera images BVMS</p>
<ul>
<li>No permission to display the camera</li>
<li>Camera not configured</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>When the configuration is changed and activated, a camera sequence (pre-configured or automatic) usually is continued after restart of the Operator Client.</p>
<p><em>b</em> But in the following cases the sequence is not continued:</p>
<p><em>[ A</em> A monitor where the sequence is configured to be displayed has been removed.</p>
<p>The mode of a monitor (single/quad view) where the sequence is configured to be displayed has been changed.</p>
<p>The logical number of a monitor where the sequence is configured to be displayed is changed.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"><strong>7.13</strong></td>
<td><strong>To start and control a camera sequence:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Drag the required sequence from the <strong>Logical tree </strong>window to an image pane or to a</li>
</ol>
<p>monitor group.</p>
<p>1 k [P</p>
<p>The sequence is displayed indicated by the — symbol when running in an image pane.</p>
<ol>
<li>When running in an image pane: Click a playback control icon of the image window toolbar to control the sequence.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark405"><em> Image pane, page 139</em></a></p>
<p><strong>Starting an automatic camera sequence</strong></p>
<p>Main window</p>
<p>With a<a href="#post-2789-bookmark444"> camera sequence</a>, a group of cameras are displayed one after the other.</p>
<p>You configure the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark450"> dwell time </a>for these sequences in the <strong>Options </strong>dialog box (<strong>Extras </strong>menu,</p>
<p><strong>Options&#8230; </strong>command).</p>
<p>Under the following conditions, a sequence is not being displayed:</p>
<ul>
<li>Video loss</li>
<li>Connection to the camera lost</li>
<li>No permission to display the camera</li>
<li>Camera not configured</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><em>f</em><strong> • J</strong></td>
<td><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>When the configuration is changed and activated, a camera sequence (pre-configured or automatic) usually is continued after restart of the Operator Client.</p>
<p>But in the following cases the sequence is not continued:</p>
<p>A monitor where the sequence is configured to be displayed has been removed.</p>
<p>The mode of a monitor (single/quad view) where the sequence is configured to be displayed has been changed.</p>
<p>The logical number of a monitor where the sequence is configured to be displayed is changed.</p>
<p><strong>To start a camera sequence:</strong></p>
<p>1. Select an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane </a>where you want the sequence to be played.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>BVMS</td>
<td>Displaying camera images | en <strong>43</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>2. Right-click a folder in the <strong>Logical Tree </strong>and click <strong>Show as sequence in selected image pane</strong>.</p>
<p>The cameras of the selected folder are displayed one after the other in the selected</p>
<p>| [J</p>
<p>Image pane. indicates that the sequence is running.</p>
<p><strong>To pause a camera sequence:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>In the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark463"> Image window</a> toolbar, click <strong>^^.</strong></p>
<p>[nW</p>
<p>The sequence stops playing, as indicated by .</p>
<p><strong>To jump to the previous / next step of a camera sequence:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>In the Image window toolbar, click or <strong>^^.</strong></p>
<p>The sequence jumps to the previous or next step.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark385"><em> Options dialog box, page 134</em></a></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>7.14</strong></td>
<td><strong>Using one channel audio mode</strong></p>
<p>Main window</p>
<p>You use one channel audio mode when you want to hear only one audio source assigned to a camera. You cannot activate audio for another camera.</p>
<p><strong>To activate / de-activate multichannel audio mode:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>On the <strong>Extras </strong>menu, click <strong>Options </strong></li>
<li>Select the <strong>Playback audio of the selected Image pane </strong>check box.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark385"><em> Options dialog box, page 134</em></a></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>7.15</strong></td>
<td><strong>Using multichannel audio mode</strong></p>
<p>Main window</p>
<p>You use multichannel audio mode when you want to hear different audio sources at the same time. You can activate different audio sources assigned to a camera in the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane </a>of each camera.</p>
<p><strong>To activate / de-activate multichannel audio mode:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>On the <strong>Extras </strong>menu, click <strong>Options </strong></li>
<li>Select the <strong>Multichannel audio playback </strong>check box.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark385"><em> Options dialog box, page 134</em></a></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>7.16</strong></td>
<td><strong>Using digital zoom</strong></p>
<p>Main window</p>
<p>Every<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane </a>provides a digital zoom function. This digital zoom has 11 levels: 1x, 1.35x, 1.8x, 2.5x, 3.3x, 4.5x, 6x, 8.2x, 11x, 14.9x, 20.1x.</p>
<p>When you save a Favorites View, the current setting of the digital zoom and the image section are saved.</p>
<p>ll<sup>&#8211;</sup>-.</p>
<p>When you click , the current setting of the digital zoom and the image section are used</p>
<p>for instant playback.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>When Operator Client restarts, the current setting of the digital zoom and the image section are retained.</p>
<p><strong>To use digital zoom:</strong></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>1.</td>
<td>Rotate the wheel button forward or backward to zoom in or zoom out.</p>
<p>indicates that the digital zoom was used.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2.</p>
<p>3.</td>
<td>Drag the image to navigate to the desired image section.</p>
<p>Right-click the Image pane and click <strong>Zoom 1:1 </strong>to return to the original size.</p>
<p>s <sub>H</sub>.</p>
<p>disappears.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Note:</strong></p>
<p>You can also use the controls for digital zoom in the <strong>PTZ Control </strong>window. When you rotate the wheel button for PTZ cameras, you use optical zoom.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><em>—</em></td>
<td><a href="#post-2789-bookmark150"><em>Using in-window control of a PTZ camera, page 55</em></a></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><em>—</em></td>
<td><a href="#post-2789-bookmark397"><em>Favorites Tree window, page 137</em></a></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><em>—</em></td>
<td><a href="#post-2789-bookmark415"><em>PTZ Control window, page 140</em></a></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><em>—</em></td>
<td><a href="#post-2789-bookmark405"><em>Image pane, page 139</em></a></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2789-bookmark103"></a> Saving a single image pane</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Main window <strong>To save a single image pane:</strong></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>1.</td>
<td>Select an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane</a>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2.</td>
<td>Click ^^.</p>
<p>A dialog box for saving the image file is displayed.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>3.</td>
<td>Select the desired directory, enter a file name, and select the desired file type. JPG and BMP are available.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>4.</td>
<td>Click <strong>OK</strong>.</p>
<p>The image pane is saved. The file contains additional information about the camera, map or map viewport.</p>
<p>If you logged on to an Enterprise Management Server, the camera name is displayed with the name of this camera’s Management Server as a prefix.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><em>—</em></td>
<td><a href="#post-2789-bookmark405"><em>Image pane, page 139</em></a></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2789-bookmark105"></a> Printing a single image pane</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Main window <strong>To print a single image pane:</strong></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>1.</td>
<td>Select an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane</a>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2.</td>
<td>Click <strong>^P.</strong></p>
<p>A dialog box for selecting the printer is displayed.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>3.</td>
<td>Click <strong>OK</strong>.</p>
<p>The image pane is printed. The printout contains additional information about the camera, map or map viewport.</p>
<p>If you logged on to an Enterprise Management Server, the camera name is displayed with the name of this camera’s Management Server as a prefix.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>BVMS</td>
<td>Displaying camera images | en <strong>45</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>7.19</strong></td>
<td><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark405"><em> Image pane, page 139</em></a></p>
<p><strong>Switching to full-screen mode</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>7.20</strong></td>
<td>Main window</p>
<p>Full-screen mode hides many control elements, for example the menu commands or the Alarm List if no alarm monitor was switched to full-screen mode. For accessing these control elements, leave the full-screen-mode.</p>
<p><strong>To display the entire Image window in full-screen mode:</strong></p>
<p><strong>IS</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>On the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark463"> Image window</a> toolbar, click .</p>
<p>The Image window is displayed in full-screen mode.</p>
<p><strong>To leave the full-screen mode:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Click ® .</p>
<p><strong>To maximize a selected Image pane:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Right-click an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane </a>and click <strong>Maximize</strong>.</p>
<p>The selected Image pane is displayed using the entire Image window.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark402"><em> Image window, page 138</em></a></p>
<p><strong>Displaying or hiding the Image pane bars</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>7.21</strong></td>
<td>Main window</p>
<p><strong>To display / hide the toolbars:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Click to display the toolbars of the selected image pane.</p>
<p>Click to hide the toolbars of the selected image pane.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark402"><em> Image window, page 138</em></a></p>
<p><strong>Displaying information on a camera</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>7.22</strong></td>
<td>Main window</p>
<p><strong>To display information:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Right-click an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane </a>with a camera assigned and click <strong>Properties</strong>. A dialog box with the camera properties is displayed.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark405"><em> Image pane, page 139</em></a></p>
<p><strong>Enabling video content analysis (VCA)</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Main window or <a href="#post-2789-bookmark435">alarm image window</a></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>To enable:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Right-click an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane</a> or alarm image pane with a camera assigned and click <strong>Enable Content Analysis</strong>.</p>
<p>The VCA overlays are displayed.</p>
<p><strong>To disable:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Right-click an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane</a> or alarm image pane with a camera assigned and click <strong>Disable Content Analysis</strong>.</p>
<p>The VCA overlays disappear.</p>
<p>This setting is retained after the next restart or re-logon of Operator Client, after closing the camera and displaying it again in an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane</a>, or after an alarm with the assigned camera is triggered again.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark115"></a> 7.23 Showing video content analysis (VCA) rules</p>
<p>Main window</p>
<p><strong>To show VCA rules:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Right-click an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane</a> with a camera assigned and click <strong>Show Content Analysis rules</strong>. The VCA rules are displayed.</p>
<p><strong>To hide VCA rules:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Right-click an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane</a> with a camera assigned and click <strong>Hide Content Analysis rules</strong>. The VCA rules disappear.</p>
<p>This setting is not persistent after the next restart or re-logon of Operator Client or after closing the camera and displaying it again in an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane</a>.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark117"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark118"></a> 7.24 Starting instant playback</p>
<p>s-</p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p>You can view the recordings of a camera in an Image pane in the Live Mode.</p>
<p>If configured you can change the recording source.</p>
<p>The current setting of the digital zoom and the image section are used for instant playback. The start time (number of seconds in the past or rewind time) for<a href="#post-2789-bookmark464"> instant playback</a> is configured in the <strong>Options </strong>dialog box (<strong>Extras </strong>menu, <strong>Options&#8230; </strong>command).</p>
<p><strong>To start instant playback:</strong></p>
<p>1. Select the required<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane</a>.</p>
<p>I</p>
<p>L'&#8221;&#8216;.</p>
<p>.</p>
<p>The recording is played.</p>
<p>3. Switch to the desired recording source if available.</p>
<p><strong>Note: </strong>After switching the recording source the rewind time can deviate from the configured value.</p>
<p>I</p>
<p>tf&#8217;Si</p>
<p><strong>Si.</strong></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Note: </strong>More than one Image pane with instant playback is possible, even multiple instant playbacks of the same camera.</p>
<p>The rewind time for instant playback is configured in the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark388"> <em>Control tab, page 134</em></a>.</p>
<p><strong>To start/stop loop playback:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Click &#8216; —&#8217;.</p>
<p>The duration of looped instant playback in the live image pane is the rewind time backwards plus the rewind time forwards from the time you click <sup>1</sup> —<sup>1</sup>.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark388"><em>Control tab, page 134</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark405"><em>Image pane, page 139</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark288"><em>Switching the recording source, page 95</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark385"><em>Options dialog box, page 134</em></a></li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>7.25</strong></td>
<td><strong>Assigning a camera to a monitor</strong></p>
<p><strong>„ . <sub>rt</sub> S- &#8220;T:</strong></p>
<p>Main window &gt; &gt;</p>
<p>You can assign IP devices to a decoder. This displays the video signal on the monitor and plays the audio signal on the speakers if connected to the decoder. Bosch Allegiant cameras cannot be assigned this way.</p>
<p><strong>To assign a camera image to a monitor:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Drag a camera from the window to the desired monitor in the Image pane.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>7.26</strong></td>
<td><strong>Using audio mode</strong></p>
<p>Main window</p>
<p>If available you can activate audio for a selected camera.</p>
<p>To hear the audio signal of multiple cameras simultaneously, activate multichannel audio mode.</p>
<p>You switch the audio mode in the <strong>Options </strong>dialog box (<strong>Extras </strong>menu, <strong>Options&#8230;</strong>command). <strong>To activate / de-activate audio:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Select an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane</a>.</li>
<li>Click to de-activate or to activate audio.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark405"><em>Image pane, page 139</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark385"><em>Options dialog box, page 134</em></a></li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>7.27</strong></td>
<td><strong>Using the Intercom functionality</strong></p>
<p><strong>S&#8221;</strong></p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p>You can use the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark467"> Intercom functionality</a> only when Live Mode is active.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Ensure that the microphone is active on your sound card and its volume is not 0. You perform this task in the Control Panel of your workstation computer. Additionally ensure that in the recording control of your sound card only the microphone is selected, not the stereo mix. For Windows 7: Disable all input devices except the one you want to use for Intercom functionality.</p>
<p>The following screenshot shows an example:</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="644" height="725" class="wp-image-2825" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-36.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 36" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 304" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-36.jpeg 644w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-36-266x300.jpeg 266w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 644px) 100vw, 644px" /></p>
<p>If you change the setting from stereo mix to microphone after the first start of Operator Client, the setting is overridden after the next start of Operator Client. We recommend to use a headset instead of a microphone-loudspeaker combination to avoid acoustic feedback.</p>
<p>The Intercom functionality only works with an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark452"> encoder</a> that has both audio-in and audio-out. Ensure that the volume settings for the encoder microphone and loudspeakers are not 0. You perform this task in Configuration Client.</p>
<p>To use Intercom functionality on your workstation your user group must be granted to use it. You perform this task in Configuration Client.</p>
<p>In the <strong>Options </strong>dialog box, you can configure half<a href="#post-2789-bookmark449"> duplex</a> or full duplex mode.</p>
<p><strong>To use Intercom functionality:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Select an Image pane with an audio encoder.</li>
<li>Click and hold the mouse button. If audio was off for this Image pane, it is switched on automatically.</li>
</ol>
<p><sub>Th</sub> . <sub>h t</sub> 1“</p>
<p>The icon changes to .</p>
<p>Now you can talk. If configured, the other side can talk also, regardless whether the icon is clicked or not.</p>
<ol>
<li>Release the mouse button. The transfer is interrupted.</li>
</ol>
<p>Audio remains on for this Image pane.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="75" height="75" class="wp-image-2826" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-37.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 37" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 305"><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>An incoming auto pop-up alarm can interrupt the transfer.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark402"><em> Image window, page 138</em></a></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>7.28</strong></td>
<td><strong>Locking the control of a PTZ camera</strong></p>
<p><strong>S&#8221;</strong></p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p>You can lock the control of a PTZ camera for other users. A user with a higher priority can take over the control and lock the camera control. A timeout can be configured for this explicit PTZ locking. If you only take over the control without manually locking it before, the control is locked for the user with lower priority for 5 seconds.</p>
<p><strong>To lock a PTZ control:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Select one of the following items:</li>
</ol>
<ul>
<li>Image pane with PTZ camera</li>
<li>PTZcameraintheLogicalTree</li>
<li>PTZ camera in the Favorites Tree</li>
<li>PTZ camera in the Map window</li>
</ul>
<ol>
<li>Right-click the Image pane or the PTZ camera and click <strong>Lock</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>The users with lower priorities cannot use the PTZ control any longer. On their displays a corresponding message box is displayed.</p>
<p>To stop the locking of the PTZ control, right-click the Image pane or the PTZ camera and click <strong>Unlock</strong>.</p>
<p>The locking ends automatically after a configured time period or when you log off.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark402"><em>Image window, page 138</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark409"><em>Map window, page 140</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark395"><em>Logical Tree window, page 136</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark397"><em>Favorites Tree window, page 137</em></a></li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>7.29</strong></td>
<td><strong>Updating the reference image</strong></p>
<p><strong>S&#8221;</strong></p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p>You can update the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark483"> reference image</a>.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>To update the reference image:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Right-click an Image pane and click <strong>Reference Image </strong></li>
</ol>
<p>The <strong>Reference Image </strong>dialog box is displayed.</p>
<ol>
<li>Click <strong>Update.</strong></li>
</ol>
<p>The image of the time when you click <strong>Update </strong>is displayed.</p>
<p><strong>Reference Image dialog box</strong></p>
<p><strong>Camera view:</strong></p>
<p>Displays the live view of the selected camera.</p>
<p><strong>Reference Image</strong></p>
<p>Displays the reference image after clicking <strong>Update</strong>.</p>
<p><strong>Update</strong></p>
<p>Click to set the reference image. The image of the time when you click <strong>Update </strong>is used.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="50" height="50" class="wp-image-2827" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-38.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 38" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 306"><a id="post-2789-bookmark130"></a> 7.30 Displaying a monitor group</p>
<p>S&#8221; Main window &gt; &gt;</p>
<p><strong>To assign a monitor group to an image pane:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Drag a monitor group from the <strong>Logical tree </strong>window to an image pane. The selected monitor group is displayed in the image pane.</li>
</ol>
<p>Or select an image pane.</p>
<ol>
<li>In the <strong>Logical tree </strong>window, double-click a monitor group. The selected monitor group is displayed in the image pane.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>To assign a camera to a monitor:</strong></p>
<p>1. Drag a camera from the <strong>Logical tree </strong>window to a monitor.</p>
<p>The selected camera is displayed in the monitor.</p>
<p>Every assigned camera of a monitor group displays a snapshot. This snapshot helps you to identify, for example, if the correct camera is used or if the camera is reachable. The snapshot image is updated every minute.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="55" height="51" class="wp-image-2828" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-39.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 39" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 307"><strong>To switch the layout of a monitor group:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Click</p>
<p><strong>To reset the default layout settings of a monitor group:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Right-click the appropriate monitor group in the <strong>Logical tree</strong>.</li>
<li>Select <strong>Reset to default layout settings</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Note: </strong>The default layout settings of a MG are the settings, that are configured in the Configuration Client for this MG.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark132"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark133"></a> 7.31 Selecting live stream for display</p>
<p>s-</p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p>You can select the stream of a camera for display in an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane</a>. This is for example useful when the default stream is not available. In this case you can switch to another stream.</p>
<p>In the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark472"> Logical Tree </a>you select the preferred stream to be used when the camera is displayed later.</p>
<p>In the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane </a>of an already displayed camera you can switch the stream immediately.</p>
<p>The stream selection in an Image pane displaying a camera is retained after restarting Operator Client without explicitly closing this Image pane before. If the default stream has been selected in an Image pane and the default stream is changed using Configuration Client, the stream used for Live display is automatically changed after restart.</p>
<p>You can save the stream selection of an Image pane in a view in the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark459"> Favorites Tree</a>.</p>
<p>When using Operator Client with a version earlier than BVMS 5.5.5 to open a view previously saved with Operator Client 5.5.5, the default stream is used.</p>
<p>When using Operator Client with version 5.5.5 to display a view that was saved with Operator Client with a version earlier than 5.5.5, the default stream is used.</p>
<p><strong>To pre-select a preferred stream:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>In the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark472"> Logical Tree</a>, right-click a camera, point to <strong>Preferred stream</strong>, and then click one of the available menu commands.</p>
<p>When you drag this camera to an Image pane next time, the preferred stream is used for display.</p>
<p><strong>To select a stream:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Right-click the camera image in an Image pane, point to <strong>Select stream</strong>, and then click one of the available menu commands</p>
<p>The selected stream is used for display.</p>
<p>When you select <strong>Image pane size optimized</strong>, the resolution of the displayed camera is automatically adjusted to the size of the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane </a>depending on the resolution of the used monitor.</p>
<p>The <strong>Image pane size optimized </strong>command is not available for the following cameras:</p>
<ul>
<li>Cameras with SD resolution</li>
<li>Cameras with identical resolution on stream 1 and stream 2</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark161"><em>Using favorites and bookmarks, page 62</em></a></li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark135"></a> 7.32 Displaying video via low bandwidth</p>
<p>Main window</p>
<p>You can play back the recordings of a camera or view live images of a camera with Operator Client even if you have a low bandwidth network connection between BVMS and your Operator Client computer.</p>
<p>Transcoders do not support intelligent tracking,<a href="#post-2789-bookmark485"> ROI</a>,<a href="#post-2789-bookmark466"> Intelligent Video Analytics </a>overlays, and text data.</p>
<p>For using low bandwidth networks, 2 options are available:</p>
<ul>
<li>Hardware transcoding</li>
<li>Software transcoding (only available for Live Mode)</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Hardware transcoding</strong></p>
<p>For hardware transcoding the VRM must be equipped with at least one transcoding device. This transcoding device is not configured in BVMS. See the VRM documentation on how to configure a transcoding device. Transcoding devices can have multiple transcoding instances. DIVAR IP 3000 and DIVAR IP 7000 are delivered each with one preconfigured transcoding instance.</p>
<p>Each live stream or recording needs an own transcoding instance.</p>
<p>Hardware transcoding is possible only for Video IP devices from Bosch connected to a VRM. Both camera and transcoding device must be managed by the same VRM.</p>
<p><strong>Software transcoding</strong></p>
<p>For software transcoding you need a Mobile Video Service configured on your Management Server or your Enterprise Management Server.</p>
<p>In an Enterprise System only the MVS services are used that are configured in the Enterprise Management Server configuration.</p>
<p>To select the preferred transcoding device, use the <strong>Options </strong>dialog box.</p>
<p><strong>To enable transcoding:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>In the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark472"> Logical Tree</a>, right-click the desired camera, point to <strong>Preferred stream</strong>, and then click to enable <strong>Transcoding</strong>.</li>
<li>Display the camera in an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane</a>.</li>
</ol>
<p>■=&gt; This camera shows transcoded video.</p>
<p>I</p>
<p>ff;:. ff::.</p>
<p>icon for hardware transcoding or the</p>
<p>icon for software transcoding is displayed.</p>
<p>If the affected camera is already displayed in an Image pane, it continues displaying untranscoded video until you close this Image pane.</p>
<p>If a transcoding request cannot be fulfilled, the related Image pane turns black.</p>
<p><strong>To disable transcoding in Live Mode:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>In the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark472"> Logical Tree</a>, right-click the desired camera, point to <strong>Preferred stream</strong>, and then select another stream.</li>
<li>Display the camera in an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane</a>.</li>
</ol>
<p>■=&gt; This camera shows untranscoded video.</p>
<p>The transcoding icon is not displayed.</p>
<p>If the affected camera is already displayed in an Image pane, it continues displaying transcoded video until you close this Image pane.</p>
<p><strong>To disable transcoding in Playback Mode:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>In the Logical Tree, right-click the desired camera, point to <strong>Preferred stream</strong>, and then click to disable <strong>Transcoding</strong>.</li>
<li>Display the camera in an Image pane.</li>
</ol>
<ul>
<li>=&gt; This camera shows untranscoded video.</li>
</ul>
<p>The transcoding icon is not displayed.</p>
<p>If the affected camera is already displayed in an Image pane, it continues displaying transcoded video until you close this Image pane.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="75" height="75" class="wp-image-2829" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-40.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 40" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 308"><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>7.33</p>
<p>You can also enable or disable transcoding in an Image pane directly:</p>
<p>Right-click the item, point to <strong>Select stream</strong>, and then click the desired menu command.</p>
<p>This setting only affects the selected Image pane.</p>
<p>This command does not affect the setting for the preferred stream in the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark472"> Logical Tree</a>.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark385"><em>Options dialog box, page 134</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark405"><em>Image pane, page 139</em></a></li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark137"></a> Using TCP for reliable connection</p>
<p>S&#8221;</p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p>For each Video IP device from Bosch in your system you can establish a more reliable connection if required. This can be useful if you have for example connection losses due to high network load. You enable <a href="#post-2789-bookmark489">TCP </a>for a selected camera to achieve a more reliable connection.</p>
<p>For all cameras of an entire workstation the system administrator can configure that the default protocol is TCP or<a href="#post-2789-bookmark491"> UDP</a>. For a single camera you can override the default protocol. <strong>Note: </strong>From encoder firmware version 7.0, it is possible to display secure UDP for BVIP encoders. You can switch between TCP and UDP for live video of an encoder.</p>
<p>If you are using older firmware versions and the administrator activated the encryption for live video of an encoder in Configuration Client, TCP is selected by default and it is not possible to disable TCP.</p>
<p><strong>To enable TCP:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>In the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark472"> Logical Tree</a>, right-click a camera and click <strong>Enable TCP</strong>.</p>
<p>■=&gt; The connection to the camera is now established via TCP. The context menu entry of this camera changes to <strong>Disable TCP</strong>.</p>
<p><strong>To enable UDP:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>In the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark472"> Logical Tree</a>, right-click a camera and click <strong>Disable TCP</strong>.</p>
<p>■=&gt; The connection to the camera is now established via UDP. The context menu entry of this camera changes to <strong>Enable TCP</strong>.</p>
<p><strong>To use the configured default protocol:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>In the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark472"> Logical Tree</a>, right-click a camera and click <strong>Use default protocol (TCP) </strong>or <strong>Use default protocol (UDP)</strong>. It depends on the current configuration which of these two menu commands is available.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark140"></a> 7.34 Connecting to an unmanaged site</p>
<p>Main window</p>
<p>You can connect to an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark492"> unmanaged site</a>. All available devices of all video network devices of this site are then displayed in the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark472"> Logical Tree</a>. As soon as you log off or exit Operator Client, this connection is terminated.</p>
<p><strong>To connect:</strong></p>
<p>Q</p>
<ol>
<li>Right-click .</li>
<li>Click <strong>Connect to Site</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>Q</p>
<p>As long as the device is connecting, i is displayed.</p>
<p>o</p>
<p>After the connection is successfully established, is displayed.</p>
<p>All available devices of this site are displayed in the Logical Tree.</p>
<p>If not all devices belonging to this site can be connected, is displayed. You can later try to connect the remaining devices that were not connected now.</p>
<p>o</p>
<p><strong>Tip: </strong>You can also double-click to connect.</p>
<p><strong>To connect remaining devices:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Right-click</li>
<li>Click <strong>Retry Connection</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="54" height="51" class="wp-image-2830" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-41.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 41" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 309"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="43" height="37" class="wp-image-2831" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-42.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 42" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 310"><strong>To disconnect a single site:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Right-click</li>
<li><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="50" height="50" class="wp-image-2832" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-43.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 43" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 311"> Click <strong>Disconnect from Site</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>The icon changes:</p>
<p>All<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image panes </a>with devices belonging to this site are automatically closed.</p>
<p><strong>To disconnect all sites:</strong></p>
<p>Click</p>
<p>All sites are disconnected. Partially connected sites are not disconnected.</p>
<p>All Image panes with devices belonging to this site are automatically closed.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark26"><em> Unmanaged site, page 18</em></a></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>7.35</strong></td>
<td><strong>Displaying a video analytics alarm</strong></p>
<p><strong>S&#8221;</strong></p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p>You can display the analytics viewer application of the configured <a href="#post-2789-bookmark495">video analytics </a>platform.</p>
<p>The<a href="#post-2789-bookmark438"> analytics viewer</a> application shows you analytics alarm details.</p>
<p><strong>Prerequisites</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Drag the video analytics item to an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane</a>.</p>
<p>The default image of the analytics viewer application is displayed.</p>
<p>For displaying the analytics viewer application, a video analytics alarm must be available in the <a href="#post-2789-bookmark436">Alarm List</a>.</p>
<p><strong>To display the alarm viewer application:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>In the <a href="#post-2789-bookmark436">Alarm List</a>, click to select a video analytics alarm.</p>
<p>The analytics viewer application is displayed in the Image pane where you dragged the video analytics item.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>7.36</strong></td>
<td><strong>Displaying Intelligent Insights widgets</strong></p>
<p>Main window</p>
<p>You can display an Intelligent Insights widget in an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> image pane</a>.</p>
<p><strong>To display an </strong>Intelligent Insights <strong>widget in an image pane:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Drag an Intelligent Insights widget from the <strong>Logical tree </strong>window to an image pane. The Intelligent Insights widget is displayed in the image pane.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark146"></a> Using PTZ cameras</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="75" height="75" class="wp-image-2833" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-44.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 44" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 312"><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>This document describes some functions that are not available for BVMS Viewer.</p>
<p>For detailed information about the different BVMS editions refer to <a href="https://www.boschsecurity.com/xc/en/solutions/management-software/bvms/" rel="nofollow noopener" target="_blank">www.boschsecurity.com</a> and the BVMS Quick Selection Guide:<a href="https://media.boschsecurity.com/fs/media/en/pb/images/products/management_software/bvms/bvms_quick-selection-guide.pdf" rel="nofollow noopener" target="_blank"> BVMS Quick Selection Guide</a>.</p>
<p>This chapter provides information on how to use the <strong>PTZ Control </strong>window.</p>
<p>Some of the features described in this chapter can be deactivated for your user group, your <a href="#post-2789-bookmark455">Enterprise User Group </a>or your<a href="#post-2789-bookmark453"> Enterprise Account</a>.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2789-bookmark148"></a> Controlling PTZ cameras</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Main window &gt; tab</p>
<p>You can zoom and control the cameras in the <strong>PTZ Control </strong>window or in the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane</a>.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="75" height="75" class="wp-image-2834" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-45.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 45" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 313"><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>When controlling a MIC 500 PTZ camera, focus near and focus far are permuted. You can switch the behavior directly on the device.</p>
<p><strong>Controlling/zooming cameras in the PTZ Control window:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Select the required Image pane.</li>
<li>Click the various control elements in the <strong>PTZ Control </strong>window to control the camera.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>To move to a preposition of a PTZ camera on a map:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Display a map containing a<a href="#post-2789-bookmark482"> PTZ </a>camera<a href="#post-2789-bookmark460"> hot spot </a>in an Image pane.</li>
<li>Right-click a PTZ camera located on a map, point to <strong>Predefined positions</strong>, and then click the desired preposition command.</li>
</ol>
<p>The camera moves the focus to the selected preposition.</p>
<p><strong>To lock the control of a PTZ camera on a map:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Display a map containing a<a href="#post-2789-bookmark482"> PTZ </a>camera<a href="#post-2789-bookmark460"> hot spot </a>in an Image pane.</li>
<li>Right-click a PTZ camera located on a map and click <strong>Lock</strong>. The PTZ control of this camera is locked for other users.</li>
<li>To unlock: Right-click the locked PTZ camera and click <strong>Unlock</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark415"><em> PTZ Control window, page 140</em></a></p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark150"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark151"></a> 8.2 Using in-window control of a PTZ camera</p>
<p>Main window</p>
<p>After you have assigned a<a href="#post-2789-bookmark482"> PTZ </a>camera to an Image pane, you can use the camera control functions directly in this Image pane.</p>
<p><strong>To use the pan and tilt function:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Move the cursor on the Image pane which displays a PTZ camera.</li>
</ol>
<p>The cursor changes to</p>
<ol>
<li>Press and hold the mouse button.</li>
</ol>
<p>The cursor changes to C3\</p>
<p>To pan and tilt the image slowly, move the mouse slightly in the desired direction.</p>
<p>To pan and tilt more quickly, move the mouse further.</p>
<p><strong>To use the optical zoom function:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>To zoom in, rotate the wheel button forward.</li>
<li>To zoom out, rotate the wheel button backward.</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="256" height="173" class="wp-image-2835" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-46.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 46" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 314"></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="75" height="75" class="wp-image-2836" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-47.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 47" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 315"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="260" height="301" class="wp-image-2837" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-48.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 48" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 316"></p>
<p>8.3</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark405"><em> Image pane, page 139</em></a></p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark111"></a> Using the ROI function</p>
<p>Main window &gt; tab</p>
<p>You can use<a href="#post-2789-bookmark485"> ROI </a>with a fixed HD camera.</p>
<p>You can zoom and control the cameras in the <strong>PTZ Control </strong>window or in the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane</a>.</p>
<p><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>The system administrator must configure the ROI function in Configuration Client.</p>
<p><strong>To use ROI:</strong></p>
<p>1.</p>
<p>Use the following PTZ controls:</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="239" height="39" class="wp-image-2838" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-49.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 49" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 317"></p>
<p>2.</p>
<p>3.</p>
<p>Additionally you can use the digital zoom ( save network bandwidth.</p>
<p>Or</p>
<p>Use the in-window controls.</p>
<p>). But this does not</p>
<p>8.4</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark113"></a> Using Intelligent Tracking</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="73" height="73" class="wp-image-2839" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-50.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 50" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 318"></p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p><strong>Intended use</strong></p>
<p>Intended use of<a href="#post-2789-bookmark465"> Intelligent Tracking</a> is to enable a camera to follow a selected object. You can configure whether the selection of an object is automatically or manually. The camera can be a <a href="#post-2789-bookmark482">PTZ </a>camera or a fixed HD camera (only with<a href="#post-2789-bookmark485"> ROI </a>enabled).</p>
<p>The following 3 modes are available:</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Off</strong>: Intelligent Tracking is turned off.</li>
<li><strong>Auto</strong>: Intelligent Tracking turned on, the largest object is automatically selected for tracking, recommended use: rarely moving objects in the image.</li>
<li><strong>Click</strong>: User selects object to be tracked.</li>
</ul>
<p>After selecting the object to be tracked, a PTZ camera moves to follow the object until this object leaves the visible area of the camera or the operator stops tracking.</p>
<p>A fixed HD camera with the Intelligent Tracking feature enabled defines a surrounding region close to the borders of the selected object and zooms into the image to display only the region. Then the region is moved according to the movement of the object.</p>
<p><strong>To use Intelligent Tracking:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Right-click the Image pane of the camera and click <strong>Enable Content Analysis</strong>.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Auto </strong>or <strong>Click </strong>to enable Intelligent Tracking.</li>
</ol>
<p>■=&gt; The camera follows an object that moves into the camera image.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark153"></a> Using maps, the global map and map viewports</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="75" height="75" class="wp-image-2840" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-51.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 51" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 319"><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>This document describes some functions that are not available for BVMS Viewer.</p>
<p>For detailed information about the different BVMS editions refer to <a href="https://www.boschsecurity.com/xc/en/solutions/management-software/bvms/" rel="nofollow noopener" target="_blank">www.boschsecurity.com</a> and the BVMS Quick Selection Guide:<a href="https://media.boschsecurity.com/fs/media/en/pb/images/products/management_software/bvms/bvms_quick-selection-guide.pdf" rel="nofollow noopener" target="_blank"> BVMS Quick Selection Guide</a>.</p>
<p>This chapter provides information on how to use site maps, the <strong>Map </strong>window, the global map and map viewports.</p>
<p><strong>Site maps</strong></p>
<p>You can view a site map in the required ratio and zooming factor. Hence, you see all your devices and their places at a glance.</p>
<p>You can activate that the site map of the camera in the selected<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane </a>is automatically getting the focus. This site map is displayed in the <strong>Map </strong>window of the <strong>Control </strong>monitor.</p>
<p><strong>Global map</strong></p>
<p>You can see all your cameras that are configured on the global map. You can also search for cameras or locations. You can use the Map-based tracking assistant if the feature is enabled on the respective camera.</p>
<p>The Map-based tracking assistant helps you to track moving objects across multiple cameras. The respective cameras have to be configured on the global map. If an interesting moving object appears in live, playback, or in an alarm image pane, the user can start the Map-based tracking assistant that displays all nearby cameras automatically.</p>
<p><strong>Map viewports</strong></p>
<p>A map viewport is an area of the global map with a specific center and zoom level. You can still zoom in and out or move in any direction, but can also come back to the configured default position of the map viewport.</p>
<p>Some of the features described in this chapter can be deactivated for your user group, your <a href="#post-2789-bookmark455">Enterprise User Group</a> or your<a href="#post-2789-bookmark453"> Enterprise Account</a>.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark155"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark156"></a> 9.1 Displaying a site map</p>
<p>Main window</p>
<p>You can display a site map in the <strong>Map </strong>window or in an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane</a>.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="75" height="75" class="wp-image-2841" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-52.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 52" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 320"><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>A site map displayed in an alarm image pane is optimized for display and contains only the initial view of the original map file.</p>
<p>Depending on your configuration, a site map can display blinking and colored<a href="#post-2789-bookmark460"> hot spots</a>. Each hot spot indicates that a specific state change of the corresponding device has occurred<strong>.</strong></p>
<p><strong>To view a site map in the map window:</strong></p>
<p>o</p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Drag a map from the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark472"> Logical Tree </a>to the tab, wait until the <strong>Map </strong>window is displayed, and drop the site map on the <strong>Map </strong>window.</p>
<p>The site map is displayed.</p>
<p><strong>To view a map in an Image pane:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Drag a site map from the <strong>Logical tree </strong>window to an Image pane.</p>
<p>The site map is displayed in the image pane.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>9.2</strong></td>
<td><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark409"><em> Map window, page 140</em></a></p>
<p><strong>Displaying a map viewport</strong></p>
<p>Main window</p>
<p>You can display a map viewport in an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane</a>.</p>
<p><strong>To view a map viewport in an image pane:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Drag a map viewport from the <strong>Logical tree </strong>window to an image pane.</p>
<p>The map viewport is displayed in the Image pane.</p>
<p><strong>To go to the configured default position of a map viewport:</strong></p>
<p><strong>F</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>After zooming in or out on a map viewport, click 1! to go back to the configured default position.</p>
<p><strong>To search for cameras or locations in a map viewport:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Type the name of a camera, location or address in the search field.</li>
</ol>
<p>As soon as you start typing a dropdown menu with a list of relevant options displays.</p>
<ol>
<li>Select the respective option from the list</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>F</strong></p>
<p>The camera, location or address displays and is indicated with a flag ■. for some seconds.</p>
<p><strong>To display the live video preview of a camera:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Mouse over the respective camera on the global map.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>To change floors in map viewports:</strong></p>
<p>1. Click E.</p>
<p>The field opens.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>9.3</strong></td>
<td>2. Select the respective floor.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark159"></a><strong>Using the Map-based tracking assistant</strong></p>
<p>The Map-based tracking assistant helps you to track moving objects across multiple cameras.</p>
<p>The respective cameras have to be configured on the global map. If an interesting moving object appears in live, playback, or in an alarm image pane, the user can start the Map-based tracking assistant that displays all nearby cameras automatically.</p>
<p>If a camera is in instant playback mode or in playback mode and you start the Map-based tracking assistant, only the cameras that support playback are available in the Map-based tracking assistant display.</p>
<p>The Map-based tracking assistant displays five image panes: one main image pane and maximum four side image panes that are indicated by the Latin letters A-D.</p>
<p>The main image pane displays the selected main camera. The side image panes display the neighbor cameras, whose field of view overlap with the main cameras field of view or are closest by distance.</p>
<p>In the global map, the neighbor cameras are also indicated by the Latin letters A-D. When first starting the Map-based tracking assistant, those letters also display for some seconds in the respective image panes. The letters also display in the image pane bar, if enabled.</p>
<p><strong>Note: </strong>To use the camera control functions, you have to select the respective image pane.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>To start the Map-based tracking assistant</strong></p>
<ol>
<li><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="50" class="wp-image-2842" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-53.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 53" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 321"> Select the image pane of the respective camera.</li>
<li>Click</li>
</ol>
<p>The <strong>Map-based tracking assistant </strong>display pops up.</p>
<p>The selected camera displays as main camera in the central image pane. The neighbor cameras display in the side image panes. The view cones of the neighbor cameras rotate automatically to the direction of the view cone of the main camera.</p>
<p><strong>Note: </strong>If a neighbor camera is a PTZ camera, the actual view cone of the PTZ camera rotates automatically to the direction of the view cone of the main camera.</p>
<p><strong>To display the live video preview of a camera:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Mouse over the respective camera on the global map.</p>
<p><strong>To reassign a main camera:</strong></p>
<p>Double-click the hot spot of the respective camera.</p>
<p>1.</p>
<p>2.</p>
<p>The selected camera displays as main camera in the central image pane. The neighbor cameras reassign accordingly.</p>
<p>Double-click in the side image pane of the respective neighbor camera.</p>
<p>This former neighbor camera now displays as main camera in the central image page. The</p>
<p>neighbor cameras reassign accordingly.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="45" height="57" class="wp-image-2843" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-54.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 54" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 322"></p>
<p>3.</p>
<p>Double-click any location on the global map where you want to focus on.</p>
<p>The location is indicated with</p>
<p>for some seconds and the closest camera displays as</p>
<p>main camera in the central image pane. The neighbor cameras reassign accordingly.</p>
<p><strong>Note: </strong>If no camera view cone covers the selected location, the closest camera within a</p>
<p>range of 80 meters automatically displays as main camera. If no camera view cone covers the selected location, and the closest camera is not within a range of 80 meters, no camera displays as main camera.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="54" height="51" class="wp-image-2844" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-55.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 55" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 323"><strong>Start or stop First person view:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Click</p>
<p>When First person view is enabled, the global map rotates to align the view cone of the main camera to north orientation.</p>
<p>If the main camera is a dome camera, the global map rotates to align the actual view cone of the dome camera to north orientation.</p>
<p><strong>Note: </strong>First person view is enabled by default when you start the Map-based tracking assistant.</p>
<p><strong>To align the global map to default north orientation:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Click</p>
<p>The global map rotates to align to default north orientation. <strong>Note: </strong>The First person view stops.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="75" height="75" class="wp-image-2845" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-56.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 56" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 324"><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>When the default north orientation is enabled and you select a new main camera, the global map does not rotate to align the orientation of the camera view cone. If you want that behavior, you have to start First person view.</p>
<p><strong>To stop the Map-based tracking assistant</strong></p>
<p>1.</p>
<p>When the <strong>Map-based tracking assistant </strong>display is enabled, click</p>
<p>to stop the Map-</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="50" height="50" class="wp-image-2846" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-57.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 57" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 325"></p>
<p>based tracking assistant.</p>
<p>You return to your previous mode (live mode, playback mode or alarm display).</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark376"><em> Map-based tracking assistant display, page 125</em></a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>10</strong></td>
<td><a id="post-2789-bookmark161"></a><strong>Using favorites and bookmarks</strong></p>
<p>This chapter provides information on how to use the Favorites Tree and the Bookmark Tree.</p>
<p><strong>Favorites Tree</strong></p>
<p>You can add every item of the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark472"> Logical Tree </a>to a <a href="#post-2789-bookmark497">view</a> in the Favorites Tree to create your own subset of the Logical Tree. At any time you can display the view or add or delete devices in a view.</p>
<p>When saving a view in the Favorites Tree, you save the following settings:</p>
<ul>
<li>The assignment of cameras or other objects to<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image panes</a></li>
<li>The<a href="#post-2789-bookmark462"> Image pane pattern</a></li>
<li>The current setting of the digital zoom</li>
<li>The image section</li>
<li>The selected stream (only available for Live Mode)</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Bookmark Tree</strong></p>
<p>You can save a time period of live view or a recording in a<a href="#post-2789-bookmark442"> bookmark</a>. A bookmark saves a start and an end time, the cameras assigned to<a href="#post-2789-bookmark463"> Image window </a>at this time, and the entire<a href="#post-2789-bookmark462"> Image</a></p>
<p><a href="#post-2789-bookmark462">pane pattern</a>. A time period of 0 seconds is possible. Bookmarks are saved in the pane.</p>
<p>Deleting a bookmark does not affect the corresponding recordings. You cannot add or remove cameras from a bookmark. To change a bookmark, load it, make your changes and save it.</p>
<p>If a recording is deleted, the corresponding bookmark is not synchronized. If loaded, a black <a href="#post-2789-bookmark461">Image pane </a>is displayed.</p>
<p>If you have logged on to an Enterprise Management Server, the camera name is displayed with the name of this camera’s Management Server as a prefix.</p>
<p><strong>Note: </strong>Do not add more than 4 cameras in one bookmark to avoid performance issues when loading the bookmark.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>\ Î </strong>j</td>
<td><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>This document describes some functions that are not available for BVMS Viewer.</p>
<p>For detailed information about the different BVMS editions refer to <a href="https://www.boschsecurity.com/xc/en/solutions/management-software/bvms/" rel="nofollow noopener" target="_blank">www.boschsecurity.com</a> and the BVMS Quick Selection Guide:<a href="https://media.boschsecurity.com/fs/media/en/pb/images/products/management_software/bvms/bvms_quick-selection-guide.pdf" rel="nofollow noopener" target="_blank"> BVMS Quick Selection Guide</a>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>10.1</strong></td>
<td><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark397"><em>Favorites Tree window, page 137</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark132"><em>Selecting live stream for display, page 50</em></a></li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark163"></a><strong>Adding items to the favorites tree</strong></p>
<p><strong>s&gt; </strong>I;</p>
<p>Main window &gt; &gt; tab</p>
<p>or</p>
<p><sub>u</sub> . &#8211; &#8220;I:,<sub>h</sub></p>
<p>Main window &gt; &gt; tab</p>
<p>You can add each item of the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark472"> Logical Tree </a>to the Favorites Tree. This allows you to define your own subset of the Logical Tree.</p>
<p><strong>To add an item:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Right-click an item and click <strong>Add To Favorites</strong>.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark395"><em>Logical Tree window, page 136</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark397"><em>Favorites Tree window, page 137</em></a></li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark166"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark167"></a> Creating/editing views</p>
<p>10.2</p>
<p>S&#8217; Tr</p>
<p>Main window &gt; &gt; tab</p>
<p>or</p>
<p>Main window &gt; &gt; tab</p>
<p>After having assigned cameras, maps, and HTML files to<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image panes</a>, you can save this assignment and the Image pane pattern in a <a href="#post-2789-bookmark497">view</a> in the Favorites Tree.</p>
<p><strong>To create a new view:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>. Arrange the cameras in the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark463"> Image window</a> in Live Mode and in Playback Mode.</li>
<li>. If desired, use the digital zoom and select an image section.</li>
</ol>
<p>When displaying a view, the live image of the camera is displayed in Live Mode and the recorded video of the camera is displayed in Playback Mode.</p>
<ol>
<li>. In the Image window toolbar, click .</li>
</ol>
<p>A new view is added. Enter a name for the new view.</p>
<p><strong>Limitation for unmanaged sites: </strong>You can create a view of cameras from maximum 20 unmanaged sites.</p>
<p><strong>To display a view:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Double-click the view or right-click the view and click <strong>Load Image pane view</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>The assignment saved in this view is displayed in the Image window.</p>
<p><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="75" height="75" class="wp-image-2847" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-58.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 58" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 326"> The maximum number of Image pane rows displayed in the Image window is configured in the BVMS Configuration Client. If this number has been changed since the last log off from Operator Client and the number of Image pane rows in the saved view exceeds the maximum set by system parameter, the saved view cannot be displayed and a warning is displayed.</p>
<p>You can display the view without the excess rows.</p>
<p><strong>Displaying a view for unmanaged sites</strong></p>
<p>When you load a view for cameras from unmanaged sites, the assignment saved in this view is displayed in the Image window and the unmanaged sites are connected automatically.</p>
<p>If the connection takes more than 3 seconds the <strong>Connecting </strong>dialog box is displayed showing the connection progress.</p>
<ol>
<li>To cancel the connection process, click <strong>Cancel</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>No further unmanaged sites are connected and no further camera images are loaded. The unmanaged sites which have already been connected remain connected and the camera images which have already been loaded remain open.</p>
<p>If there are connection problems, the unmanaged sites which could not be connected are displayed in the <strong>Connecting </strong>dialog box.</p>
<ol>
<li>After the connection process has finished, click <strong>OK</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>If the number of already connected unmanaged sites and unmanaged sites assigned to the Favorite view exceeds the maximum number of 20 connected sites, a warning message is displayed.</p>
<ol>
<li>Click <strong>No </strong>to cancel.</li>
</ol>
<p>Or</p>
<p>Click <strong>OK </strong>to continue.</p>
<p>If you continue, the unmanaged sites which are already connected but are not assigned to the Favorite view are disconnected and only unmanaged sites which are assigned to the Favorite view are connected.</p>
<p><strong>To edit a view:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Double-click the view which you want to edit.</li>
<li>Make the required changes, for example assign cameras to Image panes.</li>
<li>Right-click the required view and click <strong>Update Image pane view</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>To rename a view:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Right-click the required view and click <strong>Rename</strong>.</li>
<li>Enter the name of the view and press ENTER.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>To delete a view:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Right-click the view and click <strong>Remove</strong>.</p>
<p>The view is removed from the Favorites Tree.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark397"><em> Favorites Tree window, page 137</em></a></p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark169"></a> Exporting favorites settings</p>
<p>10.3</p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p>or</p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="71" height="50" class="wp-image-2848" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-59.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 59" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 327"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="77" height="56" class="wp-image-2849" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-60.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 60" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 328"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="67" height="67" class="wp-image-2850" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-61.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 61" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 329"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="67" height="67" class="wp-image-2851" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-62.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 62" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 330"></p>
<p>You can export any single favorites item, folder or the complete favorites tree. You can then share the exported file or files with other users.</p>
<p><strong>To export favorites settings:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Right-click any favorites item, folder or the favorites tree root item, and select <strong>Export</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>The <strong>Export favorites </strong>dialog box displays.</p>
<ol>
<li>Type a password that supplies the minimum complexity requirements.</li>
</ol>
<p>Or deselect the <strong>Protect file with password </strong>check box if protecting the export file is not required.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>BVMS</td>
<td>Using favorites and bookmarks | en <strong>65</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>10.4</strong></td>
<td>
<ol>
<li>If required, select a folder and change the file name.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Save</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Importing favorites settings</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>10.5</strong></td>
<td>
<ol>
<li><strong>TT</strong></li>
</ol>
<p>Main window &gt; &gt; tab</p>
<p>or</p>
<p>Main window &gt; &gt; tab</p>
<p><strong>To import favorites settings:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Right-click any position in the favorites tree where you want to import favorites settings, and select <strong>Import</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>The <strong>Import favorites </strong>dialog box displays.</p>
<ol>
<li>Select the respective file and click <strong>Open</strong>.</li>
<li>If the file is protected, type the password and click <strong>OK</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Adding a bookmark</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>S&#8221;</strong></p>
<p>Main window &gt; &gt; Assign desired cameras to<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image panes</a></p>
<p>or</p>
<p>Main window &gt; &gt; Assign desired cameras to<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image panes</a></p>
<p><strong>To add a bookmark:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Using the Hairline, select the time period on the <a href="#post-2789-bookmark490">Timeline</a>.</li>
<li>In the toolbar, click .</li>
</ol>
<p>The <strong>Add Bookmark </strong>dialog box is displayed.</p>
<p>If you logged on to an Enterprise Management Server, the camera name is displayed with the name of this camera’s Management Server as a prefix.</p>
<ol>
<li>The selected time period is copied to the appropriate fields.</li>
<li>Make changes if required.</li>
<li>Click <strong>OK</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>■=&gt; The<a href="#post-2789-bookmark442"> bookmark</a> is saved in the Bookmark Tree.</p>
<p><strong>Add Bookmark dialog box</strong></p>
<p><strong>Name</strong></p>
<p>Edit the name of the bookmark.</p>
<p><strong>Start Time</strong></p>
<p>In the lists, select date and time.</p>
<p><strong>End Time</strong></p>
<p>In the lists, select date and time.</p>
<p><strong>Sources</strong></p>
<p>Displays the cameras that belong to this bookmark.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark173"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark174"></a> 10.6 Editing a bookmark</p>
<p>tab</p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p>or</p>
<p>H ►</p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p>&gt; tab</p>
<p><strong>To edit a bookmark:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Right-click a<a href="#post-2789-bookmark442"> bookmark</a> and click <strong>Edit bookmark</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>The <strong>Edit bookmark </strong>dialog box is displayed.</p>
<ol>
<li>Make changes if required.</li>
<li>Click <strong>OK</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>■=&gt; The bookmark is saved in the Bookmark Tree.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="75" height="75" class="wp-image-2852" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-63.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 63" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 331"></p>
<p>10.7</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark176"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark177"></a> Loading a bookmark</p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p>tab</p>
<p>or</p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p>tab</p>
<p><strong>To display a bookmark:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Drag a<a href="#post-2789-bookmark442"> bookmark</a> to the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark463"> Image window</a>. The entire Image window layout saved in the bookmark is displayed in the <a href="#post-2789-bookmark490">Timeline</a>. The Hairline is positioned at the start time of the bookmark.</p>
<p>■=&gt; The previous Image window is overwritten.</p>
<p><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>The maximum number of Image pane rows displayed in the Image window is configured in the BVMS Configuration Client. If this number has been changed since the last log off from Operator Client and the number of Image pane rows in the saved bookmark exceeds the maximum set by system parameter, the saved view cannot be displayed and a warning is displayed.</p>
<p>You can display the view without the excess rows.</p>
<p>10.8</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark400"><em> Bookmarks window, page 137</em></a></p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark179"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark180"></a> Exporting video of bookmarks</p>
<p>s-</p>
<p>Main window &gt; or</p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p><strong>To export video of bookmarks:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Click the tab.</li>
<li>Right-click a bookmark.</li>
</ol>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>
<ol>
<li>To export a single bookmark click <strong>Export video of bookmark</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>The <strong>Export video of bookmark </strong>dialog box is displayed.</p>
<p>Or</p>
<p>To export multiple bookmarks click <strong>Export video of multiple bookmarks</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Export video of multiple bookmarks </strong>dialog box is displayed.</p>
<ol>
<li>Make the appropriate settings.</li>
</ol>
<p>If you want to encrypt the exported files, type in a password and confirm this password.</p>
<ol>
<li>Click <strong>Export</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>The size of the recordings to be exported is estimated. Overlappings of recordings are subtracted. If free space is not enough, an error message is displayed.</p>
<p>The authenticity of the export is automatically verified.</p>
<p>The recordings are exported to the selected data medium.</p>
<ol>
<li>If available, click <strong>Verification Details </strong>to display the <strong>Authenticity Verification Result </strong>dialog box. If no authentication issues were found, the <strong>Verification Details </strong>button is inactive.</li>
</ol>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>\ î j</strong></td>
<td><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>This document describes some functions that are not available for BVMS Viewer.</p>
<p>For detailed information about the different BVMS editions refer to <a href="https://www.boschsecurity.com/xc/en/solutions/management-software/bvms/" rel="nofollow noopener" target="_blank">www.boschsecurity.com</a> and the BVMS Quick Selection Guide:<a href="https://media.boschsecurity.com/fs/media/en/pb/images/products/management_software/bvms/bvms_quick-selection-guide.pdf" rel="nofollow noopener" target="_blank"> BVMS Quick Selection Guide</a>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>10.8.1</strong></td>
<td><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark222"><em>Authenticity verification result dialog box, page 77</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark418"><em>Timeline window, page 141</em></a></li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark184"></a><strong>Export videoofbookmark dialog box</strong></p>
<p>Main window &gt; &gt; Right-click a bookmark &gt; <strong>Export video of bookmark </strong>command &gt;</p>
<p><strong>Export video of bookmark </strong>dialog box</p>
<p>Allows you to export video data of a bookmark in native (BVMS Export Player), MP4 or<a href="#post-2789-bookmark475"> MOV</a> format. You can change the time period for the export. For each camera, a subfolder is created in the target folder. For detailed information on different export locations, refer to<a href="#post-2789-bookmark225"> <em>Exporting</em></a> <a href="#post-2789-bookmark225"><em>video data, page 78</em></a>.</p>
<p><strong>Name</strong></p>
<p>If required, type a name for the exported file or keep the default name.</p>
<p><strong>Start:</strong></p>
<p>Displays the selected start time for exporting.</p>
<p><strong>End:</strong></p>
<p>Displays the selected end time for exporting.</p>
<p><strong>Native</strong></p>
<p>Click to select the BVMS Export Player format.</p>
<p>Select the <strong>Include Export Player </strong>dialog box, if you want to export the video together with the BVMS Export Player.</p>
<p><strong>Include Export Player</strong></p>
<p>When you export a video in native format, you can add the BVMS Export Player as a viewer. Click to select, if you want to include the BVMS Export Player.</p>
<p><strong>MOV (Fast and compatible with Media Player)</strong></p>
<p>Click to select the MOV format (compatible for example with QuickTime from Apple).</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>MP4 (Most commonly used to store video and audio)</strong></p>
<p>Click to select the MP4 format (compatible for example with VLC media player or Windows Media Player).</p>
<p><strong>Include audio</strong></p>
<p>Click to select, if you want to include audio.</p>
<p><strong>Add timestamp as subtitle</strong></p>
<p>Select to add the timestamp as subtitle.</p>
<p><strong>Privacy overlay</strong></p>
<p>Select to add Privacy overlay to exported video for cameras that do not already have Privacy overlay enabled.</p>
<p><strong>Note: </strong>Native and remote export are not supported for cameras with Privacy overlay.</p>
<p><strong>Encrypt Export</strong></p>
<p>Click to select encryption for this export.</p>
<p><strong>Password</strong></p>
<p>Type in a password for your encrypted export. Confirm this password in the <strong>Confirm password </strong>field.</p>
<p><strong>Export as single ZIP file</strong></p>
<p>Select to store the exported files in a single ZIP file. You use the ZIP file format to store all exported files in a single file, compression of the data is not available.</p>
<p>On a FAT32 partition, the maximum file size of the ZIP file is 4 GB.</p>
<p><strong>Remote Export</strong></p>
<p>Click to enable remote export. You can select a Management Server of your Enterprise</p>
<p>System. On this Management Server the export is performed.</p>
<p>Ensure that the desired storage media is available.</p>
<p><strong>Disk</strong></p>
<p>Click <strong>Browse </strong>to select a hard disk partition for exporting.</p>
<p><strong>CD/DVD/Blu-Ray</strong></p>
<p>In the list, select a CD/DVD/Blu-Ray writer for exporting.</p>
<p>Not active when the <strong>Remote Export </strong>option is selected.</p>
<p><strong>Finalize Disk</strong></p>
<p>Click to select that the data medium is finalized after the successful burning process. After finalizing no further data can be burned on the data medium.</p>
<p><strong>Comment:</strong></p>
<p>Enter a comment for the export.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark179"><em>Exporting video of bookmarks, page 66</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark235"><em>Providing a password for export, page 81</em></a></li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>10.8.2</strong></td>
<td><a id="post-2789-bookmark187"></a><strong>Export videoofmultiple bookmarks dialog box</strong></p>
<p>Main window &gt; tab &gt; Right-click a bookmark &gt; <strong>Export video of multiple bookmarks</strong></p>
<p>command &gt; <strong>Export video of multiple bookmarks </strong>dialog box</p>
<p>Allows you to export video data of multiple bookmarks in native (BVMS Export Player), MP4 or <a href="#post-2789-bookmark475">MOV</a> format. This way you can export different time periods of the same or different cameras in one process. For each camera, a subfolder is created in the target folder. For detailed information on different export locations, refer to<a href="#post-2789-bookmark225"> <em>Exporting video data, page 78</em></a>.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Name</strong></p>
<p>If required, type a name for the exported file or keep the default name.</p>
<p><strong>Native</strong></p>
<p>Click to select the BVMS Export Player format.</p>
<p>Select the <strong>Include Export Player </strong>dialog box, if you want to export the video together with the BVMS Export Player.</p>
<p><strong>Include Export Player</strong></p>
<p>When you export a video in native format, you can add the BVMS Export Player as a viewer.</p>
<p>Click to select, if you want to include the BVMS Export Player.</p>
<p><strong>MOV (Fast and compatible with Media Player)</strong></p>
<p>Click to select the MOV format (compatible for example with QuickTime from Apple).</p>
<p><strong>MP4 (Most commonly used to store video and audio)</strong></p>
<p>Click to select the MP4 format (compatible for example with VLC media player or Windows Media Player).</p>
<p><strong>Include audio</strong></p>
<p>Click to select, if you want to include audio.</p>
<p><strong>Encrypt Export</strong></p>
<p>Click to select encryption for this export.</p>
<p><strong>Password</strong></p>
<p>Type in a password for your encrypted export. Confirm this password in the <strong>Confirm password </strong>field.</p>
<p><strong>Disk</strong></p>
<p>Click to select a folder on a hard disk partition for exporting.</p>
<p><strong>CD/DVD/Blu-Ray</strong></p>
<p>In the list, select a writer device for exporting.</p>
<p>Enable <strong>Finalize Disk</strong>, if you do not want to burn further data on the data medium.</p>
<p><strong>Bookmarks</strong></p>
<p>In the list, select the bookmarks that you want to export.</p>
<p><strong>Finalize Disk</strong></p>
<p>Click to select that the data medium is finalized after the successful burning process. After finalizing no further data can be burned on the data medium.</p>
<p><strong>Comment:</strong></p>
<p>Enter a comment for the export.</p>
<p><strong>Export as single ZIP file</strong></p>
<p>Select to store the exported files in a single ZIP file. You use the ZIP file format to store all exported files in a single file, compression of the data is not available.</p>
<p>On a FAT32 partition, the maximum file size of the ZIP file is 4 GB.</p>
<p><strong>Add timestamp as subtitle</strong></p>
<p>Select to add the timestamp as subtitle.</p>
<p><strong>Privacy overlay</strong></p>
<p>Select to add Privacy overlay to exported video for cameras that do not already have Privacy overlay enabled.</p>
<p><strong>Note: </strong>Native and remote export are not supported for cameras with Privacy overlay.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark179"><em> Exporting video of bookmarks, page 66</em></a></p>
<p><a href="#post-2789-bookmark235"><em>Providing a password for export, page 81</em></a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>10.9</strong></td>
<td><strong>Exporting bookmark settings</strong></p>
<p>.. .. s- B _</p>
<p>Main window &gt; &gt; tab</p>
<p>or</p>
<p>[h]</p>
<p>Main window &gt; &gt; tab</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>You can export any bookmark item, folder or the complete bookmark tree and share the exported file or various files with other users.</p>
<p><strong>To export bookmark settings:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Right-click any bookmark item, folder or the bookmark tree root item, and select <strong>Export bookmark settings</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>The <strong>Export bookmark settings </strong>dialog box displays.</p>
<ol>
<li>Type a password that supplies the minimum complexity requirements.</li>
</ol>
<p>Or deselect the <strong>Protect file with password </strong>check box if protecting the export file is not required.</p>
<ol>
<li>If required, select a folder and change the file name.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Save</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>10.10</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark191"></a> Importing bookmark settings</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="71" height="50" class="wp-image-2853" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-64.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 64" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 332"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="77" height="56" class="wp-image-2854" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-65.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 65" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 333"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="50" height="50" class="wp-image-2855" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-66.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 66" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 334"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="50" height="50" class="wp-image-2856" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-67.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 67" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 335"></p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p>or</p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p>tab</p>
<p>tab</p>
<p><strong>To import a bookmark tree:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Right-click any position in the bookmark tree where you want to import bookmark settings, and select <strong>Import bookmark settings</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>The <strong>Import bookmark settings </strong>dialog box displays.</p>
<ol>
<li>Select the respective file and click <strong>Open</strong>.</li>
<li>If the file is protected, type the password and click <strong>OK</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>BVMS</td>
<td>Managing recorded videos | en <strong>71</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>11</strong></td>
<td><strong>Managing recorded videos</strong></p>
<p>This chapter provides information on how to manage recordings.</p>
<p>Some of the features described in this chapter can be deactivated for your user group.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>\ i J</strong></td>
<td><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>This document describes some functions that are not available for BVMS Viewer.</p>
<p>For detailed information about the different BVMS editions refer to <a href="https://www.boschsecurity.com/xc/en/solutions/management-software/bvms/" rel="nofollow noopener" target="_blank">www.boschsecurity.com</a> and the BVMS Quick Selection Guide:<a href="https://media.boschsecurity.com/fs/media/en/pb/images/products/management_software/bvms/bvms_quick-selection-guide.pdf" rel="nofollow noopener" target="_blank"> BVMS Quick Selection Guide</a>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>11.1</strong></td>
<td><strong>Selecting a time zone</strong></p>
<p>Main window</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>\ i </strong>j</td>
<td><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>Ensure that the time on all computers of your system is set correctly according to each time zone where the computers are located.</p>
<p>Management Server or unmanaged site and all connected devices including encoders, decoders, VRM Server computers, and DVR devices must be in the same time zone. Operator Client computers (including Client SDK and Cameo SDK) and Configuration Client computers can be in other time zones than the Management Server or unmanaged site. If your Operator Client is located in another time zone than one or more connected Management Server or unmanaged site, you can select one of the following time displays: &#8211; Your local time &#8211;<a href="#post-2789-bookmark494"> UTC</a></p>
<p>&#8211; Time zone of the Management Server or unmanaged site you are connected to The Image panes displaying a camera (live and playback) always show the time of the corresponding Management Server or unmanaged site.</p>
<p><strong>©</strong></p>
<p>In the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark472"> Logical Tree</a>, is displayed on the device icon of each server or unmanaged site that</p>
<p>do not share the time zone that is currently selected in the Operator Client:</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="321" height="379" class="wp-image-2857" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-68.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 68" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 336" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-68.jpeg 321w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-68-254x300.jpeg 254w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 321px) 100vw, 321px" /></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>You can select the time zone of a server or unmanaged site for displaying this time zone in Operator Client.</p>
<p><strong>To select the time zone:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>In the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark472"> Logical Tree</a>, right-click a server icon to select the time zone of this server.</li>
<li>In the time zone selector list, select the desired entry.</li>
</ol>
<p>&#8211; <strong>Operator Client Time</strong>: Operator Client</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="757" height="168" class="wp-image-2858" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-69.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 69" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 337" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-69.jpeg 757w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-69-300x67.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 757px) 100vw, 757px" /> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="71" height="50" class="wp-image-2859" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-70.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 70" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 338"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="67" height="67" class="wp-image-2860" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-71.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 71" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 339"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="50" height="50" class="wp-image-2861" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-72.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 72" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 340"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="71" height="50" class="wp-image-2862" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-73.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 73" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 341"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="55" height="52" class="wp-image-2863" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-74.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 74" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 342"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="77" height="56" class="wp-image-2864" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-75.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 75" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 343"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="67" height="67" class="wp-image-2865" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-76.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 76" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 344"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="50" height="50" class="wp-image-2866" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-77.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 77" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 345"></p>
<p>&#8211; <strong>UTC</strong></p>
<p><strong>UTC-x</strong>: time zone of each available Management Server</p>
<p>The time based on the selected time zone is displayed in the menu bar:</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark395"><em> Logical Tree window, page 136</em></a></p>
<p>11.2</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark195"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark196"></a> Finding recorded video</p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p>&gt; Click</p>
<p>&gt; <strong>Timeline search </strong>entry &gt; <strong>Timeline search</strong></p>
<p>dialog box</p>
<p>or</p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p>&gt; <strong>Video by event search </strong>entry &gt; <strong>Select Search</strong></p>
<p><strong>Parameters </strong>dialog box</p>
<p>or</p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p>&gt; Click</p>
<p>&gt; <strong>Please select a Server </strong>entry &gt; <strong>Search for</strong></p>
<p><strong>Text Data </strong>dialog box</p>
<p><strong>To find video data: </strong>1. Click somewhere in the timeline.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="56" height="56" class="wp-image-2867" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-78.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 78" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 346"> Drag to move the timeline window to the right or to the left to select a time period.</p>
<p>2.</p>
<p>3.</p>
<p>4.</p>
<p>5.</p>
<p>Click</p>
<p>to select the respective search type entry.</p>
<p>Enter or select the required search criteria.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="73" height="73" class="wp-image-2868" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-79.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 79" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 347"> Click <strong>Search</strong>.</p>
<p>The</p>
<p>window with the matching entries is displayed.</p>
<p>6. For playing the corresponding video, double-click the entry. The corresponding video is</p>
<p>displayed.</p>
<p>If you searched for text data, the text data pane is automatically opened in the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image</a> <a href="#post-2789-bookmark461">pane</a>.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark259"><em>Select Search Parameters dialog box, page 88</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark271"><em>Logbook Results: dialog box, page 91</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark418"><em>Timeline window, page 141</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark204"><em>Using the timeline, page 73</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark274"><em>Displaying text data, page 91</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark276"><em>Searching for text data, page 92</em></a></li>
</ul>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>BVMS</td>
<td>Managing recorded videos | en <strong>73</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>11.2.1</strong></td>
<td><a id="post-2789-bookmark198"></a><strong>Video Search Resultswindow</strong></p>
<p>Main window &gt; &gt; &#8216;■* tab</p>
<p>Displays entries for video data matching different search criteria. You can select an entry for playback, protection, authenticity checking, archiving, or export.</p>
<p>Allows you to play the recordings that match the search criteria.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>11.3</strong></td>
<td><a id="post-2789-bookmark201"></a><strong>Playing recorded videos</strong></p>
<p>«► •</p>
<p>Main window &gt; &gt; tab</p>
<p><strong>Note:</strong></p>
<p>Bosch Allegiant cameras are not recorded within BVMS.</p>
<p><strong>To play recorded videos:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Assign a camera to an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane</a>.</li>
<li>Switch to the desired recording source if available.</li>
<li>Use a <a href="#post-2789-bookmark490">Timeline </a>control for the required playing option.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark418"><em>Timeline window, page 141</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark204"><em>Using the timeline, page 73</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark288"><em>Switching the recording source, page 95</em></a></li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>11.4</strong></td>
<td><a id="post-2789-bookmark204"></a><strong>Using the timeline ®</strong></p>
<p>Main window &gt; &gt; tab</p>
<p>You can access a specific time in the <a href="#post-2789-bookmark490">timeline </a>via the hairline.</p>
<p><strong>To navigate in the timeline:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Click somewhere in the timeline.</li>
</ol>
<p>The images of the selected point in time are displayed in the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark463"> image window</a>.</p>
<ol>
<li>Scroll to zoom in and out.</li>
<li>Drag to move the timeline window to the right or to the left.</li>
<li>To edit the values, click on the time label of the hairline.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>4^</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Click <strong>■“.</strong></li>
</ol>
<p>The Hairline jumps to this time. The images of the entered point in time are displayed in the image window. Use a timeline control for the required playing option.</p>
<p>You can select a time period in the timeline using the hairline. You can use this selection for further tasks such as for exporting video data.</p>
<p>4 Drag the bottom handles of the Hairline to select a time period or to change this selection.</p>
<p>Drag the upper handles to move the hairline or selection.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to </strong><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark418"><em> Timeline window, page 141</em></a></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark201"><em> Playing recorded videos, page 73</em></a></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark206"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark207"></a> Changing the playback speed</p>
<p>11.5</p>
<p>*** 1/8 1/41/2 1 2 4 8 Jï tab &gt;</p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p><strong>To change the playback speed for playing a video forward or reverse:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Move the slider to the left to decrease the playback speed, and to the right to increase the playback speed.</p>
<p><strong>Note: </strong>If you set the playback speed to 4x or higher, not all frames will be displayed.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark418"><em> Timeline window, page 141</em></a></p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark209"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark210"></a> Restricting or unrestricting video</p>
<p>11.6</p>
<p>M ►</p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p>You can restrict (or unrestrict) the recordings of connected cameras.</p>
<p>When restricted, an unauthorized user cannot display the recordings of these cameras.</p>
<p>For restricting and unrestricting you need the corresponding permission.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="75" height="75" class="wp-image-2869" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-80.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 80" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 348"><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>Unrestricting / unprotecting a selected time period can possibly unrestrict / unprotect the entire contiguous restricted / protected time period of this camera, even outside the selected time period.</p>
<p><strong>To open the Restrict / unrestrict time period dialog box from the logical tree:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>In the logical tree, right-click the respective camera.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Recordings</strong>.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Restrict / unrestrict</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>The <strong>Restrict / unrestrict time period </strong>dialog box is displayed.</p>
<ol>
<li>If needed, select the recording type (primary or secondary recording).</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>To open the Restrict / unrestrict time period dialog box using the hairline:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>From the tab, select the time period of one or more cameras on the <a href="#post-2789-bookmark490">timeline</a>.</li>
<li>To edit the values, click on the time label of the hairline.</li>
<li>Right-click this time period and click <strong>Restrict / unrestrict</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>The <strong>Restrict / unrestrict time period </strong>dialog box is displayed.</p>
<p><strong>Restrict / unrestrict time period dialog:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>If needed, adjust the start and end time.</li>
<li>Select the cameras or deselect the cameras you do not need.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Restrict / unrestrict </strong>to restrict or unrestrict video.</li>
<li>To interrupt the process click <strong>Cancel </strong>or the X button.</li>
<li>When the process is finished, the action is displayed in the operation state column.</li>
<li>Click the X button.</li>
</ol>
<p>The action is displayed in the timeline.</p>
<p>In the timeline, restricted video is indicated with dark grey diagonal stripes:</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>11.7</strong></td>
<td><a id="post-2789-bookmark213"></a><strong>Protecting or unprotecting video</strong></p>
<p><strong>!*►</strong></p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p>You can protect the images of the displayed cameras against being overwritten or deleted.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="75" height="75" class="wp-image-2870" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-81.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 81" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 349"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="75" height="75" class="wp-image-2871" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-82.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 82" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 350"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="75" height="75" class="wp-image-2872" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-83.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 83" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 351"><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>You cannot protect the data of a local storage device.</p>
<p><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>Unrestricting / unprotecting a selected time period can possibly unrestrict / unprotect the entire contiguous restricted / protected time period of this camera, even outside the selected time period.</p>
<p><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>If you protect the alarm recording of a camera, the protected video data will never be deleted by the VRM automatically. Be aware that too many protected blocks can fill up the storage and the camera may stop recording. You have to manually unprotect the video data in the Operator Client.</p>
<p><strong>To open the Protect / unprotect time period dialog box from the logical tree:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>In the logical tree, right-click the respective camera.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Recording</strong>.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Protect / unprotect</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>The <strong>Protect / unprotect time period </strong>dialog box is displayed.</p>
<ol>
<li>If needed, select the recording type (primary or secondary recording).</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>To open the Protect / unprotect time period dialog box using the hairline:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>From the tab, select the time period on the <a href="#post-2789-bookmark490">timeline</a>.</li>
<li>To edit the values, click on the time label of the hairline.</li>
<li>Right-click this time period and click <strong>Protect / unprotect</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Protect / unprotect time period </strong>dialog box is displayed.</p>
<p><strong>Protect / unprotect time period dialog:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>If needed, adjust the start and end time.</li>
<li>Select the cameras or deselect the cameras you do not need.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Protect </strong>to protect video or <strong>Unprotect </strong>to unprotect video.</li>
<li>To interrupt the process click <strong>Cancel </strong>or the X button.</li>
<li>When the process is finished, the action is displayed in the operation state column.</li>
<li>Click the X button.</li>
</ol>
<p>The action is displayed in the timeline.</p>
<p>In the timeline, protected video is indicated with dark grey diagonal stripes: <strong>^$53</strong></p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark418"><em> Timeline window, page 141</em></a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>11.8</strong></td>
<td><a id="post-2789-bookmark216"></a><strong>Deleting video data</strong></p>
<p><strong>M ►</strong></p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p>You can delete video data from the beginning of the recording to the position of the hairline.</p>
<p>The video data of all cameras available in the timeline is deleted.</p>
<p><strong>VRM recordings: </strong>Protected recordings are not deleted.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="75" height="75" class="wp-image-2873" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-84.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 84" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 352"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="75" height="75" class="wp-image-2874" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-85.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 85" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 353"><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>You cannot restore deleted video data.</p>
<p><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>You cannot delete the data of a local storage device.</p>
<p><strong>To open the Delete time period dialog box from the logical tree:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>In the logical tree, right-click the respective camera.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Recordings</strong></li>
<li>Click <strong>Delete</strong>.</li>
<li>Confirm the warning message.</li>
</ol>
<p>The <strong>Delete time period </strong>dialog box is displayed.</p>
<ol>
<li>If needed, select the recording type (primary or secondary recording).</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>To open the Delete time period dialog box using the hairline:</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="40" height="40" class="wp-image-2875" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-86.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 86" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 354"></p>
<ol>
<li>From the tab, select the time period on the <a href="#post-2789-bookmark490">timeline</a>.</li>
<li>To edit the values, click on the time label of the hairline.</li>
<li>Right-click this time period and click <strong>Delete</strong>.</li>
<li>Confirm the warning message.</li>
</ol>
<p>The <strong>Delete time period </strong>dialog box is displayed.</p>
<p><strong>Delete time period dialog:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>If needed, adjust the start and end time.</li>
<li>Select the cameras or deselect the cameras you do not need.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Delete</strong>.</li>
<li>To interrupt the process click <strong>Cancel </strong>or the X button.</li>
<li>When the process is finished, the action is displayed in the operation state column.</li>
<li>Click the X button.</li>
</ol>
<p>The action is displayed in the timeline.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to </strong><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark418"><em> Timeline window, page 141</em></a></p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark219"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark220"></a> 11.9 Verifying the authenticity of video data</p>
<p>©<br />
Main window &gt; &gt; tab</p>
<p>or</p>
<p>You can verify the authenticity of the recordings of all cameras displayed in the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark463"> image window</a>.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>To authenticate:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Using the hairline, select the time period on the <a href="#post-2789-bookmark490">timeline</a>.</li>
<li>To edit the values, click on the time label of the hairline.</li>
<li>Right-click this time period and click <strong>Verify authenticity </strong></li>
</ol>
<p>The <strong>Verify Authenticity </strong>dialog box with a progress bar is displayed.</p>
<ol>
<li>To interrupt the process click <strong>Cancel </strong>or the button.</li>
<li>When the authentication is finished, the <strong>Authenticity Verification Result </strong>dialog box is displayed and shows the result of the verification process.</li>
</ol>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>11.9.1</strong></td>
<td><a id="post-2789-bookmark222"></a><strong>Authenticity verification result dialog box</strong></p>
<p>Main window &gt; <strong>Unrestrict video&#8230; </strong>menu &gt; <strong>Verify authenticity&#8230; </strong>command &gt; <strong>Verify Authenticity </strong>dialog box &gt; <strong>Verify </strong>button &gt; <strong>Authenticity Verification Result </strong>dialog box or</p>
<p>Main window &gt; &gt; <strong>Unrestrict video&#8230; </strong>menu &gt; <strong>Export video&#8230; </strong>command &gt; <strong>Export </strong>dialog</p>
<p>box &gt; <strong>Verification Details </strong>button &gt; <strong>Authenticity Verification Result </strong>dialog box or</p>
<p>Main window &gt; &gt; <strong>Unrestrict video&#8230; </strong>menu &gt; <strong>Verify authenticity&#8230; </strong>command &gt; <strong>Verify</strong></p>
<p><strong>Authenticity </strong>dialog box &gt; <strong>Verify </strong>button &gt; <strong>Authenticity Verification Result </strong>dialog box or</p>
<p>Main window &gt; <strong>Unrestrict video&#8230; </strong>menu &gt; <strong>Export video&#8230; </strong>command &gt; <strong>Export </strong>dialog box &gt; <strong>Verification Details </strong>button &gt; <strong>Authenticity Verification Result </strong>dialog box or</p>
<p>Main window &gt; &gt; Right-click a bookmark &gt; <strong>Export video of bookmark </strong>command &gt;</p>
<p><strong>Export video of bookmark </strong>dialog box &gt; <strong>Verification Details </strong>button &gt; <strong>Authenticity Verification Result </strong>dialog box or</p>
<p>Main window &gt; tab &gt; Right-click a bookmark &gt; <strong>Export video of multiple bookmarks</strong></p>
<p>command &gt; <strong>Export </strong>dialog box &gt; <strong>Verification Details </strong>button &gt; <strong>Authenticity Verification Result </strong>dialog box</p>
<p>Allows you to view the results of an authenticity verification of a selected time period of recorded video. You can save the results in a CSV file.</p>
<p><strong>Created on</strong></p>
<p>Displays the date when the authenticity verification was performed.</p>
<p><strong>By</strong></p>
<p>Displays the name of the user who started the authenticity verification.</p>
<p><strong>Time range</strong></p>
<p>Displays the time period to be verified that was selected by the user.</p>
<p><strong>Summary</strong></p>
<p>Displays the number of cameras which recordings have been verified, and the results.</p>
<p><strong>Details</strong></p>
<p>Click to display detailed information on the authenticity verification.</p>
<p><strong>Authentic</strong></p>
<p>Displays an authentic result. The icon is explained in the summary.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Camera</strong></p>
<p>Displays the camera that was verified.</p>
<p><strong>Date / Time</strong></p>
<p>Displays the authentic time period.</p>
<p><strong>More Information</strong></p>
<p>Displays detailed information on the certificate.</p>
<p><strong>CSV Export</strong></p>
<p>Displays a dialog box to enter path and filename for the authenticity verification report.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1042" height="728" class="wp-image-2876" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-87.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 87" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 355" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-87.jpeg 1042w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-87-300x210.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-87-1024x715.jpeg 1024w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-87-768x537.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 1042px) 100vw, 1042px" /></p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark179"><em>Exporting video of bookmarks, page 66</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark225"><em>Exporting video data, page 78</em></a></li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark225"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark226"></a> Exporting video data</p>
<p>11.10</p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="75" height="75" class="wp-image-2877" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-88.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 88" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 356"><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>You cannot export the data of a local storage device.</p>
<p>You can export video and audio data in native (BVMS Export Player),<a href="#post-2789-bookmark476"> MP4 </a>or in<a href="#post-2789-bookmark475"> MOV</a> format.</p>
<p>For each exported camera, a subfolder is created in the target folder. The data can be exported to: &#8211; a local drive</p>
<ul>
<li>a CD/DVD or Blu-Ray disk</li>
<li>a network drive</li>
<li>a USB drive</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Note: </strong>Use a fast USB drive to avoid failures.</p>
<p>In an Enterprise System: you can select a remote Management Server to perform the export there. You can only export the recordings of the cameras that are managed by the selected Management Server.</p>
<p>Only one export at a time can run on a workstation.</p>
<p><strong>Note: </strong>You need a permission for each camera you want to export.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="75" height="75" class="wp-image-2878" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-89.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 89" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 357"><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>Remote exports are only possible to a USB drive, CD, DVD or Blu-Ray disk.</p>
<p><strong>Export in native format</strong></p>
<p>The table describes the differences between an unencrypted and an encrypted export of video data in native format.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Criteria</strong></td>
<td><strong>Unencrypted export</strong></td>
<td><strong>Encrypted export</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Password protected</td>
<td>No</td>
<td>Yes</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>File extension</td>
<td>.info</td>
<td>.encr</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>User cancels the export process</td>
<td>All video data of the current export is deleted.</td>
<td>All video data of the current export is deleted.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Export was not successful</td>
<td>If multiple cameras are exported, all successful exports are saved. The unsuccessful export is deleted.</td>
<td>All video data of the current export is deleted.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Export on multiple disks</strong></p>
<p>Encrypted exports and exports into a single ZIP file are not possible on multiple CDs/DVDs/ Blu-Ray disks. If the export fits on a single CD/DVD/Blu-Ray disk, encrypted export on a CD/ DVD/Blu-Ray disk is possible.</p>
<p>Recordings that were selected for export and exported to CD/DVD/Blu-Ray disks, are first written to the local hard drive and then written to one or more writeable disks.</p>
<p>Unencrypted export on multiple disks is only supported for native format. Exporting with MP4 or MOV format only works when it fits on one disk.</p>
<p>The first inserted disk determines the media type of all following disks.</p>
<p>If recordings were exported to multiple CD/DVD/Blu-Ray disks, and you must view all exported cameras in all exported time periods, copy the content of all disks to your hard drive. You can ignore all occurring overwrite warnings.</p>
<p>You can view the recordings exported to a single disk out of a group of disks that were created during an export.</p>
<p>If exporting video data on a CD/DVD/Blu-Ray disk was not successful or the user cancels the export, the already exported video data of this export process is retained.</p>
<p>When the verification of authenticity is enabled in Configuration Client, each export is automatically checked.</p>
<p><strong>Export of a panoramic camera</strong></p>
<p>When you export the recordings of a panoramic camera you always export the full image circle. If you export multiple cropped Image panes of the same panoramic camera, the full image circle of this camera is exported only once. This also applies for the export of non- panoramic cameras.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark184"><em>Export video of bookmark dialog box, page 67</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark187"><em>Export video of multiple bookmarks dialog box, page 68</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark240"><em>Export Video dialog box, page 82</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark418"><em>Timeline window, page 141</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark198"><em>Video Search Results window, page 73</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark222"><em>Authenticity verification result dialog box, page 77</em></a></li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark228"></a> 11.10.1 Exporting a timeperiod</p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p><strong>To export a time period:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Click the tab.</li>
<li>Using the hairline, select the time period on the <a href="#post-2789-bookmark490">timeline</a>.</li>
<li>To edit the values, click on the time label of the hairline.</li>
</ol>
<p>|T.</p>
<ol>
<li>Click .</li>
</ol>
<p>The <strong>Export </strong>dialog box is displayed.</p>
<ol>
<li>Make the appropriate settings.</li>
</ol>
<p>If you want to encrypt the exported files, type in a password and confirm this password.</p>
<ol>
<li>Click <strong>Export</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>The size of the recordings to be exported is estimated. Overlappings of recordings are substracted. If there is not enough free space, an error message is displayed.</p>
<p>The authenticity of the export is automatically verified.</p>
<p>The files are exported to the selected data medium.</p>
<ol>
<li>If available, click <strong>Verification Details </strong>to display the <strong>Authenticity Verification Result </strong>dialog box.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Note:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>If an operator has no permission to see restricted video and exports a restricted time period:</li>
<li>The file exports with empty time ranges.</li>
<li>Multiple files are produced.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark230"></a> 11.10.2 Exporting a single search entry</p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p><strong>To export a single search entry:</strong></p>
<p>1. Perform a search for video data.</p>
<p>2.</p>
<p>3.</p>
<p>Click the</p>
<p>tab.</p>
<p>Click an entry in the search result list.</p>
<p>4.</p>
<p>Click the tab.</p>
<p>5.</p>
<p>6.</p>
<p>7.</p>
<p>8.</p>
<p>Click</p>
<p>The <strong>Export </strong>dialog box is displayed.</p>
<p>Make the appropriate settings.</p>
<p>If you want to encrypt the exported files, type in a password and confirm this password.</p>
<p>Click <strong>Export</strong>.</p>
<p>The authenticity of the export is automatically verified.</p>
<p>The entry is exported to the selected data medium.</p>
<p>If available, click <strong>Verification Details </strong>to display the <strong>Authenticity Verification Result </strong>dialog box.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="73" height="73" class="wp-image-2879" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-90.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 90" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 358"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="46" height="46" class="wp-image-2880" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-91.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 91" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 359"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="56" height="56" class="wp-image-2881" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-92.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 92" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 360"></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="72" height="51" class="wp-image-2882" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-93.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 93" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 361"><a id="post-2789-bookmark232"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark233"></a> Exporting intoasingle file</p>
<p>11.10.3</p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p>You can export video recordings into a single ZIP file.</p>
<p><strong>To export into a single file:</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="46" height="46" class="wp-image-2883" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-94.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 94" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 362"></p>
<p>Click the tab.</p>
<p>1.</p>
<p>2.</p>
<p>3.</p>
<p>4.</p>
<p>5.</p>
<p>Using the hairline, select the time period on the <a href="#post-2789-bookmark490">timeline</a>.</p>
<p>To edit the values, click on the time label of the hairline.</p>
<p>Click to select <strong>Export as single ZIP file</strong>.</p>
<p>Make the appropriate settings.</p>
<p>If you want to encrypt the exported files, type in a password and confirm this password.</p>
<p>6.</p>
<p>Click <strong>Export</strong>.</p>
<p>The size of the recordings to be exported is estimated. If free space is not enough, an error message is displayed.</p>
<p>The authenticity of the export is automatically verified.</p>
<p>The recordings are exported and the export is added to a single ZIP file.</p>
<p>7.</p>
<p>If available, click <strong>Verification Details </strong>to display the <strong>Authenticity Verification Result </strong>dialog box.</p>
<p><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>You cannot load a ZIP export file in Operator Client.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark240"><em> Export Video dialog box, page 82</em></a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="72" height="51" class="wp-image-2884" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-95.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 95" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 363"></p>
<p>11.10.4</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark235"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark236"></a> Providing a password for export</p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p>&gt; <strong>Timeline </strong>menu &gt; <strong>Export video&#8230; </strong>command &gt; <strong>Export </strong>dialog box</p>
<p>or</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="50" height="50" class="wp-image-2885" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-96.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 96" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 364"></p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p>&gt; Right-click a bookmark &gt; <strong>Export video of bookmark </strong>command &gt;</p>
<p><strong>Export video of bookmark </strong>dialog box or</p>
<p>Main window &gt; tab &gt; Right-click a bookmark &gt; <strong>Export video of multiple bookmarks </strong>command &gt; <strong>Export video of multiple bookmarks </strong>dialog box</p>
<p>You can provide a password for each native export that you perform using Operator Client.</p>
<p><strong>To provide a password:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Click to select <strong>Native format</strong>.</li>
<li>Click to select <strong>Encrypt Export</strong>.</li>
<li>Type in a password and confirm it.</li>
<li>Make the appropriate settings.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Export</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>The encrypted export is performed.</p>
<p>When loading this export, the operator must type in the password.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark184"><em>Export video of bookmark dialog box, page 67</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark187"><em>Export video of multiple bookmarks dialog box, page 68</em></a></li>
<li><a id="post-2789-bookmark238"></a><a href="#post-2789-bookmark240"><em>Export Video dialog box, page 82</em></a></li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark240"></a> Export Video dialog box</p>
<p>11.10.5</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="75" height="75" class="wp-image-2886" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-97.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 97" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 365"><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>This document describes some functions that are not available for BVMS Viewer.</p>
<p>For detailed information about the different BVMS editions refer to <a href="https://www.boschsecurity.com/xc/en/solutions/management-software/bvms/" rel="nofollow noopener" target="_blank">www.boschsecurity.com</a> and the BVMS Quick Selection Guide:<a href="https://media.boschsecurity.com/fs/media/en/pb/images/products/management_software/bvms/bvms_quick-selection-guide.pdf" rel="nofollow noopener" target="_blank"> BVMS Quick Selection Guide</a>.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="77" height="56" class="wp-image-2887" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-98.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 98" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 366"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="77" height="56" class="wp-image-2888" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-99.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 99" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 367"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="73" height="73" class="wp-image-2889" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-100.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 100" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 368"></p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p>or</p>
<p>&gt; <strong>Timeline </strong>menu &gt; <strong>Export video&#8230; </strong>command &gt; <strong>Export </strong>dialog box</p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p>&gt;</p>
<p><strong>&#8211; Timeline </strong>window &gt; <strong>Export </strong>context menu or</p>
<p><strong>Export</strong></p>
<p><strong>video </strong>button</p>
<p><strong>Name</strong></p>
<p>If required, type a name for the exported file or keep the default name.</p>
<p><strong>Start:</strong></p>
<p>Displays the selected start time for exporting.</p>
<p><strong>End:</strong></p>
<p>Displays the selected end time for exporting.</p>
<p><strong>Native</strong></p>
<p>Click to select the BVMS Export Player format.</p>
<p>Select the <strong>Include Export Player </strong>dialog box, if you want to export the video together with the BVMS Export Player.</p>
<p><strong>Include Export Player</strong></p>
<p>When you export a video in native format, you can add the BVMS Export Player as a viewer. Click to select, if you want to include the BVMS Export Player.</p>
<p><strong>Encrypt Export</strong></p>
<p>Click to select encryption for this export.</p>
<p><strong>Password</strong></p>
<p>Type in a password for your encrypted export. Confirm this password in the <strong>Confirm password </strong>field.</p>
<p><strong>MOV (Fast and compatible with Media Player)</strong></p>
<p>Click to select the MOV format (compatible for example with QuickTime from Apple).</p>
<p><strong>MP4 (Most commonly used to store video and audio)</strong></p>
<p>Click to select the MP4 format (compatible for example with VLC media player or Windows Media Player).</p>
<p><strong>Include audio</strong></p>
<p>Click to select, if you want to include audio.</p>
<p><strong>Add timestamp as subtitle</strong></p>
<p>Select to add the timestamp as subtitle.</p>
<p><strong>Privacy overlay</strong></p>
<p>Select to add Privacy overlay to exported video for cameras that do not already have Privacy overlay enabled.</p>
<p><strong>Note: </strong>Native and remote export are not supported for cameras with Privacy overlay.</p>
<p><strong>Export as single ZIP file</strong></p>
<p>Select to store the exported files in a single ZIP file. You use the ZIP file format to store all exported files in a single file, compression of the data is not available.</p>
<p>On a FAT32 partition, the maximum file size of the ZIP file is 4 GB.</p>
<p><strong>Remote Export</strong></p>
<p>Click to enable remote export. You can select a Management Server of your Enterprise System. On this Management Server the export is performed.</p>
<p>Ensure that the desired storage media is available.</p>
<p><strong>Disk</strong></p>
<p>Click <strong>Browse </strong>to select a hard disk partition for exporting.</p>
<p><strong>Split size</strong></p>
<p>Allows you to configure the split size of the exported video in order to adapt the splitted chunks to fit your storage media. This configuration is only available for non-native formats. <strong>Note: </strong>The value is an approximate value. The exported video is splitted in, for example, full frames or blocks. Because of that the size of the exported chunks does not correspond exactly to the same value that you configure.</p>
<p><strong>CD/DVD/Blu-Ray</strong></p>
<p>In the list, select a CD/DVD/Blu-Ray writer for exporting.</p>
<p>Not active when the <strong>Remote Export </strong>option is selected.</p>
<p><strong>Finalize Disk</strong></p>
<p>Click to select that the data medium is finalized after the successful burning process. After finalizing no further data can be burned on the data medium.</p>
<p><strong>Comment:</strong></p>
<p>Enter a comment for the export.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="75" height="75" class="wp-image-2890" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-101.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 101" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 369"></p>
<p>11.10.6</p>
<p>11.11</p>
<p><strong>Cancel</strong></p>
<p>Click to save the dialog settings until you start Operator Client the next time.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark225"><em>Exporting video data, page 78</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark235"><em>Providing a password for export, page 81</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark232"><em>Exporting into a single file, page 81</em></a></li>
</ul>
<p>Export dialogbox</p>
<p>m ►</p>
<p>Main window &gt; &gt; <strong>Unrestrict video&#8230; </strong>menu &gt; <strong>Export video&#8230; </strong>command &gt; <strong>Export </strong>dialog</p>
<p>box &gt; <strong>Export </strong>button &gt; <strong>Export </strong>dialog box or or</p>
<p>Main window &gt; tab &gt; Right-click a bookmark &gt; <strong>Export video of multiple bookmarks </strong>command &gt; <strong>Export </strong>dialog box &gt; <strong>Export </strong>button &gt; <strong>Export </strong>dialog box or</p>
<p>Main window &gt; &gt; Right-click a bookmark &gt; <strong>Export video of bookmark </strong>command &gt;</p>
<p><strong>Export </strong>dialog box &gt; <strong>Export </strong>button &gt; <strong>Export </strong>dialog box</p>
<p>Allows you to view information on the performed export and to display the results of the <a href="#post-2789-bookmark441">authenticity</a> verification that is automatically performed on every export.</p>
<p><strong>Verification Details</strong></p>
<p>Click to display the <strong>Authenticity Verification Result </strong>dialog box.</p>
<p>This button is only available if authentication issues were found.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark225"><em>Exporting video data, page 78</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark232"><em>Exporting into a single file, page 81</em></a></li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark243"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark244"></a> Loading exported video</p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>You cannot load a ZIP export file in Operator Client.</p>
<p><strong>Export formats</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Block exports (info), created with the VRM eXport Wizard</li>
<li>Not encrypted Export files (*.info), created with the BVMS Operator Client</li>
<li>Encrypted Export files (*.encr) , created with the BVMS Operator Client</li>
<li>Export files (*.mp4), created with BVC</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Additional Information</strong></p>
<p>Video exports created with the VRM eXport Wizard are displayed as info file.</p>
<p>With the VRM eXport Wizard it is possible to export a large volume of data.</p>
<p>The VRM eXport Wizard is part of the BVMS release ZIP within the folder Bonus. For more information see the VRM eXport Wizard Software Manual.</p>
<p>You can load exported recordings for display. Before you can load an export which was exported into a single ZIP file, extract this ZIP file.</p>
<ol>
<li>On the <strong>Unrestrict video&#8230; </strong>menu, click the <strong>Load exported video&#8230; </strong>command.</li>
</ol>
<p>The dialog box for opening export files is displayed.</p>
<ol>
<li>Select the required file and click <strong>Open</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>Encrypted export files have the .encr extension, not encrypted files have the .info extension, block exports are displayed as info file.</p>
<p>If you select a file with the .encr extension, type in the password for this export.</p>
<p>|T|</p>
<p>The loaded video is displayed in the window.</p>
<p>For playing the loaded video, expand the entry and drag a camera to an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane</a>.</p>
<p>If the camera has been exported on a computer where Operator Client was logged on to an Enterprise Management Server, the camera name is displayed with the name of this camera’s Management Server as a prefix.</p>
<p>The Export Tree entries are removed when you exit the Operator Client.</p>
<p>lLi</p>
<ol>
<li>For removing the exported video, right-click and click <strong>Unload Export</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark411"><em>Exports window, page 140</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark418"><em>Timeline window, page 141</em></a></li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark246"></a> 11.12 Enabling video content analysis (VCA)</p>
<p>Main window or <a href="#post-2789-bookmark435">alarm image window</a></p>
<p><strong>To enable:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Right-click an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane </a>or alarm image pane with a camera assigned and click <strong>Enable Content Analysis</strong>.</p>
<p>The VCA overlays are displayed.</p>
<p><strong>To disable:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Right-click an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane </a>or alarm image pane with a camera assigned and click <strong>Disable Content Analysis</strong>.</p>
<p>The VCA overlays disappear.</p>
<p>This setting is retained after the next restart or re-logon of Operator Client, after closing the camera and displaying it again in an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane</a>, or after an alarm with the assigned camera is triggered again.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="50" height="50" class="wp-image-2891" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-102.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 102" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 370"><a id="post-2789-bookmark248"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark249"></a> 11.13 Performing a Forensic Search</p>
<p>Main window &gt; &gt; Select an image pane &gt;</p>
<p>Forensic Search allows you to search for specific properties in the video of the selected image pane. IVA-based Forensic Search is only available for VRM, local storage and</p>
<p>Bosch Video Client recordings.</p>
<p><strong>To perform a Forensic Search:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Select the Image pane where you want to find motion.</li>
<li>Using the Hairline, select the time period on the <a href="#post-2789-bookmark490">Timeline</a>.</li>
</ol>
<p>Q*</p>
<ol>
<li>Select the &#8216; tab.</li>
</ol>
<p>The <strong>Include audio </strong>window is displayed.</p>
<ol>
<li>In the <strong>Type </strong>list, select the appropriate entry.</li>
<li>Configure your Forensic Search.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Search </strong>to start the Forensic Search.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>&lt;=y</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Selectthe tabtofindthematchingentries.</li>
<li>For playing the corresponding video, double-click the entry.</li>
</ol>
<p>The corresponding video is displayed.</p>
<p><strong>To configure Motion+:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Drag an area to select the cells you want to check for motion.</li>
</ol>
<p>The selected area is displayed in transparent yellow.</p>
<ol>
<li>To clear a selected area, right-click the selected area and click <strong>Clear All </strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Configuring Intelligent Video Analytics</strong></p>
<p><strong>To add a new IVA task:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Click <strong>New</strong>.</li>
<li>Select the appropriate task in the list, for example <strong>Object in field</strong>.</li>
<li>Click <strong>OK</strong>.</li>
<li>Configure your task.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Finish</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>To edit an existing IVA task:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Select the task you want to edit.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Edit</strong>.</li>
<li>Make the appropriate changes.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Finish</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Forensic Search window</strong></p>
<p>Allows you to find video data with selecting a Forensic Search type, for example Motion+. You can search for motion only in the selected image pane.</p>
<p><strong>Presets</strong></p>
<p>Select an entry to load Forensic Search settings that you have saved.</p>
<p><strong>Note: </strong>The latest configured Forensic Search settings are always saved automatically. If you select the <strong>&lt;current configuration&gt; </strong>entry, the Forensic Search settings that have been active during the selected time range are loaded.</p>
<p><strong>Save</strong></p>
<p>Click to save your configured Forensic Search preset settings. You can enter a descriptive name.</p>
<p><strong>Type</strong></p>
<p>Select the required analysis type, for example:</p>
<ul>
<li>IntelligentVideoAnalytics</li>
<li>IntelligentVideoAnalyticsFlow</li>
</ul>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>&#8211; Motion+</p>
<p><strong>Note: </strong>If you select one of these algorithms, you can set the corresponding parameters directly.</p>
<p><strong>Tasks</strong></p>
<p>Configure your Forensic Search. See the user documentation of the Intelligent Video Analytics version that you are using.</p>
<p><strong>Metadata Inspection</strong></p>
<p>See object properties of selected objects in the image pane and use these properties to refine your Forensic Search criteria in order to get better results.</p>
<p><strong>Search</strong></p>
<p>Click to start the Forensic Search.</p>
<p>For detailed information on video analysis, see the documentation for Video Content Analysis VCA.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark418"><em> Timeline window, page 141</em></a></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>11.14</strong></td>
<td><a id="post-2789-bookmark251"></a><strong>Forensic Search Results window</strong></p>
<p><strong>!&lt;►</strong></p>
<p>Main window &gt; &gt; tab</p>
<p>Displays entries for video data containing motion for the camera displayed in the selected</p>
<p><a href="#post-2789-bookmark461">Image pane</a>. You can select an entry for playback, protection, authenticity checking, archiving, or export.</p>
<p>Displays the recordings that match the search criteria.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark248"><em>Performing a Forensic Search, page 85</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark225"><em>Exporting video data, page 78</em></a></li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>11.15</strong></td>
<td><a id="post-2789-bookmark254"></a><strong>Finding logbook entries</strong></p>
<p>Main window &gt; <strong>Tools </strong>menu &gt; <strong>Find in logbook&#8230; </strong>command &gt; <strong>Please select a Server </strong>dialog box (if required) &gt; <strong>Select Search Parameters </strong>dialog box</p>
<p>In the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark470"> Logbook</a>, you can search for particular events, alarms, devices, and strings of events. You can save the search criteria as a filter. If you select another time zone, the date and time display of the Logbook search results is changed accordingly.</p>
<p><strong>To find Logbook entries:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>In an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark454"> Enterprise System</a>, select the desired<a href="#post-2789-bookmark473"> Management Server</a> for searching.</li>
<li>In the <strong>Filter </strong>list, select a pre-defined filter if available.</li>
</ol>
<p>A filter contains all the settings that you make in this dialog box.</p>
<p>You can save, load, and delete the selected filter. You can reset the settings of the selected filter.</p>
<ol>
<li>In the <strong>Date and Time </strong>field, enter start date and time and end date and time for the search process.</li>
<li>In the <strong>Result Count </strong>list, limit the number of matching entries that result from the search.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Add </strong>to limit the search to specific events.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Add/Edit </strong>to specify search criteria for text data.</li>
<li>In the <strong>Alarms </strong>field, select search criteria to limit the search to specific alarms.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Add </strong>to limit the search to specific devices.</li>
<li>In the <strong>Details </strong>field, type a search string. You can use * as a wildcard.</li>
</ol>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>
<ol>
<li>In the <strong>User name </strong>field, type a user name to search for.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Search</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>The <strong>Logbook results: </strong>dialog box with the matching entries is displayed.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark259"><em>Select Search Parameters dialog box, page 88</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark271"><em>Logbook Results: dialog box, page 91</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark268"><em>Search Conditions dialog box, page 90</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark265"><em>Device Selection dialog box, page 90</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark262"><em>Event Selection dialog box, page 90</em></a></li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>11.15.1</strong></td>
<td><strong>Finding logons to an unmanaged site</strong></p>
<p>Main window &gt; <strong>Tools </strong>menu &gt; <strong>Find in logbook&#8230; </strong>command &gt; <strong>Please select a Server </strong>dialog box (if required) &gt; <strong>Select Search Parameters </strong>dialog box</p>
<p>You can find a logon event on a <a href="#post-2789-bookmark478">workstation </a>that is configured in another BVMS as an unmanaged site. If a user of Operator Client accesses this workstation using an unmanaged site, this event is logged as an <strong>Operator Logon </strong>event.</p>
<p><strong>To find a logon:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Click <strong>Add </strong>to limit the search to specific events.</li>
<li>In the <strong>Event Selection </strong>dialog box, expand <strong>Events and Alarms</strong>, expand <strong>System Devices</strong>, expand <strong>User Actions</strong>.</li>
<li>Click to select <strong>Operator Logon </strong>and <strong>Operator Logoff</strong>.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Search</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>The <strong>Logbook results: </strong>dialog box with the matching entries is displayed.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>11.15.2</strong></td>
<td><strong>Please select a Server</strong></p>
<p>Main window &gt; <strong>Tools </strong>menu &gt; <strong>Please select a Server </strong>command</p>
<p>This dialog box only appears when you logged on as user of an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark455"> Enterprise User Group</a>.</p>
<p>Allows you to select a<a href="#post-2789-bookmark473"> Management Server</a> where the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark470"> Logbook</a> search is performed.</p>
<p><strong>Management Server:</strong></p>
<p>Select the IP address of the desired Management Server.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>11.15.3</strong></td>
<td><a id="post-2789-bookmark259"></a><strong>Select Search Parameters dialog box</strong></p>
<p>Main window &gt; <strong>Tools </strong>menu &gt; <strong>Find in logbook&#8230; </strong>command &gt; <strong>Please select a Server </strong>dialog box (if required) or</p>
<p><strong>M </strong>&#8216;i&#8221;..</p>
<p>Main window &gt; &gt; &#8221; &gt; <strong>Video by event search </strong>entry</p>
<p>Allows you to define and save search criteria for finding entries in the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark470"> logbook</a>. If you start this dialog box from within the playback mode via <strong>Tools </strong>menu, the time period selected in the <strong>Timeline </strong>window is copied into the <strong>Date and Time </strong>fields.</p>
<p>If you start this dialog box via <strong>Video by event search</strong>, the search for text data is not supported. If you start via the <strong>Find in logbook&#8230; </strong>command, text search is supported. If you start this dialog box via <strong>Video by event search</strong>, the cameras of the current<a href="#post-2789-bookmark463"> image</a> <a href="#post-2789-bookmark463">window</a> are preselected for the search and the Management Server of the camera displayed in the selected<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane </a>is preselected. If no camera is displayed in the Image window, the first Management Server of the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark472"> logical tree </a>is preselected.</p>
<p>If you select another time zone, the date and time display of the logbook search results is changed accordingly.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>BVMS</td>
<td>Managing recorded videos | en <strong>89</strong></p>
<p><strong>Filter</strong></p>
<p>Select a filter name with predefined search criteria or type a name for a new filter.</p>
<p><strong>Delete</strong></p>
<p>Click to remove the entry selected in the <strong>Filter </strong>list.</p>
<p><strong>Load</strong></p>
<p>Click to load the search criteria of the selected filter name.</p>
<p><strong>Save</strong></p>
<p>Click to save the search criteria with the selected filter name.</p>
<p><strong>Reset</strong></p>
<p>Click to clear all search criteria of the selected filter name.</p>
<p><strong>Date and Time</strong></p>
<p>Type the date and time to define the period you want to search.</p>
<p><strong>Result Count</strong></p>
<p>Select an entry in the list to limit the number of matches that result from the search.</p>
<p><strong>Add</strong></p>
<p>Click to display the <strong>Event Selection </strong>dialog box.</p>
<p><strong>Remove</strong></p>
<p>Click to remove a selected event entry.</p>
<p><strong>Remove All</strong></p>
<p>Click to remove all event entries.</p>
<p><strong>Add/Edit</strong></p>
<p>Click to display the <strong>Search Conditions </strong>dialog box.</p>
<p><strong>Remove</strong></p>
<p>Click to remove the selected condition entry.</p>
<p><strong>Remove All</strong></p>
<p>Click to remove all condition entries.</p>
<p><strong>Alarm priority</strong></p>
<p>Select an alarm priority to search for.</p>
<p><strong>Alarm State</strong></p>
<p>Select an alarm state to search for.</p>
<p><strong>Record only</strong></p>
<p>Click to select for searching record-only alarms.</p>
<p><strong>Force workflow</strong></p>
<p>Click to select for searching force workflow alarms.</p>
<p><strong>Auto clear</strong></p>
<p>Click to select for searching auto-clear alarms.</p>
<p><strong>Add</strong></p>
<p>Click to display the <strong>Device Selection </strong>dialog box.</p>
<p><strong>Remove</strong></p>
<p>Click to remove a selected device entry.</p>
<p><strong>Remove All</strong></p>
<p>Click to remove all device entries.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Details</strong></p>
<p>Type a string to search for. Some important events contain strings to better find them. For example, a particular SystemErrorEvent has the string <strong>Server alarm queue capacity reached!</strong>. You can use * as a wildcard. For example, enter *triggered* to find the string An alarm was triggered by a network failure.*triggered or triggered* will not find this string.</p>
<p><strong>User name</strong></p>
<p>Type a user name to search for.</p>
<p><strong>Search</strong></p>
<p>Click to start the search. The <strong>Logbook results: </strong>dialog box is displayed.</p>
<p><strong>Close</strong></p>
<p>Click to close the dialog box. No search is executed. If you did not save your search criteria with a filter name, they get lost.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark195"><em> Finding recorded video, page 72</em></a></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>11.15.4</strong></td>
<td><a id="post-2789-bookmark262"></a><strong>Event Selection dialog box</strong></p>
<p>Main window &gt; <strong>Tools </strong>menu &gt; <strong>Find in logbook&#8230; </strong>command &gt; <strong>Select Search Parameters </strong>dialog box &gt; <strong>Add </strong>button</p>
<p>Allows you to add<a href="#post-2789-bookmark457"> event</a>s for filtering purposes.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark195"><em> Finding recorded video, page 72</em></a></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>11.15.5</strong></td>
<td><a id="post-2789-bookmark265"></a><strong>Device Selection dialog box</strong></p>
<p>Main window &gt; <strong>Tools </strong>menu &gt; <strong>Find in logbook&#8230; </strong>command &gt; <strong>Select Search Parameters </strong>dialog box &gt; <strong>Add </strong>button</p>
<p>Allows you to select the appropriate devices for finding<a href="#post-2789-bookmark470"> Logbook</a> entries and recorded videos.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark195"><em>Finding recorded video, page 72</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark254"><em>Finding logbook entries, page 87</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark259"><em>Select Search Parameters dialog box, page 88</em></a></li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>11.15.6</strong></td>
<td><a id="post-2789-bookmark268"></a><strong>Search Conditions dialog box</strong></p>
<p>Main window &gt; <strong>Tools </strong>menu &gt; <strong>Find in logbook&#8230; </strong>command &gt; <strong>Select Search Parameters </strong>dialog box &gt; <strong>Add/Edit </strong>button</p>
<p>You can combine multiple values of different text data entries to find the desired<a href="#post-2789-bookmark470"> Logbook</a> entry. For example, you combine a bank routing code with a date to find the respective Logbook entries.</p>
<p><strong>Add Condition</strong></p>
<p>Click to add a new entry in the <strong>Data Field Name </strong>column.</p>
<p>In the list of available data values, select the desired entry.</p>
<p>In the <strong>Comparative Value </strong>column, type in a search string.</p>
<p>Repeat these steps for further data values.</p>
<p><strong>Remove Condition</strong></p>
<p>Click to remove the selected entry.</p>
<p><strong>Remove All</strong></p>
<p>Click to remove all entries.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>11.15.7</strong></td>
<td><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark259"><em>Select Search Parameters dialog box, page 88</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark254"><em>Finding logbook entries, page 87</em></a></li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark271"></a><strong>Logbook Results: dialog box</strong></p>
<p>Main window &gt; <strong>Tools </strong>menu &gt; <strong>Find in logbook&#8230; </strong>command &gt; <strong>Select Search Parameters </strong>dialog box &gt; <strong>Search </strong>button</p>
<p>Displays the results of a<a href="#post-2789-bookmark470"> Logbook</a> search. If you select another time zone, the date and time display of the Logbook search results is changed accordingly.</p>
<p><strong>Back to filter</strong></p>
<p>Click to display the <strong>Select Search Parameters </strong>dialog box.</p>
<p><strong>Save results</strong></p>
<p>Click to display a dialog box for saving a text file with Logbook entries as CSV file.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>\ î 1</strong></td>
<td><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>When you open such an exported CSV file in Microsoft Excel, it can happen that time related cells do not display seconds.</p>
<p>To change this behavior, change the formatting of these cells from m/d/yyyy h:mm to m/d/ yyyy h:mm:ss</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>11.16</strong></td>
<td><a id="post-2789-bookmark274"></a><strong>Displaying text data</strong></p>
<p>Main window &gt; &gt; Right-click an Image pane &gt; <strong>Text Data Show Bottom </strong>or <strong>Text Data</strong></p>
<p><strong>Show Right</strong></p>
<p>or</p>
<p>Main window &gt; Right-click an Image pane &gt; <strong>Text Data Show Bottom </strong>or <strong>Text Data Show Right</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>( Î1</strong></td>
<td><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>The system administrator must configure the recording of text data in Configuration Client.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>You can display recorded text data in the text data pane.</p>
<p>The text values are displayed in the left column, the names of the text fields are displayed in the right column.</p>
<p><strong>To find recordings with text data:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="54" height="50" class="wp-image-2892" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-103.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 103" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 371"> Select a time period.</li>
<li>Click</li>
<li>Select <strong>Please select a Server</strong>.</li>
<li>Enter or select the required search criteria.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Search</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>To display text data:</strong></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>1.</p>
<p>2.</td>
<td>Move the hairline to a time position when an event with text data has been recorded.</p>
<p>In the <a href="#post-2789-bookmark490">Timeline</a>, start the playback.</p>
<p>The text data is displayed in the text data pane.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>The following screenshot shows an example:</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="855" height="643" class="wp-image-2893" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-104.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 104" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 372" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-104.jpeg 855w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-104-300x226.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-104-768x578.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 855px) 100vw, 855px" /></p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark195"><em> Finding recorded video, page 72</em></a></p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark276"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark277"></a> 11.17 Searching for text data</p>
<p><em>.9.</em> CL</p>
<p>Main window &gt; &gt; &gt; Click <em>*</em> &gt; <strong>Please select a Server </strong>entry &gt; <strong>Search for</strong></p>
<p><strong>Text Data </strong>dialog box</p>
<p>The operator can search for text data to find the corresponding recordings. The text data must be stored in the Logbook.</p>
<p>Text data is delivered by systems like foyer card readers, automatic teller machines, virtual inputs, LPR devices and Person Identification devices. Text data contains textual transaction data like account numbers, bank routing codes, person names or license plate countries.</p>
<p>Text data of a device is recorded together with the corresponding video data.</p>
<p><strong>Limitations</strong></p>
<p>For searching recordings with text data, the text data must be configured to be stored in the Logbook.</p>
<p>The encoder for which you configure the recording text data function, must have firmware version 5.92 or later.</p>
<p>The text data of maximum 32 different devices can be recorded synchronously for one camera. Maximum 3000 bytes of text data can be stored on an encoder per event.</p>
<p>If you see problems with Logbook searches, display of additional data, or CSV exports of Logbook search results, the reason can be that the additional text data contains non-printable characters, for example x00-x1F.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Search for Text Data dialog box</strong></p>
<p>You can find text data in recordings. You can refine your search by adding specific text data with a specific value.</p>
<p>Entries in the <strong>Data Field Name </strong>field and the <strong>Comparative Value </strong>field are retained after the next restart or re-logon of Operator Client.</p>
<p><strong>Sources</strong></p>
<p>In the list, click to select the desired cameras for searching.</p>
<p><strong>Date and Time</strong></p>
<p>Displays the period in which you want to search.</p>
<p><strong>Search Conditions</strong></p>
<p>Add a search condition to refine your search.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>11.18</strong></td>
<td><a id="post-2789-bookmark279"></a><strong>Searching for text data in logbook entries</strong></p>
<p>Main window &gt; <strong>Tools </strong>menu &gt; <strong>Find in logbook&#8230; </strong>command &gt; <strong>Please select a Server </strong>dialog box (if required) &gt; <strong>Select Search Parameters </strong>dialog box</p>
<p><strong>Person Identification use case</strong></p>
<p>It is possible to search for a specific person in all Person Identification events and alarms in order to find past recordings of the specific identified person.</p>
<p>You can search for the following text data in logbook entries in order to find a specific person: &#8211; Person name</p>
<ul>
<li>Person group</li>
<li>Person ID</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>To search for text data in logbook entries:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>In the <strong>Text Data </strong>field click <strong>Add/Edit </strong>to limit the search to specific text data.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Add Condition</strong>.</li>
<li>Select the appropriate <strong>Data Field Name</strong>.</li>
<li>Type the <strong>Comparative Value</strong>.</li>
<li>Click <strong>OK</strong>.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Search</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>The <strong>Logbook results: </strong>dialog box with the matching entries is displayed.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark254"><em>Finding logbook entries, page 87</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark282"><em>Erasing text data from logbook entries, page 93</em></a></li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>11.19</strong></td>
<td><a id="post-2789-bookmark282"></a><strong>Erasing text data from logbook entries</strong></p>
<p><strong>Tools </strong>&gt; <strong>Erase text data from logbook&#8230;</strong></p>
<p>In order to<a href="#post-2789-bookmark456"> erase </a>personal-related data if requested, you can erase text data from logbook entries.</p>
<p><strong>Note: </strong>It is only possible to erase all personal-related text data from a logbook entry at once.</p>
<p><strong>To erase text data from logbook entries:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Click <strong>Erase text data from logbook </strong></li>
</ol>
<p>The <strong>Select search parameters for erasing text data </strong>dialog box is displayed.</p>
<ol>
<li>Click <strong>Add/Edit </strong>to specify search criteria for text data.</li>
</ol>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<ol>
<li>In the <strong>Data Field Name </strong>column, select the appropriate entry.</li>
<li>In the <strong>Comparative Value </strong>column, type a search string. You can use * as a wildcard.</li>
<li>Click <strong>OK</strong>.</li>
<li>In the <strong>Date and Time </strong>field, enter start date and time and end date and time for the search process.</li>
<li>In the <strong>Result Count </strong>list, limit the number of matching entries that result from the search. 8. Click <strong>Search</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>The <strong>Logbook entries for erasing text data </strong>dialog box with the matching entries is displayed.</p>
<ol>
<li>Select the appropriate logbook entries.</li>
</ol>
<p>You can select multiple entries by pressing the CTRL- or the SHIFT-key.</p>
<ol>
<li>Click <strong>Erase text data from selected entries</strong>.</li>
<li>Click <strong>OK</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>The text data of the selected entries is erased.</p>
<p><strong>Select search parameters for erasing text data dialog box</strong></p>
<p><strong>Add/Edit</strong></p>
<p>Click to display the <strong>Search Conditions </strong>dialog box.</p>
<p><strong>Remove</strong></p>
<p>Click to remove the selected condition entry.</p>
<p><strong>Remove All</strong></p>
<p>Click to remove all condition entries.</p>
<p><strong>Search</strong></p>
<p>Click to start the search. The <strong>Logbook entries for erasing text data </strong>dialog box is displayed.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark254"><em>Finding logbook entries, page 87</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark279"><em>Searching for text data in logbook entries, page 93</em></a></li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark285"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark286"></a> 11.20 Displaying video via low bandwidth</p>
<p>Main window</p>
<p>You can play back the recordings of a camera or view live images of a camera with Operator Client even if you have a low bandwidth network connection between BVMS and your Operator Client computer.</p>
<p>Transcoders do not support intelligent tracking,<a href="#post-2789-bookmark485"> ROI</a>,<a href="#post-2789-bookmark466"> Intelligent Video Analytics </a>overlays, and text data.</p>
<p>For using low bandwidth networks, 2 options are available:</p>
<ul>
<li>Hardware transcoding</li>
<li>Software transcoding (only available for Live Mode)</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Hardware transcoding</strong></p>
<p>For hardware transcoding the VRM must be equipped with at least one transcoding device. This transcoding device is not configured in BVMS. See the VRM documentation on how to configure a transcoding device. Transcoding devices can have multiple transcoding instances. DIVAR IP 3000 and DIVAR IP 7000 are delivered each with one preconfigured transcoding instance.</p>
<p>Each live stream or recording needs an own transcoding instance.</p>
<p>Hardware transcoding is possible only for Video IP devices from Bosch connected to a VRM. Both camera and transcoding device must be managed by the same VRM.</p>
<p><strong>Software transcoding</strong></p>
<p>For software transcoding you need a Mobile Video Service configured on your Management Server or your Enterprise Management Server.</p>
<p>In an Enterprise System only the MVS services are used that are configured in the Enterprise Management Server configuration.</p>
<p>To select the preferred transcoding device, use the <strong>Options </strong>dialog box.</p>
<p><strong>To enable transcoding:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>In the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark472"> Logical Tree</a>, right-click the desired camera, point to <strong>Preferred stream</strong>, and then click to enable <strong>Transcoding</strong>.</li>
<li>Display the camera in an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane</a>.</li>
</ol>
<p>■=&gt; This camera shows transcoded video.</p>
<p>I</p>
<p><strong>«;:.</strong></p>
<p><sup>J</sup> icon for hardware transcoding or the icon for software transcoding is displayed.</p>
<p>If the affected camera is already displayed in an Image pane, it continues displaying untranscoded video until you close this Image pane.</p>
<p>If a transcoding request cannot be fulfilled, the related Image pane turns black.</p>
<p><strong>To disable transcoding in Live Mode:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>In the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark472"> Logical Tree</a>, right-click the desired camera, point to <strong>Preferred stream</strong>, and then select another stream.</li>
<li>Display the camera in an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane</a>.</li>
</ol>
<p>■=&gt; This camera shows untranscoded video.</p>
<p>The transcoding icon is not displayed.</p>
<p>If the affected camera is already displayed in an Image pane, it continues displaying transcoded video until you close this Image pane.</p>
<p><strong>To disable transcoding in Playback Mode:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>In the Logical Tree, right-click the desired camera, point to <strong>Preferred stream</strong>, and then click to disable <strong>Transcoding</strong>.</li>
<li>Display the camera in an Image pane.</li>
</ol>
<ul>
<li>=&gt; This camera shows untranscoded video.</li>
</ul>
<p>The transcoding icon is not displayed.</p>
<p>If the affected camera is already displayed in an Image pane, it continues displaying transcoded video until you close this Image pane.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="75" height="75" class="wp-image-2894" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-105.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 105" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 373"><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>11.21</p>
<p>You can also enable or disable transcoding in an Image pane directly:</p>
<p>Right-click the item, point to <strong>Select stream</strong>, and then click the desired menu command.</p>
<p>This setting only affects the selected Image pane.</p>
<p>This command does not affect the setting for the preferred stream in the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark472"> Logical Tree</a>.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark385"><em>Options dialog box, page 134</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark405"><em>Image pane, page 139</em></a></li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark288"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark289"></a> Switching the recording source</p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p>If configured, you can change the recording source.</p>
<p>An icon for changing the recording source displays the current status.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="51" class="wp-image-2895" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-106.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 106" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 374"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="50" height="50" class="wp-image-2896" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-107.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 107" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 375"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="51" class="wp-image-2897" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-108.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 108" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 376"></p>
<p>Example:</p>
<p>11.22</p>
<p>1.</p>
<p>Right-click</p>
<p>2.</p>
<p>Click <strong>Connect to Site</strong>.</p>
<p>As long as the device is connecting,</p>
<p>is displayed.</p>
<p>After the connection is successfully established,</p>
<p>is displayed.</p>
<p>indicates that Secondary VRM recording is displayed.</p>
<p><strong>To switch:</strong></p>
<p>Click an icon for changing the recording source, for example</p>
<p>The icon changes for example to</p>
<p>The Timeline displays the recording of the selected source.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark380"><em>Icons used, page 127</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark201"><em>Playing recorded videos, page 73</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark117"><em>Starting instant playback, page 46</em></a></li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark292"></a> Connecting to an unmanaged site</p>
<p>Main window</p>
<p>You can connect to an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark492"> unmanaged site</a>. All available devices of all video network devices of this site are then displayed in the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark472"> Logical Tree</a>. As soon as you log off or exit Operator Client, this connection is terminated.</p>
<p><strong>To connect:</strong></p>
<p>All available devices of this site are displayed in the Logical Tree.</p>
<p>If not all devices belonging to this site can be connected, is displayed. You can later</p>
<p>try to connect the remaining devices that were not connected now.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="50" height="50" class="wp-image-2898" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-109.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 109" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 377"></p>
<p><strong>Tip: </strong>You can also double-click</p>
<p>to connect.</p>
<p><strong>To connect remaining devices:</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="37" height="34" class="wp-image-2899" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-110.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 110" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 378"></p>
<p>1.</p>
<p>Right-click</p>
<p>2. Click <strong>Retry Connection</strong>.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="54" height="51" class="wp-image-2900" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-111.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 111" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 379"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="43" height="37" class="wp-image-2901" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-112.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 112" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 380"><strong>To disconnect a single site:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Right-click</li>
<li><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="50" height="50" class="wp-image-2902" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-113.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 113" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 381"> Click <strong>Disconnect from Site</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>The icon changes:</p>
<p>All<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image panes </a>with devices belonging to this site are automatically closed.</p>
<p><strong>To disconnect all sites:</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="56" height="56" class="wp-image-2903" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-114.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 114" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 382"></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Click</p>
<p>All sites are disconnected. Partially connected sites are not disconnected.</p>
<p>All Image panes with devices belonging to this site are automatically closed.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark26"><em> Unmanaged site, page 18</em></a></p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark297"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark298"></a> Handling events and alarms</p>
<p>12</p>
<p>This chapter provides information on how to handle alarms.</p>
<p>Some of the features described in this chapter can be deactivated for your user group.</p>
<p><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>A site map displayed in an alarm image pane is optimized for display and contains only the initial view of the original map file.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark318"><em> Managing Person Identification alarms, page 104</em></a></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark329"><em> Controlling access control functions, page 108</em></a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="77" height="56" class="wp-image-2904" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-115.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 115" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 383"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="73" height="73" class="wp-image-2905" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-116.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 116" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 384"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="77" height="56" class="wp-image-2906" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-117.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 117" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 385"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="73" height="73" class="wp-image-2907" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-118.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 118" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 386"></p>
<p>12.1</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark295"></a> Accepting an alarm</p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p>tab</p>
<p>or</p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p>tab</p>
<p>&gt;</p>
<p>You can accept a single alarm or multiple alarms for clearing or starting a workflow. <strong>To accept an alarm:</strong></p>
<p>1.</p>
<p>Select the desired alarm entry and click</p>
<p>2.</p>
<p>For returning to the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark463"> image window</a>, click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="68" height="68" class="wp-image-2908" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-119.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 119" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 387"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="56" height="56" class="wp-image-2909" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-120.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 120" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 388"></p>
<p>When an alarm is accepted, several things happen simultaneously:</p>
<p>&#8211; The alarm is removed from alarm lists of all other users.</p>
<p>&#8211; If not already displayed, an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark435"> alarm image window</a> replaces the Live Image window on the monitor that has been enabled for alarms.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="73" height="73" class="wp-image-2910" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-121.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 121" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 389"> &#8211; The alarm content (live video,<a href="#post-2789-bookmark464"> instant playback</a> video, or site maps) is shown in a row of alarm image panes in the alarm image window.</p>
<p>is enabled.</p>
<p>If there is a workflow associated with the alarm, the workflow button</p>
<p>You can now clear the alarm or start a workflow. If the alarm has been configured to &#8220;force workflow&#8221;, then you must complete the workflow before you can clear the alarm.</p>
<p><strong>To display an alarm camera on a monitor:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Drag the camera image from its alarm image pane to a monitor group.</p>
<p><strong>To accept all alarms on a map:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Display a map containing a camera<a href="#post-2789-bookmark460"> hot spot </a>in an Image pane.</li>
<li>Right-click a camera located on a map, and click <strong>Accept all alarms of this device</strong>. All alarms of this device are accepted. The<a href="#post-2789-bookmark436"> alarm list</a> displays the accepted alarms accordingly.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211; </em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark316"><em>Alarm List window, page 102</em></a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="499" height="48" class="wp-image-2911" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-122.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 122" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 390" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-122.jpeg 499w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-122-300x29.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 499px) 100vw, 499px" /></p>
<p>12.2</p>
<p>Main window &gt; &gt; tab &gt; Select the desired alarm &gt;</p>
<p>or</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark300"></a> Adding comments to an alarm</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="499" height="48" class="wp-image-2912" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-123.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 123" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 391" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-123.jpeg 499w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-123-300x29.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 499px) 100vw, 499px" /> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="71" height="67" class="wp-image-2913" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-124.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 124" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 392"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="71" height="67" class="wp-image-2914" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-125.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 125" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 393"></p>
<p>Main window &gt; &gt; tab &gt; Select the desired alarm &gt;</p>
<p>You can only comment an alarm after you have accepted it.</p>
<p><strong>To add a comment to an alarm:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Click</li>
</ol>
<p>The Workflow dialog box is displayed for entering a comment and displaying the action plan for this alarm. If no action plan is assigned to the alarm, the dialog box only displays the <strong>Comment: </strong>field.</p>
<ol>
<li>In the <strong>Comment: </strong>field, type your comment.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Close</strong>.</li>
<li>Clear the alarm.</li>
</ol>
<p>The comment is added as a separate entry in the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark470"> Logbook</a> and added to the alarm entry in the Logbook.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211; </em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark316"><em>Alarm List window, page 102</em></a></p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark302"></a> 12.3 Clearing an alarm</p>
<p>s«</p>
<p>Main window &gt; &gt; tab</p>
<p>or</p>
<p><sub>M d</sub> &#8211;</p>
<p>Main window &gt; &gt; tab</p>
<p><strong>To clear an alarm:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Select the desired alarm entries and click</p>
<p>If the alarm has the Comment or Force Workflow attribute, you cannot clear the alarm directly. In these cases you must first display the action plan and enter a comment. The alarm is cleared and removed from your Alarm List.</p>
<p>If no other alarms are currently being displayed, the <a href="#post-2789-bookmark435">Alarm Image window</a> is closed and the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane </a>is displayed.</p>
<p><strong>To clear all alarms on a map:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Display a map containing a camera<a href="#post-2789-bookmark460"> hot spot</a> in an Image pane.</li>
<li>Right-click a camera located on a map, and click <strong>Clear all alarms of this device</strong>. All alarms of this device are cleared. The <a href="#post-2789-bookmark436">Alarm List </a>displays the cleared alarms accordingly.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211; </em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark316"><em>Alarm List window, page 102</em></a></p>
<p>12.4</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark304"></a> Customizing the Alarm List window</p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p>or</p>
<p>12.5</p>
<p>tab</p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p><strong>To sort the table:</strong></p>
<p>tab</p>
<p>1.</p>
<p>2.</p>
<p>Click a column heading.</p>
<p>The arrow in the column heading indicates whether the table is sorted in ascending or descending order.</p>
<p>To change the sorting order, click the column heading again.</p>
<p><strong>To add or remove columns:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Right-click the column heading and click a marked entry to remove the corresponding column or click an unmarked entry to add the corresponding column.</p>
<p><strong>To change the sequence of columns:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Drag a column title and move it to the required position.</p>
<p><strong>To change the column width:</strong></p>
<p>1.</p>
<p>2.</p>
<p>Point to the right border of the column heading. The pointer becomes a double-headed arrow *t*. Drag the column border to the left or the right.</p>
<p>or</p>
<p>To quickly make the column wide enough to show all of its contents, double-click the right border of the column heading.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211; </em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark316"><em>Alarm List window, page 102</em></a></p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark306"></a> Displaying the Live Image window</p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p>&gt; Alarm Image window</p>
<p>or</p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p>&gt; Alarm Image window</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="77" height="56" class="wp-image-2915" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-126.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 126" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 394"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="73" height="73" class="wp-image-2916" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-127.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 127" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 395"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="77" height="56" class="wp-image-2917" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-128.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 128" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 396"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="73" height="73" class="wp-image-2918" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-129.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 129" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 397"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="77" height="56" class="wp-image-2919" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-130.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 130" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 398"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="77" height="56" class="wp-image-2920" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-131.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 131" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 399"></p>
<p>You can switch to the Live or Playback<a href="#post-2789-bookmark463"> Image window</a> when the <a href="#post-2789-bookmark435">Alarm Image window</a> is displayed.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="51" class="wp-image-2921" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-132.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 132" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 400"><strong>To display the Image window: 4 </strong>In an Alarm Image window, click</p>
<p>. The Image window is displayed.</p>
<p><strong>To start/stop loop playback:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Click &#8216; — &#8216;.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark316"><em>Alarm List window, page 102</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark402"><em>Image window, page 138</em></a></li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark310"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark311"></a> Switching alarm displays of alarm image window</p>
<p>12.6</p>
<p>In the alarm image window you can switch the alarm display. The following displays are available:</p>
<p>Multi-row alarm display</p>
<p>Single view alarm display</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="56" height="56" class="wp-image-2922" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-133.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 133" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 401"><strong>To switch to multi-row alarm display:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="56" height="56" class="wp-image-2923" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-134.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 134" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 402"><strong>To switch to single view alarm display:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Click</p>
<p><strong>To switch between the two alarm displays:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Double-click somewhere in the alarm image window or</p>
<p>double-click on a specific alarm image pane.</p>
<p><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>If you are in multi-row alarm display and double-click somewhere in the alarm image window, the first image pane in the alarm image pane row will switch to the main image pane in single view alarm display. If you double-click on a specific alarm image pane in the alarm image window, this specific alarm image pane will switch to the main image pane in single view alarm display.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211; </em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark372"><em>Alarm display, page 123</em></a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="77" height="56" class="wp-image-2924" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-135.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 135" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 403"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="73" height="73" class="wp-image-2925" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-136.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 136" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 404"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="77" height="56" class="wp-image-2926" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-137.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 137" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 405"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="73" height="73" class="wp-image-2927" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-138.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 138" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 406"></p>
<p>12.7</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark308"></a> Starting a workflow</p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p>tab</p>
<p>or</p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p><strong>To start a workflow:</strong></p>
<p>tab</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="73" height="73" class="wp-image-2928" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-139.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 139" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 407"></p>
<p>1.</p>
<p>2.</p>
<p>3.</p>
<p>Select the required alarm entry and click</p>
<p>If this alarm has been configured to force a workflow, the action plan is displayed (if configured for this alarm). Additionally you can enter a comment if this is configured. Perform the required actions.</p>
<p>Clear the alarm.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211; </em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark316"><em>Alarm List window, page 102</em></a></p>
<p>12.8</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark313"></a> Un-accepting an alarm</p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p>tab</p>
<p>or</p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p>tab</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="77" height="56" class="wp-image-2929" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-140.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 140" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 408"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="73" height="73" class="wp-image-2930" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-141.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 141" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 409"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="77" height="56" class="wp-image-2931" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-142.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 142" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 410"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="73" height="73" class="wp-image-2932" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-143.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 143" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 411"></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>When you recall the acceptance of an alarm, it returns to Active state in your Alarm List, and it reappears in the Alarm Lists of all users that originally received the alarm.</p>
<p><strong>To &#8220;un-accept&#8221; an alarm:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Select the accepted alarm entry and click .</p>
<p>The alarm is displayed as active again.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211; </em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark316"><em>Alarm List window, page 102</em></a></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>12.9</strong></td>
<td><strong>Triggering a user event</strong></p>
<p>&#8230;. <sup>s</sup>&#8221; , , Ej</p>
<p>Main window &gt; &gt; Click</p>
<p>You can trigger a user<a href="#post-2789-bookmark457"> event</a> for a selected Management Server of an Enterprise System that has been configured in Configuration Client.</p>
<p>s</p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Right-click the desired and click the desired user event command.</p>
<p>■=&gt; The event is triggered.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>12.10</strong></td>
<td><a id="post-2789-bookmark316"></a><strong>Alarm List window</strong></p>
<p>Click to accept an alarm.</p>
<p>The alarm is removed from all Alarm Lists and alarm video displays of the other operators.</p>
<p><sup>&lt;</sup>E&gt;</p>
<p>Click to display a dialog box displaying an action plan. If configured, you can enter a comment.</p>
<p><strong>X</strong></p>
<p>Click to clear an alarm.</p>
<p>You cannot clear an alarm that has the comment or force workflow attribute before you have displayed the action plan and entered a comment. If the alarm is configured as an auto-clear alarm, the alarm is removed from the Alarm List after the auto-clear time (configured in the Configuration Client).</p>
<p>Click to revoke the acceptance of an alarm.</p>
<p><strong>*,M</strong></p>
<p>Click to turn alarm audio on / off.</p>
<p>The latest incoming alarm triggers an alarm sound.</p>
<p><em>&amp;</em></p>
<p>Click to display the Alarm List.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211; </em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark31"><em>Alarm handling, page 22</em></a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="75" height="75" class="wp-image-2933" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-144.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 144" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 412"></p>
<p>13</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark318"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark319"></a> Managing Person Identification alarms</p>
<p>When you accept a Person Identification alarm, information about the identified person is displayed in the image pane.</p>
<p><strong>Person Identification information</strong></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>Person group</td>
<td>Person group is the group that a person is assigned to.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Person image(s)</td>
<td>The default image and all available images from the Person Identification device are displayed.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Person name</td>
<td>The person name is the name of the identified person.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Confidence factor</td>
<td>The confidence factor is a measure of the degree of correctness a person is identified by the system in percentage (0 is no correctness, 100 is full correctness).</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark297"><em> Handling events and alarms, page 98</em></a></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2789-bookmark321"></a> Managing persons for a Person Identification alarm</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Tools </strong>&gt; <strong>Manage persons&#8230; </strong>&gt; <strong>Manage persons </strong>dialog box</p>
<p>The <strong>Manage persons </strong>dialog box allows you to add persons, assign person groups, add images to existing persons and export persons.</p>
<p><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>Person Identification only supports JPEG files.</p>
<p><strong>To add/import a person:</strong></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>1.</td>
<td>Select a person.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2.</td>
<td>Click to add an image of a person.</p>
<p>Or</p>
<p>drag an image of a person from your file explorer to a person group or the <strong>All </strong>tab.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>^</td>
<td>This image is assigned as the default image of the person.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>To add images to an existing person:</strong></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>1.</td>
<td>Select a person.</p>
<p>The default image and all available images of the person are displayed.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2.</td>
<td>Click in the images window to add more images to the person.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>To assign a new default image:</strong></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>1.</td>
<td>Move the mouse over the appropriate image.</p>
<p>The <strong>Set as default </strong>command is displayed.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2.</td>
<td>Click the <strong>Set as default </strong>command.</p>
<p>The image is assigned as default image.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>To assign a person group to a person:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Select a person.</li>
</ol>
<p>For every new person the <strong>Default person group </strong>value is already selected.</p>
<ol>
<li>Click in the <strong>Default person group </strong>field.</li>
<li>Select the appropriate person group you want to assign to the person.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>To export persons:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Select a person.</li>
</ol>
<p>|T|</p>
<ol>
<li>Click to export the person to the file explorer.</li>
</ol>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="75" height="75" class="wp-image-2934" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-145.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 145" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 413"><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>! T !</p>
<p>is disabled, if the <strong>All </strong>tab is selected. Select the <strong>Default person group </strong>tab or any other available person group tab to export persons.</p>
<p><strong>To delete a person:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="54" height="50" class="wp-image-2935" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-146.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 146" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 414"> Select a person.</li>
<li>Click</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>To delete multiple persons:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Select a person</li>
<li><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="54" height="50" class="wp-image-2936" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-147.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 147" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 415"> Press the CTRL-key and select multiple persons.</li>
<li>Click</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>To delete single person images:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="54" height="50" class="wp-image-2937" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-148.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 148" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 416"> Select the appropriate image.</li>
<li>Click</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Note: </strong>If you delete the default image, the next image is automatically assigned as the default image.</p>
<p><strong>To search for person names:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>In the search field, type the name of the person that you search.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Note: </strong>As soon as you start typing, the results will already be filtered and displayed.</p>
<p>You can immediately start searching for names even if the Operator Client is still importing the person list and the corresponding person images.</p>
<ol>
<li>To discard your search, click or press the esc key.</li>
</ol>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>14</strong></td>
<td><strong>Controlling intrusion panel functions</strong></p>
<p>You can control several intrusion panel functions from within the Operator Client.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>14.1</strong></td>
<td><strong>Switching off alarm sirens</strong></p>
<p>Main window</p>
<p>You can switch off alarm sirens of an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark468"> intrusion panel</a><a href="#post-2789-bookmark440"> area</a> if you have the corresponding permission.</p>
<p><strong>To switch off an alarm siren:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>In the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark472"> Logical Tree </a>or in a map, right-click the desired area ’ and click <strong>Silence Bells</strong>. The alarm siren is silent.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>14.2</strong></td>
<td><strong>Operating doors</strong></p>
<p>Main window</p>
<p>You can control the following<a href="#post-2789-bookmark468"> intrusion panel </a>states of a door from within Operator Client: &#8211; Secure a door.</p>
<ul>
<li>Unsecure a door. The state changes to locked.</li>
<li>Lock a door.</li>
<li>Unlock a door. You can lock or secure an unlocked door.</li>
<li>Cycle a door.</li>
</ul>
<p>The system administrator can limit the permission for each of these functions to specific user groups.</p>
<p>To lock a door means that a cardholder can open the door using the card.</p>
<p>To unlock a door, means that the door is open for anybody.</p>
<p>To secure a door means that nobody can open the door, even not the cardholders.</p>
<p>To cycle a door means to unlock a locked door for a few seconds, then lock it again.</p>
<p><strong>To operate:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Right-click a door in the Logical Tree or in a map and click the required command.</p>
<p>The following commands are available:</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Lock </strong>/ <strong>Unlock</strong></li>
<li><strong>Secure </strong>/ <strong>Unsecure</strong></li>
<li><strong>Cycle</strong></li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Note: </strong>The context menus for operating a door are not available when the state of this door is unknown.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark380"><em>Icons used, page 127</em></a></li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>14.3</strong></td>
<td><strong>Bypassing a point</strong></p>
<p>Main window</p>
<p>You can change the state of a point to the <strong>Bypassed </strong>state within Operator Client.</p>
<p>The system administrator can limit the permission for this function to specific user groups.</p>
<p>When you unbypass a point, you change its state back to normal.</p>
<p>To<a href="#post-2789-bookmark443"> bypass </a>a point means that this point cannot send any alarm. To unbypass a point means that this point can send alarms. Pending alarms are also sent if available.</p>
<p><strong>To bypass or unbypass:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Right-click a point in the Logical Tree or in a map and click the required command.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>BVMS</td>
<td>Controlling intrusion panel functions | en <strong>107</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>14.3.1</strong></td>
<td><strong>Note: </strong>The context menus for bypassing and unbypassing are not available when the state of the device is unknown.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark380"><em> Icons used, page 127</em></a></p>
<p><strong>Arming an area</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Main window</p>
<p>You can control the following<a href="#post-2789-bookmark468"> intrusion panel </a>states of an area from within Operator Client:</p>
<ul>
<li>Arm an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark440"> area</a>.</li>
<li>Disarm an area.</li>
<li>Force the arming of an area that is not ready for arming.</li>
</ul>
<p>The system administrator can limit the permission for each of these functions to specific user groups.</p>
<p><strong>To arm an area:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>In the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark472"> Logical Tree</a>, right-click the desired disarmed area ( * ) and click <strong>Arm</strong>. The icon</p>
<p><strong>F*</strong></p>
<p>for an armed area ( * ) is displayed.</p>
<p><strong>To disarm an area:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>In the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark472"> Logical Tree </a>or in a map, right-click the desired armed area ( * ) and click</p>
<p><strong>Disarm</strong>. The icon for an disarmed area ( * ) is displayed.</p>
<p><strong>To force the arming of an area:</strong></p>
<p><strong>H</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>In the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark472"> Logical Tree </a>or in a map, right-click the desired disarmed area ( ■ ” ) and click</p>
<p><strong>S3</strong></p>
<p><strong>Force Arm</strong>. The icon for an armed area ( ■<sup>L</sup> ’ ) is displayed.</p>
<p><strong>Note: </strong>The context menus for arming and disarming are not available when the state of the device is unknown.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="75" height="75" class="wp-image-2938" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-149.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 149" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 417"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="75" height="75" class="wp-image-2939" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-150.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 150" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 418"></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>15</strong></td>
<td><a id="post-2789-bookmark329"></a><strong>Controlling access control functions</strong></p>
<p>You can control several access control functions from within the Operator Client.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark297"><em> Handling events and alarms, page 98</em></a></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>15.1</strong></td>
<td><strong>Granting and denying access</strong></p>
<p>Main window</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>Only <strong>Access requested </strong>alarms with high priority will automatically pop-up in the image window.</p>
<p><strong>To grant or deny access:</strong></p>
<p>Click to accept the <strong>Access requested </strong>alarm.</p>
<p>An alarm-timer is now running, that shows how much time is left.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>4 </strong>Click</td>
<td>— to grant access.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Or</p>
<p>fiflK</p>
<p>click —■ to deny access.</p>
<p><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>Once the timer has run out, the system will automatically deny access for this specific request.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>15.2</strong></td>
<td><strong>Operating doors</strong></p>
<p>Main window</p>
<p>You can control the following access control door states from within the Operator Client: &#8211; Secure a door.</p>
<ul>
<li>Lock a door.</li>
<li>Unlock a door.</li>
</ul>
<p>The system administrator can limit the permission of these functions to specific user groups. To secure a door means that an authorized person can open the door using, for example, a card.</p>
<p>To lock a door means that nobody can open the door, even not authorized persons.</p>
<p>To unlock a door means that the door is open for anybody. You can lock or secure an unlocked door.</p>
<p><strong>To operate:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Right-click a door in the Logical Tree or in a map and click the required command.</p>
<p>The following commands are available:</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Lock door / Unlock door</strong></li>
<li><strong>Secure door</strong></li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Note: </strong>The context menus for operating a door are not available when the state of this door is unknown.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>16</strong></td>
<td><strong>Using a CCTV keyboard</strong></p>
<p>This chapter describes how to use BVMS Operator Client with a Bosch IntuiKey keyboard or a KBD Universal XF keyboard.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>16.1</strong></td>
<td><strong>Using KBD Universal XF keyboard</strong></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="75" height="75" class="wp-image-2940" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-151.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 151" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 419"><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>16.1.1</p>
<p>Refer to the Instructions Manual delivered with your KBD-Universal XF keyboard available on the online product catalog.</p>
<p>You can use the KBD-Universal XF keyboard as a USB keyboard for BVMS.</p>
<p>Attach the keyboard template for BVMS to the keyboard before use.</p>
<p>You can configure the keyboard for use by a left-handed operator. Refer to the Instructions Manual delivered with the KBD Universal XF keyboard.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark335"></a> KBD Universal XF keyboard user interface</p>
<p>The following table lists the icons on the keyboard template and their respective function.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Icon</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>I®</td>
<td></td>
<td>Trigger a user event, only available with single Management Server</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>!■&lt;</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td>Audio on / off</p>
<p>Blinking indicates that the function is enabled.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>•</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td>Start /stop alarm recording</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>ta</td>
<td></td>
<td>Toggle between Live Mode and Playback Mode Blinking indicates that the function is enabled.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>J</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td>Toggle selected<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane </a>between Live Mode and instant playback. Blinking indicates that the function is enabled.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>Load a sequence. Enter a valid sequence number and confirm with <strong>OK</strong>.</p>
<p>Use the playback buttons for controlling the sequence.</p>
<p>Blinking indicates that the input of a number is required.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>EE</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td>Reduce number of Image panes</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>Increase number of Image panes</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>Ld</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td>Full-screen on / off</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><em>jsf</em></td>
<td></td>
<td>Maximize / restore selected Image pane</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>ESC</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td>Breaks the entering of a number.</p>
<p>Press twice to close selected Image pane.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td colspan="3"><strong>Icon</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3"><strong>OK</strong></td>
<td>Confirm a number entry.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td>PTZ mode on/off.</p>
<p>Blinking indicates that the function is enabled.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td>Select a PTZ position. Enter a valid number of a preset and confirm with <strong>OK</strong>.</p>
<p>Blinking indicates that the input of a number is required.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td>Focus far</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"><strong>$</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td>Focus near</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>!</strong></td>
<td><em>&lt;¡£9</em></td>
<td></td>
<td rowspan="2">Iris closed</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"><strong>Ö</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td rowspan="2">Iris open</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>I</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td rowspan="2">Analog monitor mode on /off. Enter a valid monitor number, press <strong>OK</strong>, enter a valid camera number and press <strong>OK</strong>.</p>
<p>Blinking indicates that the input of a number is required.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>y</td>
<td></td>
<td>Set the default Management Server, only available when you log on to Operator Client as a user of an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark455"> Enterprise User Group</a>. Enter a valid server number and confirm with <strong>OK</strong>.</p>
<p>Blinking indicates that the input of a number is required.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"><strong>◄◄</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td>Fast backward (stepwise)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"><strong>◄</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td>Play backward</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"><strong>II</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td>Pause</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"><strong>►</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td>Play</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"><strong>►&gt;</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td>Fast forward (stepwise)</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>When a button is not illuminated, it does not have any function. All illuminated buttons have a function.</p>
<p>When a button is blinking, its function is active, for example Playback button is blinking means that the Playback Mode is active. Press the button to toggle to the other state, for example pressing the blinking Playback button switches to Live Mode.</p>
<p>Enter a number and confirm with OK to display the respective camera in the selected Image pane.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark338"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark339"></a> 16.2 Bosch IntuiKey keyboard user interface</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="75" height="75" class="wp-image-2941" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-152.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 152" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 420"><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>Every input on the keyboard is cleared after some seconds if no further input is made.</p>
<p>This chapter describes the user interface of the Bosch IntuiKey keyboard.</p>
<p>The following illustration shows the various interface elements of the keyboard:</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="573" height="447" class="wp-image-2942" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-153.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 153" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 421" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-153.jpeg 573w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-153-300x234.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 573px) 100vw, 573px" /></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>1</strong></td>
<td>Softkeys and softkey display</td>
<td>Allow you to use a fixed set of commands or to control the Logical Tree. The commands displayed in the softkey display change depending on the operation mode.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>2</strong></td>
<td>Status display</td>
<td>Changes dynamically and displays information on the current operation mode.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>3</strong></td>
<td>Function keys</td>
<td>Allow you to control certain functions directly. Prod: Starts a scan process to find the connected workstation. If scanning is successful: In the softkey display, Terminal and Keyboard Control menus are displayed. For selecting BVMS, press the Terminal softkey.</p>
<p>Mon: Allows you to enter a monitor number (digital or analog monitor).</p>
<p>Clr: Clears any numeric entry or has a Back­function.</p>
<p>■■<sup>4</sup>-&#8220;<sup>&lt;</sup>-’: Currently not supported.</p>
<p>Shot: Allows you to select a camera pre-position or to leave Selection mode.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>4</strong></td>
<td>Numeric keypad with ENTER key</td>
<td>Allows you to enter logical numbers. The number is displayed in the status display.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>1</strong></td>
<td>Monitor</td>
<td>Displays the selected analog monitor or Image pane number.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>2</strong></td>
<td>Camera</td>
<td>Displays the selected camera number.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>3</strong></td>
<td>Server</td>
<td>Displays the server number of the Management Server where the currently selected camera is configured.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>4</strong></td>
<td>Default Server</td>
<td>Displays the server number of the Management Server of an Enterprise System that the keyboard uses as default server. The Logical Tree of this server is displayed in the Tree Mode.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>5</strong></td>
<td><a href="#post-2789-bookmark482">PTZ </a>/ JOGSHUTTLE</td>
<td>Displays the current operation mode.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>6</strong></td>
<td>D1</td>
<td>Displays the selected computer monitor number.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>7</strong></td>
<td>A0</td>
<td>Displays the selected analog monitor number.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="545" height="371" class="wp-image-2943" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-154.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 154" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 422" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-154.jpeg 545w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-154-300x204.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 545px) 100vw, 545px" /><a id="post-2789-bookmark341"></a> Using a Bosch IntuiKey keyboard connected to a workstation</p>
<p>16.2.1</p>
<table>
<thead>
<tr>
<th></th>
<th></th>
<th>Unless preceded by pressing the Mon or Shot key, a numeric entry is interpreted as a logical camera number. The camera with the entered number is displayed in an Image pane or an analog monitor.</th>
</tr>
</thead>
</table>
<p>Status display</p>
<p>The status display changes dynamically to display information about the keyboard’s present mode of operation.</p>
<p>The following illustration shows the various elements of the status display:</p>
<p>16.3</p>
<p>A keyboard connected to a BVMS workstation offers a wide variety of features. Both the analog and the digital mode are available.</p>
<p>If the keyboard is connected to a decoder, the feature set is reduced. Only the analog mode is available.</p>
<p>When connected to a workstation that is using an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark454"> Enterprise System</a>, you must first select the desired<a href="#post-2789-bookmark473"> Management Server</a> and then the camera configured on this Management Server.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark338"><em> Bosch IntuiKey keyboard user interface, page 111</em></a></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2789-bookmark344"></a> Starting the IntuiKey keyboard</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>The keyboard must be connected to a COM port of a workstation.</p>
<ol>
<li>Start the Operator Client on the workstation.</li>
<li>Press the Prod button.</li>
</ol>
<p>The keyboard scans for connected devices.</p>
<ol>
<li>Press the Terminal softkey.</li>
</ol>
<p>The Selection Mode is displayed.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark346"></a> 16.3.2 Entering operation modes</p>
<p>You can use the keyboard in the following modes:</p>
<ul>
<li>Selection Mode</li>
</ul>
<p>This mode allows you to select an Image pane by moving the joystick in the desired direction.</p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark482">PTZ </a>Mode</li>
</ul>
<p>This mode allows you to control fixed and PTZ cameras, maps, and documents in Live Mode.</p>
<ul>
<li>Jogshuttle Mode</li>
</ul>
<p>This mode allows you to control cameras in instant playback or in Playback Mode.</p>
<p><strong>To enter Selection Mode:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Start the Operator Client and the keyboard. or</li>
<li>Press ENTER to leave PTZ or Jogshuttle Mode and to return to Selection Mode.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>To enter PTZ Mode:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Select a PTZ camera.</li>
<li>Press Shot.</li>
</ol>
<p>To start a preposition, press Shot again, press the number of a preposition, and press ENTER.</p>
<p><strong>To enter Jogshuttle Mode:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Start Playback Mode.</li>
<li>Press Shot.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>To leave PTZ or Jogshuttle Mode:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Press ENTER to leave PTZ or Jogshuttle Mode and start Selection Mode again.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark348"></a> 16.3.3 Displaying cameras</p>
<p>Enter a numeric command to display the camera with this logical number in the active<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image</a> <a href="#post-2789-bookmark461">pane </a>or analog monitor.</p>
<p>To display cameras of an Enterprise System, select the Management Server where these cameras are configured.</p>
<p><strong>Toggling between analog mode and workstation mode</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Press Mon twice.</p>
<p><strong>Displaying a camera in a computer monitor</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Switch to a digital mode.</li>
<li>Press Mon, press 1 &#8211; 4 to select the desired workstation monitor, press the number of the desired Image pane and press ENTER.</li>
</ol>
<p>The numbering of Image panes is from left to right and top to bottom.</p>
<ol>
<li>Press the desired number of the camera and press ENTER.</li>
</ol>
<p>The desired camera is displayed.</p>
<p>Example: Press Mon, 412, and ENTER. Then press 7 and ENTER. Camera 7 is displayed on the 12th Image pane on workstation monitor 4.</p>
<p><strong>Selecting a Management Server of an Enterprise System:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Press NEXT.</li>
<li>Press the softkey and enter the server number.</li>
</ol>
<p>The server number is configured in Configuration Client in the <strong>Server Number </strong>list. When you now enter the logical number of a camera, a camera configured on this Management Server is displayed.</p>
<p><strong>Displaying a camera in an analog monitor</strong></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>1.</p>
<p>2.</td>
<td>Switch to analog mode.</p>
<p>Press Mon, press the number of the desired monitor, and press ENTER.</p>
<p>Monitor numbers are configured in the Configuration Client.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>3.</td>
<td>Press the desired number of the camera and press ENTER.</p>
<p>The desired camera is displayed.</p>
<p>Example: Press Mon, 3, and ENTER. Then press 4 and ENTER. Camera 4 is displayed in the 3rd analog monitor.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="75" height="75" class="wp-image-2944" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-155.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 155" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 423"><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>When you call up a<a href="#post-2789-bookmark482"> PTZ </a>camera by a numeric command, the system automatically enters PTZ mode.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>16.3.4</strong></td>
<td><strong>Using the joystick of IntuiKey keyboard</strong></p>
<p>In Selection Mode, the joystick allows you to use the following features:</p>
<ul>
<li>Tilt the joystick to select an Image pane.</li>
</ul>
<p>In PTZ Mode, the joystick allows you to use the following features:</p>
<ul>
<li>Twist the joystick to zoom in and out.</li>
<li>Tilt the joystick to pan and tilt a PTZ camera.</li>
<li>Use Focus and Iris buttons for a PTZ camera.</li>
</ul>
<p>In Jogshuttle Mode, twist the joystick to use the following features:</p>
<ul>
<li>Play forward/backward as long as you twist.</li>
<li>Change the playback speed: Speed depends on the degree of rotation.</li>
<li>Stop a video when playing.</li>
</ul>
<p>In Jogshuttle Mode, tilt the joystick to use the following features:</p>
<ul>
<li>Tilt up / down when video is stopped: Play forward / backward.</li>
<li>Tilt up / down when video is playing: Set the playback speed.</li>
<li>Tilt right / left: Pause and step forward / backward.</li>
</ul>
<p>In Jogshuttle Mode, the Focus and Iris buttons allow you to use the following feature:</p>
<ul>
<li>Press Focus or Iris to move the hairline in the Timeline forward or backward. Focus moves the hairline for a larger amount of time forward or backward, Iris moves the hairline for a smaller amount of time forward or backward.</li>
</ul>
<p><a href="#post-2789-bookmark480">Playback Mode </a>:</p>
<ul>
<li>To lock the system in the current playback speed, press the Shot button while twisting the joystick.</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>16.3.5</strong></td>
<td><strong>Using softkeys of IntuiKey keyboard</strong></p>
<p>The following operation modes are available:</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<ul>
<li>Tree Mode</li>
</ul>
<p>You use this operation mode to control devices that are available in the Logical Tree of the Operator Client.</p>
<ul>
<li>Command Mode</li>
</ul>
<p>You use this operation mode to send commands like switch to Playback Mode.</p>
<p><strong>To toggle between Tree Mode and Command Mode:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>In the Tree Mode: Press the left Level Up softkey as often as needed to display the root level and then press the Exit softkey to display the Command Mode.</li>
</ol>
<p>or</p>
<ol>
<li>In the Command Mode: Press the Tree Mode softkey.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>To use the Logical Tree mode:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Switch to the Tree Mode.</p>
<p>Right side of the softkey display:</p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Press a softkey to control the item (e.g. display a camera or switch a relay).</p>
<p>When you press a map or a folder (black background), it moves to the left side. The right side displays the its content.</p>
<p>Left side of the softkey display:</p>
<ol>
<li>Press a softkey on the left side to select a folder or a map and to display its content on the right side of the softkey display.</li>
</ol>
<p>To display a map, press the softkey once to mark it (with a rectangle) and press the softkey again to display it in the selected Image pane.</p>
<ol>
<li>Press Level Up to enter the next upper level of the Logical Tree.</li>
<li>Press UP to move the selection upward or DOWN to move downward.</li>
</ol>
<p>The following figures show an example of a Logical Tree and its representation on the softkey display of the keyboard.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="319" height="524" class="wp-image-2945" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-156.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 156" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 424" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-156.jpeg 319w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-156-183x300.jpeg 183w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 319px) 100vw, 319px" /> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="370" height="433" class="wp-image-2946" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-157.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 157" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 425" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-157.jpeg 370w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-157-256x300.jpeg 256w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 370px) 100vw, 370px" /></p>
<p><strong>To use the Command Mode:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Switch to the Command Mode.</li>
<li>Press a softkey to execute the desired command.</li>
</ol>
<p>The following commands are available:</p>
<p>: Load a sequence. In the <strong>Status Display</strong>, enter the sequence number.</p>
<p>/►: Sequence play, pause</p>
<p><strong>/ ^ </strong>: Sequence step forward / backward : Maximize / restore selected Image pane : Close selected Image pane : Toggle between Live Mode and Playback Mode : Toggle selected Image pane between Live Mode and instant playback</p>
<p>-: Show more Image pane rows / Show fewer Image pane rows</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="60" height="46" class="wp-image-2947" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-158.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 158" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 426"><strong>Note: </strong>You cannot display more Image pane rows than the configured maximum, which is set by a parameter in the BVMS Configuration Client.</p>
<p>/ <strong>REC: </strong>Start /stop alarm recording</p>
<p>: Audio on / off</p>
<p>NEXT: Switch to next page</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="39" height="37" class="wp-image-2948" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-159.png" alt="word image 2789 159" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 427"> : Trigger a user event (1-4), only available with single Management</p>
<p>Server</p>
<p>: Set the default Management Server, only available when you log on to Operator Client as a user of an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark455"> Enterprise User Group</a>.</p>
<p>: Image pane bars on / off</p>
<p>&#8211; Full-screen on / off</p>
<p>You cannot display more Image pane rows than the configured maximum, which set by a parameter</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>16.4</strong></td>
<td><strong>Using a Bosch IntuiKey keyboard connected to a decoder</strong></p>
<p>A keyboard connected to decoder gives you access to the Management Server without Operator Client software. Hence, you must log on. Only the analog mode is available.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>16.4.1</strong></td>
<td><strong>Starting the keyboard</strong></p>
<p>After starting the keyboard you must log on to the Management Server.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="75" height="75" class="wp-image-2949" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-160.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 160" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 428"><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>Only BVMS users with number-only user names and number-only passwords can use the analog mode of a Bosch IntuiKey keyboard.</p>
<p>The user must have access rights for the decoder connected to the Bosch IntuiKey keyboard.</p>
<p><strong>To start the keyboard:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Press the Terminal softkey.</p>
<p>The following logon display is shown:</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="327" height="517" class="wp-image-2950" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-161.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 161" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 429" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-161.jpeg 327w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-161-190x300.jpeg 190w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 327px) 100vw, 327px" /> After successful logon, the Terminal and Keyboard Control softkeys are displayed in the softkey display.</p>
<p>16.4.2</p>
<p>16.4.3</p>
<p>16.4.4</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark357"></a> Displaying cameras</p>
<ol>
<li>Press Mon, press the number of the desired monitor, and press ENTER.</li>
</ol>
<p>Monitor numbers are configured in the Configuration Client.</p>
<ol>
<li>Press the desired number of the camera and press ENTER.</li>
</ol>
<p>The desired camera is displayed.</p>
<p>Example: Press Mon, 3, and ENTER. Then press 4 and ENTER. Camera 4 is displayed in the 3rd analog monitor.</p>
<p>When the selected monitor displays a<a href="#post-2789-bookmark482"> PTZ </a>camera, the keyboard switches to PTZ mode automatically.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark359"></a> Using the joystick</p>
<p>The joystick allows you to use the following features:</p>
<ul>
<li>Twist the joystick to zoom in and out.</li>
<li>Tilt the joystick to pan and tilt a<a href="#post-2789-bookmark482"> PTZ </a>camera.</li>
<li>Use Focus and Iris buttons for a PTZ camera.</li>
</ul>
<p>Using softkeys</p>
<p>The following operation mode is available:</p>
<ul>
<li>Command Mode</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>To use the Command Mode:</strong></p>
<p><strong>4 </strong>Press a softkey to execute the desired command.</p>
<p>The following commands are available:</p>
<ul>
<li>Start /stop alarm recording</li>
<li>Log off</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark362"></a> 17 User interface</p>
<p>This chapter contains information on all windows available in Operator Client of BVMS.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="75" height="75" class="wp-image-2951" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-162.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 162" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 430"><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>This document describes some functions that are not available for BVMS Viewer.</p>
<p>For detailed information about the different BVMS editions refer to <a href="https://www.boschsecurity.com/xc/en/solutions/management-software/bvms/" rel="nofollow noopener" target="_blank">www.boschsecurity.com</a> and the BVMS Quick Selection Guide:<a href="https://media.boschsecurity.com/fs/media/en/pb/images/products/management_software/bvms/bvms_quick-selection-guide.pdf" rel="nofollow noopener" target="_blank"> BVMS Quick Selection Guide</a>.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark364"><em>Live Mode, page 118</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark369"><em>Playback Mode, page 120</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark372"><em>Alarm display, page 123</em></a></li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark364"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark365"></a> 17.1 Live Mode</p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p>You automatically access Live Mode every time you log on.</p>
<p>Allows you to move, resize, or hide all control elements as required.</p>
<p>You can right-click to display the context menu.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="73" height="73" class="wp-image-2952" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-163.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 163" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 431"> If an incoming alarm has a lower priority than the currently displayed<a href="#post-2789-bookmark463"> image window</a>, the tab starts blinking and indicates an alarm.</p>
<p>If an incoming alarm has a higher priority than the currently displayed image window, the incoming alarm displays automatically (automatic pop-up alarm).</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1043" height="588" class="wp-image-2953" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-164.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 164" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 432" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-164.jpeg 1043w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-164-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-164-1024x577.jpeg 1024w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-164-768x433.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 1043px) 100vw, 1043px" /></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2"></td>
<td><strong>1</strong></td>
<td>Menu bar</td>
<td>Allows you to select a menu command.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>2</strong></td>
<td>Toolbar</td>
<td>Displays the available buttons. Point to an icon to display a tooltip.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>3</strong></td>
<td>Playback controls</td>
<td>Allows you to control instant playback or a camera sequence or alarm sequence.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>4</strong></td>
<td>Performance meter</td>
<td>Displays the CPU usage.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>5</strong></td>
<td>Time zone selector</td>
<td>Select an entry for the time zone to be displayed in most time related fields.</p>
<p>Only available if at least one Management Server or unmanaged site in the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark472"> Logical Tree </a>is located in another time zone as your Operator Client.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>6</strong></td>
<td>Controls for Image panes</td>
<td>Allows you to select the required number of<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image</a> <a href="#post-2789-bookmark461">panes </a>and to close all Image panes.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>7</strong></td>
<td>Image window</td>
<td>Displays the Image panes. Allows you to arrange the Image panes.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>8</strong></td>
<td>Image pane</td>
<td>Displays a camera, a map, an image, a document (HTML file).</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>9</strong></td>
<td><strong>L&#8217; t <sub>d </sub>Alarm List </strong>window</td>
<td>Displays all alarms that the system generates.</p>
<p>Allows you to accept or clear an alarm or to start a workflow, for example, by sending an E-mail to a maintenance person.</p>
<p>The Alarm List is not being displayed, when the connection to the Management Server is lost.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>10</strong></td>
<td><strong>PTZ Control </strong>window</td>
<td>Allows you to control a<a href="#post-2789-bookmark482"> PTZ </a>camera.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>11</strong></td>
<td><strong>Logical tree </strong>window</td>
<td>Displays the devices your user group has access to. Allows you to select a device for assigning it to an Image pane.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Favorites Tree </strong>window</td>
<td>Allows you to organize the devices of the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark472"> Logical Tree</a> as required.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Bookmarks </strong>window</td>
<td>Allows to manage<a href="#post-2789-bookmark442"> bookmarks</a>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>o</p>
<p><strong>Map </strong>window</td>
<td>Displays a site map. Allows you to drag the map to display a particular section of the map.</p>
<p>If activated, a map is displayed automatically for each camera displayed in an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane</a>. In this case, the camera must be configured on a map.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark382"><em>Menu commands, page 131</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark395"><em>Logical Tree window, page 136</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark397"><em>Favorites Tree window, page 137</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark415"><em>PTZ Control window, page 140</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark402"><em>Image window, page 138</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark405"><em>Image pane, page 139</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark316"><em>Alarm List window, page 102</em></a></li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark369"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark370"></a> Playback Mode</p>
<p>17.2</p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p>You can right-click to display the context menu.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="73" height="73" class="wp-image-2954" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-165.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 165" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 433"> If an incoming alarm has a lower priority than the currently displayed<a href="#post-2789-bookmark463"> image window</a>, the</p>
<p>tab starts blinking and indicates an alarm. If the incoming alarm has a higher priority than the live or playback<a href="#post-2789-bookmark463"> image window</a>, the alarm image window is displayed automatically. The priorities are configured in the Configuration Client.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1043" height="587" class="wp-image-2955" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-166.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 166" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 434" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-166.jpeg 1043w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-166-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-166-1024x576.jpeg 1024w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-166-768x432.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 1043px) 100vw, 1043px" /></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>1</strong></td>
<td>Menu bar</td>
<td>Allows you to select a menu command.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>2</strong></td>
<td>Toolbar</td>
<td>Displays the available buttons. Point to an icon to display a tooltip.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>3</strong></td>
<td>Performance</p>
<p>meter</td>
<td>Displays the CPU usage and the memory usage.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>4</strong></td>
<td>Time zone selector</td>
<td>Select an entry for the time zone to be displayed in most time related fields.</p>
<p>Only available if at least one Management Server or unmanaged site in the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark472"> Logical Tree </a>is located in another time zone as your Operator Client.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>5</strong></td>
<td>Controls for Image panes</td>
<td>Allows you to select the required number of<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image panes </a>and to close all Image panes.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>6</strong></td>
<td>Image window</td>
<td>Displays the Image panes. Allows you to arrange the Image panes.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>7</strong></td>
<td>Image pane</td>
<td>Displays a camera, a map, an image, a document (HTML file).</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>8</strong></td>
<td><strong>Alarm List</strong></p>
<p>window</td>
<td>Displays all alarms that the system generates.</p>
<p>Allows you to accept or clear an alarm or to start a workflow, for example, by sending an E-mail to a maintenance person.</p>
<p>The Alarm List is not being displayed, when the connection to the Management Server is lost.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Video</strong></p>
<p><strong>Search Results</strong></p>
<p>window</td>
<td>Displays recordings that match the video search criteria.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Forensic Search results </strong>window</td>
<td>Displays recordings that match the Forensic Search criteria.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>&#8216; Timeline </strong>window</td>
<td>Allows to you to navigate through the recorded videos.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>9</strong></td>
<td><strong>• PTZ</strong></p>
<p><strong>Control </strong>window</td>
<td>Allows you to control a<a href="#post-2789-bookmark482"> PTZ </a>camera.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>10</strong></td>
<td><strong>Device</strong></p>
<p><strong>Tree </strong>window</td>
<td>Displays the devices your user group has access to. Allows you to select a device for assigning it to an Image pane.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Favorites</strong></p>
<p><strong>Tree </strong>window</td>
<td>Allows you to organize the devices of the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark472"> Logical Tree </a>as required.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Map</strong></p>
<p>window</td>
<td>Displays a site map. Allows you to drag the map to display a particular section of the map.</p>
<p>If activated, a map is displayed automatically for each camera displayed in an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane</a>. In this case, the camera must be configured on a map.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Bookmarks tree </strong>window</td>
<td>Allows to manage<a href="#post-2789-bookmark442"> bookmarks</a>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>&#8216; &#8216; Exports</strong></p>
<p><strong>tree </strong>window</td>
<td>Allows you to load exported video data to display it or to search for particular data.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>CM</p>
<p>■* Forensic</p>
<p>Search window</td>
<td>Allows you to configure Forensic Search.</p>
<p>Forensic Search allows you to search for specific properties in the video of the selected image pane.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1043" height="559" class="wp-image-2956" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-167.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 167" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 435" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-167.jpeg 1043w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-167-300x161.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-167-1024x549.jpeg 1024w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-167-768x412.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 1043px) 100vw, 1043px" /> The threat level mode is indicated by a red line. The current threat level (for example <strong>Threat level 2</strong>) is displayed.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><em>Menu commands, page 131</em></li>
<li><em>Logical Tree window, page 136</em></li>
<li><em>Favorites Tree window, page 137</em></li>
<li><em>Exports window, page 140</em></li>
<li><em>Map window, page 140</em></li>
<li><em>PTZ Control window, page 140</em></li>
<li><em>Image window, page 138</em></li>
<li><em>Image pane, page 139</em></li>
<li><em>Timeline window, page 141</em></li>
<li><em>Forensic Search Results window, page 87</em></li>
<li><em>Video Search Results window, page 73</em></li>
<li><em>Alarm List window, page 102</em></li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark367"></a> 17.3 Threat level mode</p>
<p>S&#8221;</p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p>Or main window &gt;</p>
<p>When in threat level mode, depending on the user group, the user may have restricted permissions.</p>
<p><strong>Figure 17.1:</strong></p>
<p><strong>Threat level</strong></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>2</strong></td>
<td><strong>Reset</strong></td>
<td>The <strong>Reset </strong>button only displays if the user has the respective permission. Click to end the threat level mode.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark372"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark373"></a> Alarm display</p>
<p>17.4</p>
<p>Bi</p>
<p>Main window &gt; Select an alarm &gt; <strong>Accept</strong></p>
<p>&#8211; A V</p>
<p>Or main window &gt; &gt; tab &gt; Select an alarm &gt; <strong>Accept</strong></p>
<p>The<a href="#post-2789-bookmark435"> alarm image window</a> displays live or<a href="#post-2789-bookmark464"> instant playback</a> video from a camera, maps, documents or map viewports to be displayed in case of an alarm. The alarm image window is displayed automatically if the incoming alarm has a higher priority than the live or playback <a href="#post-2789-bookmark463">image window</a>. The priorities are configured in the Configuration Client.</p>
<p>If an incoming alarm has a lower priority than the currently displayed image window, the <em>&amp; </em>tab starts blinking and indicates an alarm.</p>
<p>If multi-row alarm is configured and when more alarms are displayed than alarm image rows are available, the display in the last row is sequenced. You can control the alarm sequence with the playback controls in the alarm image window toolbar. You cannot perform instant playback in the last row.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="75" height="75" class="wp-image-2957" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-168.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 168" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 436"><strong>Notice!</strong></p>
<p>A site map displayed in an alarm image pane is optimized for display and contains only the initial view of the original map file.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1043" height="588" class="wp-image-2959" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-169.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 169" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 437" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-169.jpeg 1043w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-169-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-169-1024x577.jpeg 1024w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-169-768x433.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 1043px) 100vw, 1043px" /></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>1</strong></td>
<td>Menu bar</td>
<td>Allows you to select a menu command.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>2</strong></td>
<td>Toolbar</td>
<td>Displays the available buttons. Point to an icon to display a tooltip.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>3</strong></td>
<td>Playback controls</td>
<td>Allows you to control instant playback or a camera sequence or alarm sequence.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>4</strong></td>
<td>Performance meter</td>
<td>Displays the CPU usage and the memory usage.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>5</strong></td>
<td>Time zone selector</td>
<td>Select an entry for the time zone to be displayed in most time related fields.</p>
<p>Only available if at least one Management Server unmanaged site in the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark472"> Logical Tree </a>is located in another time zone as your Operator Client.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>6</strong></td>
<td>Alarm Image window</td>
<td>Displays the Alarm Image panes.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>7</strong></td>
<td>Alarm Image pane</td>
<td>Displays a camera, a map, an image, a<a href="#post-2789-bookmark447"> document</a>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>8</strong></td>
<td>Alarm priority</td>
<td>Displays the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark437"> priority</a> value that was configured in the Configuration Client for the automatic display behavior.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>9</strong></td>
<td>Time</td>
<td>Displays the time when the alarm was triggered.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>10</strong></td>
<td>Alarm Sequence buttons</td>
<td>Click to display the previous or next Alarm Image pane.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>11</strong></td>
<td>Number of alarms</td>
<td>Displays the number of the currently displayed alarm and the number of all alarms.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>12</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td>Click to switch to multi-row alarm display.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Id</strong></td>
<td>Click to switch to single view alarm display.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>13</strong></td>
<td>A <strong>L&#8217; t &#8216; </strong>d</p>
<p><strong>Alarm List </strong>window</td>
<td>Displays all alarms the system generates.</p>
<p>Allows you to accept or clear an alarm or to start a workflow, for example, by sending an E-mail to a maintenance person.</p>
<p>The alarm list is not being displayed, when the connection to the Management Server is lost.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>14</strong></td>
<td><strong>Event Type</strong></td>
<td>Indicates the type of event that triggered the alarm.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>15</strong></td>
<td><strong>PTZ Control </strong>window</td>
<td>Allows you to control a<a href="#post-2789-bookmark482"> PTZ </a>camera.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>16</strong></td>
<td><strong>Logical Tree </strong>window</td>
<td>Displays the devices your user group has access to. Allows you to select a device for assigning it to an Image pane.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Favorites Tree </strong>window</td>
<td>Allows you to organize the devices of the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark472"> Logical</a> <a href="#post-2789-bookmark472">Tree </a>as required.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Bookmark </strong>window</td>
<td>Allows to manage<a href="#post-2789-bookmark442"> bookmarks</a>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Map </strong>window</td>
<td>Displays a site map. Allows you to drag the map to display a particular section of the map.</p>
<p>If activated, a map is displayed automatically for each camera displayed in an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane</a>. In this case, the camera must be configured on a map.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><em>S</em><em>witching alarm displays of alarm image window, page 100</em></li>
<li><em>Menu commands, page 131</em></li>
<li><em>Logical Tree window, page 136</em></li>
<li><em>Favorites Tree window, page 137</em></li>
<li><em>Map window, page 140</em></li>
<li><em>PTZ Control window, page 140</em></li>
<li><em>Image window, page 138</em></li>
<li><em>Image pane, page 139</em></li>
<li><em>Alarm List window, page 102</em></li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark376"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark377"></a> Map-based tracking assistant display</p>
<p>17.5</p>
<p>I</p>
<p>S«</p>
<ul>
<li>Select a camera image pane &gt; ■ ■ Map-based tracking assistant</li>
<li>Select a camera image pane &gt; ■■■&#8217;■ Map-based tracking assistant</li>
</ul>
<p>The Map-based tracking assistant helps you to track moving objects across multiple cameras. The respective cameras have to be configured on the global map. If an interesting moving object appears in live, playback, or in an alarm image pane, the user can start the Map-based tracking assistant that displays all nearby cameras automatically.</p>
<p>If a camera is in instant playback mode or in playback mode and you start the Map-based tracking assistant, only the cameras that support playback are available in the Map-based tracking assistant display.</p>
<p>If an incoming alarm has a lower priority than the currently displayed<a href="#post-2789-bookmark463"> image window</a>, the a*</p>
<p>tab starts blinking and indicates an alarm.</p>
<p>If an incoming alarm has a higher priority than the currently displayed image window, the incoming alarm displays automatically (automatic pop-up alarm).</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1042" height="494" class="wp-image-2960" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-170.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 170" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 438" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-170.jpeg 1042w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-170-300x142.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-170-1024x485.jpeg 1024w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-170-768x364.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 1042px) 100vw, 1042px" /></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>1</strong></td>
<td>¡to</p>
<p><em><s>M MM</s></em> Map-based tracking assistant</td>
<td>Click to start or stop the Map-based tracking assistant.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>2</strong></td>
<td>t</p>
<p><sup>v</sup> First person view</td>
<td>Click to start or stop First person view.</p>
<p>When you start the Map-based tracking assistant First person view is enabled by default.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong><em>3</em></strong></td>
<td><strong>$</strong></td>
<td>Click to align the global map to default north orientation.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>4</strong></td>
<td>ain camera</td>
<td>The main camera displays in the central image pane of the Map-based tracking assistant.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>5</strong></td>
<td>ain image pane</td>
<td>The central image pane displays the main camera image.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>6</strong></td>
<td>Neighbor camera</td>
<td>The neighbor cameras are indicated by Latin letters A-D. When first starting the Map-based tracking assistant, those letters also display for some seconds in the respective image panes.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>7</strong></td>
<td>Side image pane</td>
<td>The side image panes display the neighbor cameras, whose field of view overlap with the main cameras field of view or are closest by distance.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>8</strong></td>
<td><strong>F</strong></td>
<td>When you click a location on the global map, the</p>
<p><strong>F</strong></p>
<p>flag symbol displays for some seconds and</p>
<p>indicates the position.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark159"><em> Using the Map-based tracking assistant, page 59</em></a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>BVMS</td>
<td>User interface | en <strong>127</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>17.6</strong></td>
<td><a id="post-2789-bookmark380"></a><strong>Icons used</strong></p>
<p>The following table lists the icons used in Operator Client. For the icons used in the Timeline see chapter <a href="#post-2789-bookmark418"><em>Timeline window, page 141</em></a>.</p>
<p>Some of the following icons are not available in BVMS Export Player.</p>
<p><strong>Toolbar icons</strong></p>
<p><strong>S&#8221;</strong></p>
<p>: Live Mode</p>
<p><strong>!*►</strong></p>
<p>: Playback Mode</p>
<p>/ : Audio on / off</p>
<p>: Slider to adjust audio volume of all Image panes.</p>
<p>&#8230; <sub>D</sub>. „ &#8230;. .</p>
<p>: Click to disconnect all connected unmanaged sites. Partially connected sites are not disconnected.</p>
<p><strong>■ : </strong>Click to display / hide the toolbar of each Image pane.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>: Click to display the Image pane in full-screen mode.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>ft</p>
<p>: Click to display the <a href="#post-2789-bookmark435">Alarm Image window</a> (only available if alarms are pending).</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>: Click to display Live or Playback Mode again when the Alarm Image window is</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>displayed.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>® : </strong>Click to print an image of the selected Image pane.</p>
<p>: Click to save an image file of the selected<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane</a>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>: Click to add a Favorites <a href="#post-2789-bookmark497">View</a>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>[n]</strong></p>
<p>: Click to add a<a href="#post-2789-bookmark442"> bookmark</a>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>■</strong></p>
<p>: Click and hold to speak on the loudspeakers of an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark452"> encoder</a> with audio configured.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>The button is active when an encoder with audio function is selected in an Image pane.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>ftv</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><em>■■sc</em> Click to start/stop Map-based tracking assistant.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><sup>v</sup> : Click to start/stop First person view.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>XX</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>: Click to close all open<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image panes</a>. This icon has the same function as the shortcut for closing all Image panes.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>: Click to show fewer Image pane rows.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><sup>4 4 4 4 4</sup> : Slider to change Image pane rows.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>A</strong></p>
<p>: Click to show more Image pane rows.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>: Click to access help.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="51" class="wp-image-2961" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-171.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 171" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 439"></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="51" class="wp-image-2962" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-172.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 172" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 440"><strong>Logical tree icons</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="57" height="57" class="wp-image-2963" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-173.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 173" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 441"> : Operator Client is connected to a<a href="#post-2789-bookmark473"> Management Server</a>.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="52" height="52" class="wp-image-2964" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-174.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 174" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 442"> New configuration available. Log off and log on again to accept.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="52" height="52" class="wp-image-2965" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-175.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 175" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 443"> : This state icon displays when not all communication services can be connected by the Operator Client or when there are changes within the communication interface between the Operator Client and the Management Server.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="52" height="52" class="wp-image-2966" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-176.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 176" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 444"></p>
<p>: For more information see the tooltip.</p>
<p>: Multiple logon with the same user name is denied</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="51" class="wp-image-2967" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-177.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 177" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 445"></p>
<p>: State is unknown</p>
<p>.*: License not available</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="52" height="52" class="wp-image-2968" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-178.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 178" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 446"></p>
<p>: Not connected</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="52" height="51" class="wp-image-2969" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-179.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 179" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 447"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="51" class="wp-image-2970" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-180.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 180" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 448"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="51" class="wp-image-2971" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-181.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 181" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 449"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="51" class="wp-image-2972" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-182.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 182" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 450"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="51" class="wp-image-2973" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-183.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 183" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 451"></p>
<p>: Map viewport</p>
<p>: Fixed, DVR, local storage camera</p>
<p>: ONVIF fixed camera</p>
<p>: Management Server is located in another time zone.</p>
<p>: Folder containing various items</p>
<p>Folder containing various items and having assigned a map</p>
<p>: Panoramic camera</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="51" class="wp-image-2974" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-184.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 184" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 452"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="51" class="wp-image-2975" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-185.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 185" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 453"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="51" class="wp-image-2976" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-186.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 186" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 454"></p>
<p>: PTZ camera</p>
<p>: ONVIF PTZ camera</p>
<p>: Matrix camera</p>
<p>tD: <a href="#post-2789-bookmark496">vsg </a>camera</p>
<p><strong>rs«</strong></p>
<p>, for example : Recording</p>
<p>¿1, for example</p>
<p>: Connection lost</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="39" height="39" class="wp-image-2977" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-187.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 187" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 455"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="56" height="56" class="wp-image-2978" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-188.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 188" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 456"></p>
<p>, for example</p>
<p>: Video loss</p>
<p>, for example</p>
<p>: Bypassed</p>
<p>: Audio is configured</p>
<p>: State unknown</p>
<p>: Too bright</p>
<p>: Too dark</p>
<p>: Too noisy</p>
<p>□: Too blurry</p>
<p>Q: Global scene change</p>
<p><em>::</em>: Reference check failed</p>
<p>: Relay</p>
<p>/</p>
<p>: Inputs</p>
<p>: Command Script</p>
<p>: Document</p>
<p>: Camera sequence</p>
<p>: External application</p>
<p>:<a href="#post-2789-bookmark498"> Primary VRM</a></p>
<p>:<a href="#post-2789-bookmark458"> Primary Failover VRM</a></p>
<p>: Secondary Failover VRM</p>
<p>: Indicates a <a href="#post-2789-bookmark495">video analytics </a>device.</p>
<p>: Indicates</p>
<p>an</p>
<p><a href="#post-2789-bookmark492">unmanaged site </a>which is not connected.</p>
<p>: Indicates</p>
<p>an</p>
<p>unmanaged site in another time zone than the Operator Client computer.</p>
<p>^: Indicates</p>
<p>an</p>
<p>unmanaged site to which a connection is being established.</p>
<p>: Indicates</p>
<p>an</p>
<p>unmanaged site which is completely connected. This means that all</p>
<p>devices of this site are connected.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="56" height="41" class="wp-image-2979" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-189.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 189" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 457"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="56" height="56" class="wp-image-2980" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-190.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 190" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 458"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="51" class="wp-image-2981" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-191.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 191" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 459"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="52" height="52" class="wp-image-2982" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-192.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 192" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 460"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="39" height="39" class="wp-image-2983" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-193.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 193" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 461"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="39" height="39" class="wp-image-2984" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-194.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 194" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 462"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="56" height="41" class="wp-image-2985" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-195.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 195" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 463"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="56" height="41" class="wp-image-2986" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-196.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 196" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 464"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="56" height="41" class="wp-image-2987" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-197.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 197" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 465"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="39" height="39" class="wp-image-2988" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-198.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 198" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 466"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="56" height="56" class="wp-image-2989" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-199.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 199" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 467"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="51" class="wp-image-2990" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-200.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 200" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 468"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="51" class="wp-image-2991" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-201.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 201" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 469"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="51" class="wp-image-2992" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-202.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 202" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 470"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="51" class="wp-image-2993" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-203.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 203" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 471"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="51" class="wp-image-2994" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-204.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 204" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 472"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="51" class="wp-image-2995" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-205.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 205" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 473"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="57" height="57" class="wp-image-2996" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-206.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 206" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 474"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="52" class="wp-image-2997" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-207.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 207" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 475"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="51" class="wp-image-2998" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-208.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 208" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 476"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="51" class="wp-image-2999" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-209.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 209" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 477"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="52" height="52" class="wp-image-3000" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-210.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 210" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 478"></p>
<p>■i: Indicates an unmanaged site which is partially connected. This means that not all devices of this site are connected.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="51" class="wp-image-3001" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-211.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 211" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 479"></p>
<p>: Intrusion panel.</p>
<p>: <a href="#post-2789-bookmark440">Area </a>configured in an intrusion panel.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="52" height="52" class="wp-image-3002" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-212.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 212" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 480"></p>
<p>: Area is armed.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="52" height="52" class="wp-image-3003" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-213.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 213" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 481"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="52" height="52" class="wp-image-3004" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-214.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 214" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 482"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="52" height="52" class="wp-image-3005" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-215.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 215" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 483"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="51" class="wp-image-3006" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-216.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 216" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 484"></p>
<p>: Point is in the state<a href="#post-2789-bookmark443"> bypassed</a>.</p>
<p>: Point is in alarm state.</p>
<p>: Door (intrusion panel)</p>
<p>* : Area is disarmed.</p>
<p>:<a href="#post-2789-bookmark481"> Point </a>configured in an intrusion panel and in the state<a href="#post-2789-bookmark443"> unbypassed</a>.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="51" class="wp-image-3007" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-217.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 217" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 485"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="51" class="wp-image-3008" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-218.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 218" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 486"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="51" class="wp-image-3009" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-219.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 219" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 487"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="51" class="wp-image-3010" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-220.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 220" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 488"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="56" height="56" class="wp-image-3011" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-221.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 221" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 489"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="51" class="wp-image-3012" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-222.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 222" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 490"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="56" height="56" class="wp-image-3013" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-223.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 223" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 491"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="51" class="wp-image-3014" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-224.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 224" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 492"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="51" class="wp-image-3015" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-225.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 225" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 493"></p>
<p>: Door (intrusion panel)</p>
<p>: Door (intrusion panel)</p>
<p>: Door (intrusion panel)</p>
<p>: Reader (access control)</p>
<p>: Door (access control) is locked.</p>
<p>: Door (access control) is unlocked.</p>
<p>: Door (access control) is secured.</p>
<p>is secured.</p>
<p>is locked.</p>
<p>is unlocked.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="52" height="51" class="wp-image-3016" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-226.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 226" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 494"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="51" class="wp-image-3017" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-227.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 227" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 495"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="51" class="wp-image-3018" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-228.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 228" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 496"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="51" class="wp-image-3019" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-229.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 229" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 497"></p>
<p>: Camera sequence</p>
<p>: Camera sequence is interrupted.</p>
<p>: Camera sequence is playing.</p>
<p>: Door (access control) with unknown door states.</p>
<p><strong>Image pane toolbar icons</strong></p>
<p>D: Maximize image pane</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="55" height="41" class="wp-image-3020" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-230.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 230" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 498"></p>
<p>: Digital zoom</p>
<p>: Transcoding is enabled.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="56" height="41" class="wp-image-3021" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-231.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 231" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 499"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="56" height="41" class="wp-image-3022" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-232.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 232" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 500"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="56" height="41" class="wp-image-3023" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-233.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 233" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 501"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="56" height="41" class="wp-image-3024" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-234.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 234" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 502"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="56" height="41" class="wp-image-3025" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-235.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 235" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 503"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="56" height="41" class="wp-image-3026" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-236.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 236" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 504"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="56" height="41" class="wp-image-3027" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-237.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 237" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 505"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="56" height="41" class="wp-image-3028" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-238.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 238" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 506"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="56" height="41" class="wp-image-3029" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-239.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 239" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 507"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="56" height="41" class="wp-image-3030" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-240.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 240" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 508"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="51" class="wp-image-3031" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-241.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 241" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 509"> : Click to display live mode again.</p>
<p>: Indicates the source of the displayed recording: Primary <a href="#post-2789-bookmark498">VRM </a>recording. On the Image pane toolbar, click to change the recording source (only available, if<a href="#post-2789-bookmark486"> Secondary VRM </a>or <a href="#post-2789-bookmark439">ANR </a>is configured).</p>
<p>: Indicates the source of the displayed recording:<a href="#post-2789-bookmark486"> Secondary VRM </a>recording. On the Image pane toolbar, click to change the recording source.</p>
<p>: Indicates that <a href="#post-2789-bookmark439">ANR </a>provides playback. On the Image pane toolbar, click to change the recording source.</p>
<p>: Indicates that the Primary<a href="#post-2789-bookmark458"> Failover VRM </a>provides playback. On the Image pane toolbar, click to change the recording source (only available, if<a href="#post-2789-bookmark486"> Secondary VRM </a>or <a href="#post-2789-bookmark439">ANR </a>is configured).</p>
<p>: Indicates that the Secondary<a href="#post-2789-bookmark458"> Failover VRM </a>provides playback. On the Image pane toolbar, click to change the recording source.</p>
<p>: Indicates that the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark452"> Encoder</a> provides playback. On the Image pane toolbar, click to change the recording source (only available, if<a href="#post-2789-bookmark486"> Secondary VRM </a>or <a href="#post-2789-bookmark439">ANR </a>is configured).</p>
<p>: Indicates that the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark452"> Encoder</a> provides playback. On the Image pane toolbar, click to change the recording source.</p>
<p>: Text data available</p>
<p>: Text data not available</p>
<p>: Instant playback</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="54" height="97" class="wp-image-3032" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-242.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 242" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 510"> : Manual alarm recording</p>
<p><strong>Image pane icons</strong></p>
<p>: I-frame only playback</p>
<p>: Enabled content analysis</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark418"><em> Timeline window, page 141</em></a></p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark382"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark383"></a> Menu commands</p>
<p>17.7</p>
<p>Some of the following commands are not available in BVMS Export Player.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"><strong>System </strong>menu commands</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Playback mode </strong>/ <strong>Live mode</strong></td>
<td>Switches to Playback or Live Mode depending on the current state.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Change password&#8230;</strong></td>
<td>Displays a dialog box for entering a new password.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Logoff</strong></td>
<td>Exits the program and displays the dialog box for logging on.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Exit</strong></td>
<td>Exits the program.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3"><strong>Camera </strong>menu commands</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Save image&#8230;</strong></td>
<td>Displays a dialog box for saving an image of the selected image pane.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Print image&#8230;</strong></td>
<td>Displays a dialog box for printing an image of the selected image pane.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Audio on </strong>/ <strong>Audio off</strong></td>
<td>Turns audio of the selected camera on or off.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Record Camera</strong></td>
<td>Starts recording of the selected camera. The Alarm recording Mode quality level is used.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Instant Playback</strong></td>
<td>Starts playback of the selected camera for the configured rewind time. (Not in Playback Mode)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Reference Image&#8230;</strong></td>
<td>Displays the <strong>Reference Image </strong>dialog box for the currently selected Image pane. (Not in Playback Mode)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Close</strong></td>
<td>Closes the selected Image pane.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3"><strong>Tools </strong>menu commands</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Find in logbook&#8230;</strong></td>
<td>Displays the <strong>Select Search Parameters </strong>and the <strong>Logbook results: </strong>dialog box.</p>
<p>When you logged on as a user of an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark455"> Enterprise</a> <a href="#post-2789-bookmark455">User Group</a>, the <strong>Please select a Server </strong>dialog box is displayed.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>Displays the <strong>Logbook entries for erasing text data </strong>and the <strong>Select search parameters for erasing text data </strong>dialog box.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Erase text data from logbook&#8230;</strong></td>
<td>Displays the <strong>Select search parameters for erasing text data </strong>dialog box.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Toggle Image pane bars</strong></td>
<td>Hides or displays the Image pane bars.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Show fewer Image pane rows</strong></td>
<td>Decreases the number of Image pane rows displayed in the Image window.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Show more Image pane rows</strong></td>
<td>Increases the number of Image pane rows displayed in the Image window.</p>
<p><strong>Note:</strong></p>
<p>You cannot display more Image pane rows than the configured maximum, which is set by a parameter in the BVMS Configuration Client.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3"><strong>Timeline </strong>menu commands (Playback Mode only)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>First recording</strong></td>
<td>Moves the hairline to the oldest recording.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Last recording</strong></td>
<td>Moves the hairline to the latest recording.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Play</strong></td>
<td>Plays forward starting from the current position of the hairline.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Pause</strong></td>
<td>Stops playback at the current position. Click <strong>Play </strong>to resume.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Reverse play</strong></td>
<td>Plays backward from the current position of the hairline.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Protect video&#8230;</strong></td>
<td>Displays the <strong>Protect Video </strong>dialog box.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Unprotect video&#8230;</strong></td>
<td>Displays the <strong>Unprotect video </strong>dialog box.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Restrict video&#8230;</strong></td>
<td>Displays the <strong>Restrict Video </strong>dialog box.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Unrestrict video&#8230;</strong></td>
<td>Displays the <strong>Unrestrict video </strong>dialog box.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Delete video&#8230;</strong></td>
<td>Displays the <strong>Delete Video </strong>dialog box.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Verify authenticity&#8230;</strong></td>
<td>Displays the <strong>Verify Authenticity </strong>dialog box.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Export video&#8230;</strong></td>
<td>Displays the <strong>Export Video </strong>dialog box.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Load exported video&#8230;</strong></td>
<td>Displays a dialog box for selecting an export file.</p>
<p>The exported file is then displayed in the <strong>Exports </strong>Tree.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3"><strong>Alarms </strong>menu commands</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Accept Selected Alarms</strong></td>
<td>Sets all selected alarms to the alarm state <strong>Accepted </strong>and displays them in the Alarm Image window.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Accept All New Alarms</strong></td>
<td>Sets all new alarms to the alarm state <strong>Accepted</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Clear all accepted alarms</strong></td>
<td>Sets all accepted alarms to the alarm state <strong>Cleared</strong>. The entry is removed from the <strong>Alarm List </strong>and from the Alarm Image window.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Clear Selected Alarms</strong></td>
<td>Sets all selected alarms to the alarm state <strong>Cleared</strong>. The entry is removed from the <strong>Alarm List </strong>and from the Alarm Image window.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Workflow&#8230;</strong></td>
<td>Displays the action plan for the selected alarm if available.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3"><strong>Extras </strong>menu commands</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Add favorite</strong></td>
<td>Saves the current Image pane pattern as a View in the <strong>Favorites Tree</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Add bookmark</strong></td>
<td>Displays the <strong>Add Bookmark </strong>dialog box.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Mute System</strong></td>
<td>Turns off audio of the available Image panes and the alarm sound.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Options&#8230;</strong></td>
<td>Displays the <strong>Options </strong>dialog box.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Restore </strong>&gt; <strong>Default settings</strong></td>
<td>Restores the settings for monitor layout, user interface and options to the factory default settings.</p>
<p><strong>Note:</strong></p>
<p>This option considers the configured maximum number of Image pane rows displayed in the Image window.</p>
<p>The default number of Image pane rows is restored only if it does not exceed the configured maximum, which is set by a parameter in the BVMS Configuration Client.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Restore </strong>&gt; <strong>Last settings</strong></td>
<td>Restores the settings for monitor layout, user interface and options to the last loaded settings.</p>
<p><strong>Note:</strong></p>
<p>This option considers the configured maximum number of Image pane rows displayed in the Image window.</p>
<p>The last loaded number of Image pane rows is restored only if it does not exceed the configured maximum, which is set by a parameter in the BVMS Configuration Client.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3"><strong>Help </strong>menu commands</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Display help</strong></td>
<td>Displays the BVMS Online Help.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>About&#8230;</strong></td>
<td>Displays a dialog box containing information on the installed system, for example the version number.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark385"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark386"></a> 17.8 Options dialog box</p>
<p>Main window &gt; <strong>Extras </strong>menu &gt; <strong>Options&#8230; </strong>command</p>
<p>Allows you to configure parameters for using Operator Client.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark285"><em> Displaying video via low bandwidth, page 94</em></a></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2789-bookmark388"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark389"></a> Control tab</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Control tab</strong></p>
<p><strong>Dwell time for automatic sequences [s]</strong></p>
<p>Enter the required number of seconds a camera is to be displayed in an Image pane. This time is also valid for alarm sequences.</p>
<p><strong>PTZ Control Speed</strong></p>
<p>Move the slider to adjust the control speed for<a href="#post-2789-bookmark482"> PTZ </a>cameras.</p>
<p><strong>Rewind time of instant playback [s]</strong></p>
<p>Enter the amount of seconds for the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark484"> rewind time </a>of<a href="#post-2789-bookmark464"> instant playback</a>.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Display the map containing the camera of the selected Image pane</strong></p>
<p>Click to activate that the map of the camera in the selected<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane </a>is getting the focus.</p>
<p>The map is displayed in the <strong>Map </strong>window of the <strong>Control </strong>monitor. If the selected camera is not configured on any map, the <strong>Map </strong>window is cleared.</p>
<p>The displayed map is the first found map in the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark472"> Logical Tree </a>beginning from the root item, that contains the selected camera.</p>
<p>If a<a href="#post-2789-bookmark444"> camera sequence </a>is running within the selected Image pane, after each sequence step the map in the <strong>Map </strong>window is updated accordingly.</p>
<p><strong>Start PTZ mode when selecting PTZ Image pane with mouse</strong></p>
<p>Select to automatically active PTZ mode for Bosch IntuiKey keyboards for the following cases: &#8211; When the user clicks on an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane </a>displaying a PTZ camera.</p>
<p>&#8211; When the user drags a PTZ camera to an Image pane.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>17.8.2</strong></td>
<td><a id="post-2789-bookmark391"></a><strong>Display tab</strong></p>
<p><strong>Display tab</strong></p>
<p><strong>Image Pane Aspect Ratio</strong></p>
<p>For each connected monitor select the required aspect ratio for the Image panes in</p>
<p>Operator Client. Use 16:9 for HD cameras. This setting overrides the setting that was made in Configuration Client for the initial startup of Operator Client.</p>
<p><strong>Display Logical Number</strong></p>
<p>Select to display the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark471"> logical number</a> of a camera in the Logical Tree.</p>
<p><strong>IP address visible in print and save</strong></p>
<p>Select to make the IP addresses of devices in the Logical Tree available in printed or saved images.</p>
<p><strong>Text Data Position</strong></p>
<p>Select the desired option for the location of the text data pane when clicking on <strong><sup>=</sup> .</strong></p>
<p><strong>Prefer hardware acceleration</strong></p>
<p>After logon to Operator Client hardware acceleration is enabled by default.</p>
<p>To disable hardware acceleration, clear the check box.</p>
<p>This setting is retained after the next restart or re-logon of Operator Client.</p>
<p><strong>Show diagnostic information in Image panes (enable until logoff)</strong></p>
<p>Select to show decoding method in the Image pane.</p>
<p>The decoding method is displayed in the title bar of all open Image panes.</p>
<p>This setting is not persistent after the next restart or re-logon of Operator Client.</p>
<p><strong>Enable colored timeline</strong></p>
<p>Select to enable colored timeline for recordings. With colored timeline enabled, alarm recording, pre-alarm recording and motion recording are indicated by different colors.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark418"><em> Timeline window, page 141</em></a></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>17.8.3</strong></td>
<td><strong>Audio tab</strong></p>
<p><strong>Audio tab</strong></p>
<p><strong>Playback audio of the selected Image pane</strong></p>
<p>Select to activate audio playback for the video in the selected<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane</a>.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Multichannel audio playback</strong></p>
<p>Select to enable simultaneous audio playback for all videos displayed in the Image panes.</p>
<p><strong>Sound volume:</strong></p>
<p>Move the slider to adjust the sound volume of alarm sounds.</p>
<p><strong>Half Duplex</strong></p>
<p>Select to enable half<a href="#post-2789-bookmark449"> duplex</a> mode for the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark467"> Intercom functionality</a>.</p>
<p><strong>Full Duplex</strong></p>
<p>Select to enable full<a href="#post-2789-bookmark449"> duplex</a> mode for the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark467"> Intercom functionality</a>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>17.8.4</strong></td>
<td><strong>Transcoding tab</strong></p>
<p><strong>Transcoding tab</strong></p>
<p>You can play back the recordings of a camera or view live images of a camera with</p>
<p>Operator Client even if you have a low bandwidth network connection between BVMS and your Operator Client computer.</p>
<p>Transcoders do not support intelligent tracking,<a href="#post-2789-bookmark485"> ROI</a>,<a href="#post-2789-bookmark466"> Intelligent Video Analytics </a>overlays, and text data.</p>
<p>For using low bandwidth networks, 2 options are available:</p>
<ul>
<li>Hardware transcoding</li>
<li>Software transcoding (only available for Live Mode)</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Hardware transcoding</strong></p>
<p>For hardware transcoding the VRM must be equipped with at least one transcoding device. This transcoding device is not configured in BVMS. See the VRM documentation on how to configure a transcoding device. Transcoding devices can have multiple transcoding instances. DIVAR IP 3000 and DIVAR IP 7000 are delivered each with one preconfigured transcoding instance.</p>
<p>Each live stream or recording needs an own transcoding instance.</p>
<p>Hardware transcoding is possible only for Video IP devices from Bosch connected to a VRM. Both camera and transcoding device must be managed by the same VRM.</p>
<p><strong>Software transcoding</strong></p>
<p>For software transcoding you need a Mobile Video Service configured on your Management Server or your Enterprise Management Server.</p>
<p>In an Enterprise System only the MVS services are used that are configured in the Enterprise Management Server configuration.</p>
<p><strong>Hardware (default)</strong></p>
<p>Select to enable the hardware transcoder. This is the default setting.</p>
<p><strong>Software</strong></p>
<p>Select to enable the software transcoder.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>17.9</strong></td>
<td><a id="post-2789-bookmark395"></a><strong>Logical Tree window</strong></p>
<p><strong>S- &#8216;I:<sub>th</sub></strong></p>
<p>Main window &gt; &gt; tab</p>
<p>or</p>
<p><strong><sub>u</sub> &#8211; &#8220;H,<sub>h</sub></strong></p>
<p>Main window &gt; &gt; tab</p>
<p>Displays the hierarchical structure of all the devices your<a href="#post-2789-bookmark493"> user group </a>has access to.</p>
<p>If you logged on to an Enterprise Management Server, the server name is displayed as a prefix to the camera name.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Only an administrator can create or change the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark472"> Logical Tree </a>in the Configuration Client.</p>
<p>Allows you to drag an item to the following elements of the user interface:</p>
<ul>
<li>Camera, map, document to an<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane</a></li>
<li>Each item to the <strong>Favorites Tree </strong>window</li>
<li>Map to <strong>Map </strong>window</li>
<li>Camera to the <strong>Monitors </strong>window</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><em>Arranging and resizing Image panes, page 40</em></li>
<li><em>Displaying a camera in an Image pane, page 37</em></li>
<li><em>Adding items to the favorites tree, page 62</em></li>
<li><em>Starting a pre-configured camera sequence, page 41</em></li>
<li><em>Displaying video via low bandwidth, page 94</em></li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>17.10</strong></td>
<td><a id="post-2789-bookmark397"></a><strong>Favorites Tree window</strong></p>
<p><strong>S&#8217; Tr</strong></p>
<p>Main window &gt; &gt; tab</p>
<p>or</p>
<p>Main window &gt; &gt; tab</p>
<p>You can add every item of the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark472"> Logical Tree </a>to a <a href="#post-2789-bookmark497">view</a> in the Favorites Tree to create your own subset of the Logical Tree. At any time you can display the view or add or delete devices in a view.</p>
<p>When saving a view in the Favorites Tree, you save the following settings:</p>
<ul>
<li>The assignment of cameras or other objects to<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image panes</a></li>
<li>The<a href="#post-2789-bookmark462"> Image pane pattern</a></li>
<li>The current setting of the digital zoom</li>
<li>The image section</li>
<li>The selected stream (only available for Live Mode)</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark163"><em>Adding items to the favorites tree, page 62</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark166"><em>Creating/editing views, page 63</em></a></li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>17.11</strong></td>
<td><a id="post-2789-bookmark400"></a><strong>Bookmarks window</strong></p>
<p><strong>S&#8217; </strong>[h]</p>
<p>Main window &gt; &gt; tab</p>
<p>or</p>
<p>Main window &gt; &gt; tab</p>
<p>You can save a time period of live view or a recording in a<a href="#post-2789-bookmark442"> bookmark</a>. A bookmark saves a start and an end time, the cameras assigned to<a href="#post-2789-bookmark463"> Image window</a> at this time, and the entire<a href="#post-2789-bookmark462"> Image</a></p>
<p><a href="#post-2789-bookmark462">pane pattern</a>. A time period of 0 seconds is possible. Bookmarks are saved in the pane.</p>
<p>Deleting a bookmark does not affect the corresponding recordings. You cannot add or remove cameras from a bookmark. To change a bookmark, load it, make your changes and save it.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>If a recording is deleted, the corresponding bookmark is not synchronized. If loaded, a black <a href="#post-2789-bookmark461">Image pane </a>is displayed.</p>
<p>If you have logged on to an Enterprise Management Server, the camera name is displayed with the name of this camera’s Management Server as a prefix.</p>
<p><strong>Note: </strong>Do not add more than 4 cameras in one bookmark to avoid performance issues when loading the bookmark.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark173"><em>Editing a bookmark, page 66</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark176"><em>Loading a bookmark, page 66</em></a></li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark402"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark403"></a> 17.12 Image window</p>
<p>Main window</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1042" height="614" class="wp-image-3033" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-243.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 243" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 511" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-243.jpeg 1042w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-243-300x177.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-243-1024x603.jpeg 1024w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-243-768x453.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 1042px) 100vw, 1042px" /></p>
<p>Displays a variable number of<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane</a>s. Minimum is 1 Image pane. You can display one camera in several Image panes simultaneously.</p>
<p>Allows you to perform the following tasks (not all tasks are available in BVMS Export Player): &#8211; Changing the number of displayed Image panes.</p>
<ul>
<li>Arranging the Image panes with high flexibility, changing the pattern of the Image panes, and saving this arrangement as a <a href="#post-2789-bookmark497">View</a> in the <strong>Favorites Tree</strong>.</li>
<li>Toggling between Live Mode and Playback Mode (and alarm display if alarms are available).</li>
<li>Switching on/off all audio sources (application must be configured for multi-channel mode).</li>
<li>Starting a sequence.</li>
<li>Switching on/off the Image pane toolbars.</li>
<li>Performing<a href="#post-2789-bookmark464"> instant playback</a>.</li>
<li>Using<a href="#post-2789-bookmark467"> Intercom functionality</a>.</li>
</ul>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<p><em>&#8211;</em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark84"><em> Changing the number of Image pane rows, page 39</em></a></p>
<p><em>&#8211; </em><a href="#post-2789-bookmark87"><em>Arranging and resizing Image panes, page 40</em></a></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>17.13</strong></td>
<td><a id="post-2789-bookmark405"></a><strong>Image pane</strong></p>
<p>Main window</p>
<p>BVMS Export Player offers only a restricted feature set.</p>
<p>Allows you to display:</p>
<ul>
<li>Live video from any video source (Live Mode only)</li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark464">Instant playback</a> video</li>
<li>Recorded video (Playback Mode only)</li>
<li>Maps</li>
<li>Documents (HTML files)</li>
<li>Text data</li>
<li>Recording source</li>
</ul>
<p>A blue border indicates that this<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane </a>is selected, for example, for displaying a camera image in this Image pane.</p>
<p><strong>Note: </strong>The toolbar of an image pane is only displayed, if the image pane is selected.</p>
<p>If you log on to an Enterprise Management Server, the camera name with the name of this camera’s Management Server as a prefix is displayed in the image pane toolbar, if the image pane is selected.</p>
<p>Cameras in the map are displayed as<a href="#post-2789-bookmark460"> hot spots</a>. You can activate a camera in the map by double-clicking, context menu, or dragging and dropping to an Image pane.</p>
<p>When a<a href="#post-2789-bookmark482"> PTZ </a>camera is displayed, you can use in-window control function.</p>
<p>Double-click a camera in the<a href="#post-2789-bookmark472"> Logical Tree </a>to display it in the next free Image pane.</p>
<p>Right-click in the Image pane and click <strong>Properties </strong>to display the <strong>Properties: </strong>window. This window displays information on the camera.</p>
<p>The time display in the tool bar of a live Image pane always shows the local time of the displayed camera. The time display in the tool bar of a playback Image pane always shows the time of the recorded video.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark380"><em>Icons used, page 127</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark274"><em>Displaying text data, page 91</em></a></li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>17.14</strong></td>
<td><a id="post-2789-bookmark407"></a><strong>Search box</strong></p>
<p>You can use the search box to search for an item in the Logical Tree, in the Favorites Tree and in the Bookmarks.</p>
<p><strong>T; ★ H</strong></p>
<p>1. Main window &gt; &gt; or or tab &gt; Right-click the desired root</p>
<p>node or the desired item &gt; Click <strong>Tree search </strong>Or:</p>
<p>In the Logical Tree window, the Favorites Tree window or the Bookmarks window press Ctrl+F.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>The search box is displayed</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>2. Type a search string representing the display name of an item.</p>
<p>The search is triggered immediately during typing and the first item that matches the search string is marked.</p>
<p>If the search string is not found, the background color of the search box changes.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="315" height="40" class="wp-image-3034" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-244.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 244" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 512" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-244.jpeg 315w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-244-300x38.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 315px) 100vw, 315px" /> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="320" height="40" class="wp-image-3035" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-245.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 245" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 513" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-245.jpeg 320w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-245-300x38.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 320px) 100vw, 320px" /></p>
<ol>
<li>Click or <sup>v</sup> to mark the previous or the next matching item.</li>
</ol>
<p>The search proceeds through all items in the tree that match the search string and not only through the items in the selected tree node.</p>
<ol>
<li>Click X to close the search box.</li>
</ol>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark411"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark412"></a> Exports window</p>
<p>17.15</p>
<p>। | &gt; <sup>1</sup> <sup>1</sup> tab</p>
<p>You can import exported video data, display it in an Image pane, search for particular data in it, and unload it again.</p>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark225"><em>Exporting video data, page 78</em></a></li>
<li><a href="#post-2789-bookmark243"><em>Loading exported video, page 84</em></a></li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="77" height="56" class="wp-image-3036" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-246.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 246" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 514"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="73" height="73" class="wp-image-3037" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-247.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 247" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 515"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="77" height="56" class="wp-image-3038" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-248.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 248" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 516"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="73" height="73" class="wp-image-3039" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-249.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 249" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 517"></p>
<p>17.16</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark409"></a> Map window</p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p>&gt; Drag a map from the</p>
<p>■ to the</p>
<p>tab</p>
<p>or</p>
<p>&gt; Drag a map from the</p>
<p>Main window &gt;</p>
<p>■ to the</p>
<p>tab</p>
<p>Displays a <a href="#post-2789-bookmark488">site </a>map, it cannot display video content and is not limited to a 4:3 ratio.</p>
<p>If a map cannot be displayed completely in the <strong>Map </strong>window, you can drag the map. A special cursor is displayed.</p>
<p><strong>Click to get step-by-step instructions:</strong></p>
<p>&#8211;<a href="#post-2789-bookmark155"> <em>Displaying a site map, page 58</em></a></p>
<p>17.17</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark415"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark416"></a> PTZ Control window</p>
<p>S&#8221; tel</p>
<p>Main window &gt; &gt; <strong>PTZ Control </strong>tab</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="55" height="44" class="wp-image-3040" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-250.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 250" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 518"></p>
<p>The window becomes active when a<a href="#post-2789-bookmark482"> PTZ </a>camera or a swiveling/tilting camera is displayed in the selected<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> Image pane</a>.</p>
<p>Allows you to control a camera with the corresponding functions displayed in the selected</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="112" height="34" class="wp-image-3041" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-251.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 251" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 519"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="118" height="40" class="wp-image-3042" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-252.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 252" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 520"></p>
<p>Image pane.</p>
<p>Click to zoom in or out digitally. These controls are active even</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="254" height="232" class="wp-image-3043" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-253.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 253" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 521"></p>
<p>when a non-PTZ camera is selected.</p>
<p>camera in all directions.</p>
<p>Click an arrow or drag the joystick in the center to swivel the</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="82" height="50" class="wp-image-3044" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-254.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 254" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 522"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="168" height="51" class="wp-image-3045" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-255.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 255" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 523"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="167" height="50" class="wp-image-3046" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-256.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 256" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 524"> Click to close the iris / open the iris.</p>
<p>Click to zoom in the picture angle (zoom angle) / zooming out the picture</p>
<p>angle (wide angle).</p>
<p>Click to set the focus near / focus far.</p>
<p><strong>Predefined positions:</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="34" height="34" class="wp-image-3047" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-257.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 257" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 525"> Select an entry to move the PTZ control to the predefined position.</p>
<p>Click to save the current position of the PTZ camera to the selected preposition entry.</p>
<p><strong>AUX commands:</strong></p>
<p>Select an entry to execute this command.</p>
<p>17.18</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark418"></a><a id="post-2789-bookmark419"></a> Timeline window</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="132" height="49" class="wp-image-3048" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2789-258.jpeg" alt="word image 2789 258" title="Bosch BVMS Lite Operation manual 526"></p>
<p>Main window &gt; &gt; tab</p>
<p>Allows you to control the playback of recorded videos. You can display several cameras simultaneously.</p>
<p>Audio playback is only possible when you play the video in normal speed.</p>
<p>If you are authorized to display recorded videos, you can also listen to the accompanying audio recording.</p>
<p>If you select another time zone, the timeline is changed accordingly.</p>
<p>Allows you to navigate through recorded videos. The playback of all displayed<a href="#post-2789-bookmark461"> image pane</a>s is synchronized.</p>
<p>Many features enable the precise finding of scenes you are searching for.</p>
<p>The <a href="#post-2789-bookmark490">timeline </a>for recordings in Operator Client and BVMS Export Player displays the following information indicated by a color or hatching:</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Recording</strong></td>
<td><strong>Color</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Continuous recording</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Recording loss / no recording</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Protected recording</td>
<td>Dark grey diagonal stripes on the original color (for example: <strong>^^B)</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Restricted recording</td>
<td>Dark grey diagonal stripes on the original color (for example: <strong>^^H)</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Audio</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Data not yet loaded</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Search result</td>
<td><strong>fl B|</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm recording</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Pre-alarm recording</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Recording</strong></td>
<td><strong>Color</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Motion recording</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>To display colored timeline for alarm, pre-alarm and motion recording, enable colored timeline in the <strong>Display </strong>tab. See chapter<a href="#post-2789-bookmark391"> <em>Display tab, page 135</em></a>.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td colspan="3">**1/8 1/41/2 1 T 4 8</td>
<td>Move the slider to adjust the playback speed for the displayed cameras.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3"><strong>CHXCEI33K1E3</strong></td>
<td>Use the controls to control the playback of the displayed cameras.</p>
<p>From left to right:</p>
<ul>
<li>Jump to the oldest recording</li>
<li>Single frame backward no matter what frame type</li>
<li>Play backward, you can change the playback speed with the speed slider</li>
<li>Pause play or backward play</li>
<li>Play, you can change the playback speed with the speed slider</li>
<li>Single frame forward no matter what frame type</li>
<li>Jump to the latest recording</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"><strong>11/3/2020 4:53:34 AM</strong></td>
<td>4.</td>
<td rowspan="2">Enter the time for rapid positioning the hairline in the timeline.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3"></td>
<td>Click to move to the time now.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3"></td>
<td>Click to select a search type.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>Events</strong></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>Displays the selected search type, for example <strong>Video by event search</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3"></td>
<td>Click to jump to the previous search result.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3"></td>
<td>Click to jump to the next search result.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3">X</td>
<td>Click to remove all search results.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3">lLi</td>
<td>Click to display the <strong>Export Video </strong>dialog box.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2">G4 (172.31.22.90) [11]</p>
<p>Camera 1 (172.31.22.93) [13]</p>
<p>Camera 1 (172.31.22.95) [19]</p>
<p>RTCAM (172.31.23.201) [G]</td>
<td></td>
<td>Displays all cameras displayed in the image window.</p>
<p>If you log on to an Enterprise Management Server, the camera name is displayed with the name of this camera’s Management Server as a prefix.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong><em>MAN*</em> 7 MAM SCÛAM 5 00 AM i&amp;W AM IK</strong></td>
<td>1</td>
<td>Displays the timelines of the cameras in the camera list.</p>
<p>Allows you rapid time positioning for playing the corresponding videos.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Refer to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><em>Changing the playback speed, page 74</em></li>
<li><em>Using the timeline, page 73</em></li>
<li><em>Finding logbook entries, page 87</em></li>
<li><em>Exporting video data, page 78</em></li>
<li><em>Verifying the authenticity of video data, page 76</em></li>
<li><em>Protecting or unprotecting video, page 75</em></li>
<li><em>Restricting or unrestricting video, page 74</em></li>
<li><em>Deleting video data, page 76</em></li>
<li><em>Loading exported video, page 84</em></li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark421"></a> 18 Keyboard shortcuts</p>
<p>This section lists the available keyboard shortcuts for a US keyboard layout.</p>
<p>+ indicates that each key must be pressed simultaneously (for example, Control+z means to press the Control key and the z key simultaneously).</p>
<p>On your Setup CD you find an Acrobat file for printing. The name of this file is</p>
<p>keyboard_layout_en.pdf.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2789-bookmark423"></a> General controls</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
<td><strong>Shortcut key</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Display Online Help</td>
<td>F1</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Rename (for example in favorites)</td>
<td>F2</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2789-bookmark425"></a> Playback controls</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
<td><strong>Shortcut key</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Play / Pause</td>
<td>Space</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Previous frame</td>
<td><sup>,</sup></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Next frame</td>
<td>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Set direction to forward</td>
<td>Enter</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Set direction to backward</td>
<td>Backspace</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Jump to oldest recording</td>
<td>Home</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Jump to latest recording</td>
<td>End</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Increase playback speed</td>
<td>Page Up</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Decrease playback speed</td>
<td>Page Down</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2789-bookmark427"></a> Image window controls</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>The following keyboard shortcuts only work when the Image window has the focus.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
<td><strong>Shortcut key</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Move selected Image pane</td>
<td>Cursor keys</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Close Image pane</td>
<td>Delete,</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Close all Image panes</td>
<td>Control + Delete</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Show fewer Image pane rows</td>
<td>F7</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Show more Image pane rows</td>
<td>F8<strong>*</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Show / hide Image pane bars</td>
<td>F9</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"><strong>*Note: </strong>You cannot display more Image pane rows than the configured maximum, which is set by a parameter in the BVMS Configuration Client.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark429"></a> 19 Troubleshooting</p>
<p>This chapter contains information on how to handle known problems using BVMS Operator Client BVMS Export Player.</p>
<p><strong>Problems with the settings in the recording control of your soundcard</strong></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Issue</strong></td>
<td><strong>Cause</strong></td>
<td><strong>Solution</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Feedbacks occur when using a microphone for<a href="#post-2789-bookmark467"> Intercom</a> <a href="#post-2789-bookmark467">functionality</a>.</td>
<td>In the recording control of your soundcard the microphone must be selected, not the stereo mix (or something else).</p>
<p>Operator Client checks its configuration file during startup and changes the settings in the recording control accordingly. This configuration file contains a default entry which might not match your system configuration. This setting is restored during each start of Operator Client.</td>
<td>Change the setting in the configuration file of Operator Client to microphone.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark431"></a> 19.1 Reestablishing the connection to a Bosch IntuiKey keyboard</p>
<ol>
<li>Plug in the cable again or wait until the workstation is online.</li>
</ol>
<p>The Off Line message disappears.</p>
<ol>
<li>Press the Terminal softkey to enter BVMS.</li>
</ol>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark433"></a> Glossary</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark435"></a><strong>Alarm Image window</strong></p>
<p>Image window for displaying one or more Alarm Image panes.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark436"></a><strong>Alarm List</strong></p>
<p>Window in Bosch Video Management System used to display a list of active alarms.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark437"></a><strong>alarm priority</strong></p>
<p>Each alarm is assigned a priority. Alarms can be configured to automatically display (pop up) in the Alarm Image window, based on the alarm priority. Each user&#8217;s live/playback display is also assigned a priority. When alarms are received with priority higher than that of the user&#8217;s display, the alarm automatically displays its alarm row in the Alarm Image window. If the Alarm Image window is not currently displayed, it automatically replaces the Live or Playback Image window on the alarm-enabled monitor.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark438"></a><strong>analytics viewer</strong></p>
<p>External application that is used for displaying video analytics alarms in Operator Client.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark439"></a><strong>ANR</strong></p>
<p>Automated Network Replenishment. Integrated process that copies missing video data from a video transceiver to the network video recorder after a network failure. The copied video data exactly fills the gap that occurred after the network failure. Hence the transceiver needs any kind of local storage. The recording capacity on this local storage is calculated with the following formula: (network bandwidth x estimated network downtime + safety margin) x (1 + 1/backup speed). The resulting recording capacity is required because the continuous recording must continue during the copy process.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark440"></a><strong>area</strong></p>
<p>A group of detection devices connected to the security system.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark441"></a><strong>authenticity</strong></p>
<p>State of a recorded video that indicates its originality. That means, the recorded video is not manipulated.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark442"></a><strong>bookmark</strong></p>
<p>Used for storing a time period of live or recorded video. This allows for tagging particular scenes for later investigation. Additionally you can share your investigation results with other users by exporting a bookmark.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark443"></a><strong>bypass</strong></p>
<p>Selectively remove points from the security system. A point may be bypassed in order to arm the perimeter with a window open.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark444"></a><strong>camera sequence</strong></p>
<p>A list of cameras that are displayed one after the other. Each camera is displayed for a specific time (dwell time). There are two types of sequences: predefined and automatic. Predefined sequences are defined by the administrator. Icons for these sequences are located in the Logical Tree.</p>
<p>Automatic sequences are created when you drag a multiple selection or a folder from the Logical Tree to an Image pane or a decoder. All cameras in this folder or selection sequences in the Image pane. You can create your own sequences by creating a folder in your Favorites Tree.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark445"></a><strong>Dewarping</strong></p>
<p>The use of software to convert a circular image from a fisheye lens with radial distortion to a rectilinear image for normal viewing (dewarping is the correction of distortion).</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark446"></a><strong>DNS</strong></p>
<p>Domain Name System. A DNS server converts a URL (<a href="http://www.myDevice.com" rel="nofollow noopener" target="_blank">www.myDevice.com</a>, for example) into an IP address on networks that use the TCP/IP protocol.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark447"></a><strong>Document</strong></p>
<p>The document files that are supported by BVMS are HTM, URL, MHT, HTML, TXT.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark448"></a><strong>dual authorization</strong></p>
<p>Security policy that requires two different users to log on to the Operator Client. Both the users must be member of a normal Bosch Video Management System user group. This user group (or these user groups if the users are members of different user groups) must be part of a dual authorization group. A dual authorization group has its own access rights within Bosch Video Management</p>
<p>System. This dual authorization group should have more access rights than the normal user group that the user belongs to. Example: User A is member of a user group called Group A. User B is member of Group B. Additionally a dual authorization group is configured with Group A and Group B as members. For the users of Group A, dual authorization is optional, for users of Group B it is mandatory. When user A logs on, a second dialog box for confirming the logon is displayed.</p>
<p>In this dialog box, a second user can log on if he is available. If not, user A can continue and start the Operator Client. He then has only the access rights of Group A. When user B logs on, again a second dialog box for logging on is displayed. In this dialog box, a second user must log on. If not, user B cannot start the Operator Client.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark449"></a><strong>duplex</strong></p>
<p>Term used to define the direction of data transmission between two parties. Half-duplex allows data transmission in both directions but not simultaneously. Full-duplex allows simultaneous data transmission.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark450"></a><strong>Dwell time</strong></p>
<p>Preset amount of time a camera is displayed in an Image window until the next camera is displayed during a camera sequence.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark451"></a><strong>Edge dewarping</strong></p>
<p>Dewarping performed in the camera itself.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark452"></a><strong>Encoder</strong></p>
<p>Changes an analog stream to a digital stream, e.g., to integrate analog cameras in a digital system like Bosch Video Management System. Some encoders can have a local storage like a flash card, a USB hard disk, or they can store their video data on iSCSI devices. IP cameras have an encoder built in.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark453"></a><strong>Enterprise Account</strong></p>
<p>Enterprise Account is an authorization that enables a user of Operator Client to connect to the devices of a Management Server being part of an Enterprise System. In an Enterprise Account, all permissions for the devices of this Management Server are configured. Operator Client can simultaneously connect to all Management Server computers that are part of this Enterprise System. This access is either controlled by the membership to an Enterprise User Group, and is controlled by the device permissions configured in the Enterprise Account for this Management Server.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark454"></a><strong>Enterprise System</strong></p>
<p>Enterprise System is a feature of Bosch Video Management System that allows a user of Operator Client to access multiple Management Server computers simultaneously.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark455"></a><strong>Enterprise User Group</strong></p>
<p>Enterprise User Group is a user group that is configured on an Enterprise Management Server. Enterprise User Group defines the users that are authorized to access multiple Management Server computers simultaneously. Defines the operating permissions available for these users.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark456"></a><strong>erase</strong></p>
<p>The right of erasure in the GDPR (General Data Protection Regulation) provides that the data subject has the right to request erasure of personal data related to them on any one of a number of grounds within 30 days.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark457"></a><strong>Event</strong></p>
<p>A circumstance or state that is linked to an alarm and/or an action. Events can arise from many sources such as cameras, archivers, directories, digital inputs, etc. They can include start­recording states, loss of signal states, disk full messages, user logons, digital input triggers, etc.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark458"></a><strong>Failover VRM</strong></p>
<p>Software in the BVMS environment. Takes over the task of the assigned Primary VRM or Secondary VRM in case of failure.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark459"></a><strong>Favorites Tree</strong></p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark460"></a><strong>Hotspot</strong></p>
<p>Mouse sensitive icon on a map. Hotspots are configured in Configuration Client. Hotspots can be for example cameras, relays, inputs. The operator uses it for localizing and selecting a device in a building. If configured, hotspots can display a blinking background color when a specific state event or alarm occurs.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark461"></a><strong>Image pane</strong></p>
<p>Used for displaying live or recorded video of a single camera, a site map, a document, a sequence, a monitor group, an external application or a map viewport.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark462"></a><strong>Image pane pattern</strong></p>
<p>Arrangement of Image panes.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark463"></a><strong>Image window</strong></p>
<p>Container for Image panes, structured by an Image window pattern.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark464"></a><strong>Instant playback</strong></p>
<p>Plays the recorded image of the selected camera in an Image pane on the live screen. The start time (number of seconds in the past, or rewind time) can be configured.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark465"></a><strong>Intelligent Tracking</strong></p>
<p>Intelligent Tracking is a software process running on a camera that allows the camera to follow a selected object.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark466"></a><strong>Intelligent Video Analytics</strong></p>
<p>Algorithm that detects specific properties and the behavior of objects in a scene monitored by a video camera and from this generates alarm events that, in turn, can be processed in a CCTV system. Recording with Intelligent Video Analytics settings activated is a precondition to be able to selectively and quickly search through video material later. Intelligent Video Analytics makes it possible to capture and evaluate directional movement of objects in such a way that false alarms are prevented to a large extent.</p>
<p>Intelligent Video Analytics adapts automatically to changing environmental conditions and is therefore largely non-sensitive to perturbing influences such as rain and tree movement. Especially when used for forensic search, Intelligent Video Analytics allows for filtering moving objects by their color specifications. With the aid of Intelligent Video Analytics algorithm extensive video material can be searched selectively for objects with specific color properties.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark467"></a><strong>Intercom functionality</strong></p>
<p>Used to talk on the loudspeakers of an encoder. This encoder must have audio-in and audio-out. The Intercom functionality can be granted per user group.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark468"></a><strong>intrusion control panel</strong></p>
<p>Generic name for the core device in a Bosch intrusion (burglary) security system. Keypads, modules, detectors, and other devices connect to the control panel.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark469"></a><strong>iSCSI</strong></p>
<p>Internet Small Computer System Interface. Protocol that manages storage via a TCP/IP network. iSCSI enables access to stored data from everywhere in the network. Especially with the advent of Gigabit Ethernet, it has become affordable to attach iSCSI storage servers simply as remote hard disks to a computer network. In iSCSI terminology, the server providing storage resources is called an iSCSI target, while the client connecting to the server and accessing the resources of the server is called iSCSI initiator.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark470"></a><strong>Logbook</strong></p>
<p>Container for logging all events in Bosch Video Management System.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark471"></a><strong>Logical number</strong></p>
<p>Logical numbers are unique IDs assigned to each device in the system for ease of reference. Logical numbers are only unique within a particular device type. Typical use of logical numbers are Command Scripts.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark472"></a><strong>Logical Tree</strong></p>
<p>Tree with a customized structure of all the devices. The Logical Tree is used in the Operator Client to select cameras and other devices. In the Configuration Client, the &#8220;Full Logical Tree&#8221; is configured (on the Maps and Structure page) and tailored for each user group (on the User Groups page).</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark473"></a><strong>Management Server</strong></p>
<p>BVMS server managing devices.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark474"></a><strong>monitor group</strong></p>
<p>A set of monitors connected to decoders. The monitor group can be used for alarm processing in a given physical area. For example, an installation with three physically separated control rooms might have three monitor groups. The monitors in an monitor group are logically configured into rows and columns and can be set to different layouts, e. g. full-screen or quad view.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark475"></a><strong>MOV</strong></p>
<p>File extension of the default video format used by QuickTime Player from Apple.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark476"></a><strong>MP4</strong></p>
<p>MP4 is a digital multimedia container format most commonly used to store video and audio, but it can also be used to store other data such as subtitles and still images. MP4 files are supported by most software media players.</p>
<p><strong>No-touch deployment</strong></p>
<p>Method for automatic downloading, installing and running .NET applications without changing the registry or shared system components. With Bosch Video Management System, no-touch deployment is used for updating the Operator Clients from the Management Server.</p>
<p>The update takes place if a new version is stored on the Management Server and when each user is logging on to the Operator Client. If you work with one Operator Client against multiple Management Server computers, no-touch deployment uses only the software version stored on the Management Server where the Operator Client has last logged on successfully. When you try to log on to another Management Server with a different application version, this one displays the Management Server as not online because the software versions do not match.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark477"></a><strong>Operator Client</strong></p>
<p>Component of Bosch Video Management System that provides the user interface for system monitoring and operation.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark478"></a><strong>Operator Client workstation</strong></p>
<p>Computer in the Bosch Video Management System environment for viewing live and playback video and for configuration tasks. Operator Client is installed on this computer.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark479"></a><strong>Panoramic camera</strong></p>
<p>Camera with a 360° or 180° view angle.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark480"></a><strong>Playback Mode</strong></p>
<p>Feature of Operator Client. Used to playback and search through archived videos.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark481"></a><strong>point</strong></p>
<p>A detection device connected to the security system. Points show on the keypad individually and with custom text. The text might describe a single door, motion sensor, smoke detector, or an protected space such as UPSTAIRS or GARAGE.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark482"></a><strong>PTZ camera</strong></p>
<p>Camera with pan, tilt, and zoom function.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark483"></a><strong>Reference image</strong></p>
<p>A reference image is continuously compared with the current video image. If the current video image in the marked areas differs from the reference image, an alarm is triggered. This allows you to detect tampering that would otherwise not be detected, for example if the camera is turned.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark484"></a><strong>Rewind time</strong></p>
<p>Number of seconds when an Image pane is switched to instant playback.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark485"></a><strong>ROI</strong></p>
<p>Region of Interest. Intended use of ROI is to save bandwidth when zooming into a section of the camera image with a fixed HD camera. This section behaves like a PTZ camera.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark486"></a><strong>Secondary VRM</strong></p>
<p>Software in the BVMS environment. Ensures that the recording performed by one or multiple Primary VRMs is additionally and simultaneously performed to another iSCSI target. The recording settings can deviate from the settings of the Primary VRM.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark487"></a><strong>Server Lookup</strong></p>
<p>Access method for a user of Configuration Client or Operator Client to sequentially connect to multiple system access points. A system access point can be a Management Server or an Enterprise Management Server.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark488"></a><strong>Site</strong></p>
<p>User-created entity for grouping related system resources together for ease of viewing and management. Typically, a site corresponds to a physical location, like a building or a floor, but it may be used to represent any concept. It consists of a Management Server, usually Configuration Client and multipe Operator Client installations.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark489"></a><strong>TCP</strong></p>
<p>Transmission Control Protocol. Connection- oriented communication protocol used to transmit data over an IP network. Offers a reliable and ordered data transmission.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark490"></a><strong>Timeline</strong></p>
<p>Part of the Bosch Video Management System user interface. Displays lines as graphical representations of the recordings of the selected cameras. The Timeline allows you to navigate through recorded videos.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark491"></a><strong>UDP</strong></p>
<p>User Datagram Protocol. A connectionless protocol used to exchange data over an IP network. UDP is more efficient than TCP for video transmission because of lower overhead.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark492"></a><strong>unmanaged site</strong></p>
<p>Item of the Device Tree in BVMS that can contain video network devices like Digital Video Recorders. These devices are not managed by the Management Server of your system. The user of Operator Client can connect to the devices of an unmanaged site on demand.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark493"></a><strong>User group</strong></p>
<p>User groups are used to define common user attributes, such as permissions, privileges and PTZ priority. By becoming a member of a group, a user automatically inherits all the attributes of the group.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark494"></a><strong>UTC</strong></p>
<p>Universal Time Coordinated</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark495"></a><strong>Video Analytics</strong></p>
<p>Video analytics is a software process that compares a camera image with the stored images of specific persons or objects. In case of a match, the software triggers an alarm.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark496"></a><strong>Video Streaming Gateway (VSG)</strong></p>
<p>Virtual device that allows integrating Bosch cameras, ONVIF cameras, JPEG cameras, RTSP encoders.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark497"></a><strong>view</strong></p>
<p>Collection of image panes that you can recall for instant live viewing. Sequences cannot be part of a view.</p>
<p><a id="post-2789-bookmark498"></a><strong>VRM</strong></p>
<p>Video Recording Manager. Software package in Bosch Video Management System which manages storing video (MPEG-4 SH++, H.264 and H.265) with audio data and metadata on iSCSI devices in the network. VRM maintains a database containing the recording source information and a list of associated iSCSI drives.</p>
<p>VRM is realized as a service running on a computer in the Bosch Video Management System network. VRM does not store video data itself but distributes storage capacities on iSCSI devices to the encoders, while handling load balancing between multiple iSCSI devices. VRM streams playback from iSCSI to Operator Clients.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
					<wfw:commentRss>https://www.dvrcms.com/bosch-bvms-lite-operation-manual/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
			<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>User Manual of Universal HD DVR</title>
		<link>https://www.dvrcms.com/user-manual-of-universal-hd-dvr/</link>
					<comments>https://www.dvrcms.com/user-manual-of-universal-hd-dvr/#respond</comments>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[admin]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Fri, 09 Jun 2023 19:30:43 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[FAQ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[How To]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Installation Guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[User Guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Access Control]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[administrator]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Alarm]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Alarm Setting]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Android]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[camera]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[cameras]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[CCTV]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[client]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[cloud]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[CMS]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Computer]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Configuration]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Connect]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[DDNS]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Device Manager]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[devices]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[download]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[DVR solutions]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[DVR system]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Encoding]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Firmware]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Information]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Installation]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Intercom]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[IP Camera]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[iPhone]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Live view]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Mainstream]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[mobile]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[MONITOR]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Motion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Motion Detect Setting]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Motion Detection]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[network]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[onvif]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[OSD setting]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Password]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Pivot CMS]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Play Video]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Playback]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[PTZ Control]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[QR code]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Record]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Recording]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[set up]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Setting]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[settings]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Setup Guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[software]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Support]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Surveillance]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Time Setting]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Update firmware]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[User management]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[User manual]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[web browser]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[WiFi Setting]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Windows]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.dvrcms.com/?p=562</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[User Manual of Universal HD DVR, If HD DVR does not work normally because of hitting on the hard object, ... <p class="read-more-container"><a title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR" class="read-more button" href="https://www.dvrcms.com/user-manual-of-universal-hd-dvr/#more-562" aria-label="Read more about User Manual of Universal HD DVR">Read More</a></p>]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p class="Gvdemetni30"><span lang="EN-US" style="color: black;">User Manual of Universal HD</span><span lang="EN-US"> DVR, If HD DVR does not work normally because of hitting on the hard object, please contact the authorized dealer for repair or replacement.</span></p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark0"></a> SAFETY INSTRUCTION</p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark2"></a> Please carefully read the following safety instruction so as to avoid personal injuries and prevent the equipment and other connection devices from being damaged.</p>
<ol>
<li><strong>Power sources. Please use the power supply attached or specified by the manufacturer </strong>Never operate the equipment by unspecified power supply.</li>
<li><strong>Never push objects of any kind through openings of HD DVR.</strong></li>
</ol>
<p>Never push objects of any kind through openings of HD DVR so as to avoid electric shock or other accidents.</p>
<ol>
<li><strong>Do not put the equipment in the dusty field.</strong></li>
</ol>
<p>Do not put the equipment in the dusty field.</p>
<ol>
<li><strong>Do not place the equipment under rain or humid environment</strong></li>
</ol>
<p>Do not place the equipment under humid environment like basement. If the equipment is in contact with water, please unplug the power cable and immediately contact your local dealer.</p>
<ol>
<li><strong>Keep the surface of the equipment clean and dry</strong></li>
</ol>
<p>Use soft damp cloth to clean the outer case of HD DVR (do not use liquid aerosol cleaners)</p>
<ol>
<li><strong>Do not operate if any problems are found</strong></li>
</ol>
<p>If there are any strange smell or sound, unplug the power cable and contact the authorized dealer or service center.</p>
<ol>
<li><strong>Do not try to remove the upper cover</strong></li>
</ol>
<p>Warning: Do not remove the cap of HD DVR so as to avoid electric shock.</p>
<ol>
<li><strong>Handle with care</strong></li>
</ol>
<p>If HD DVR does not work normally because of hitting on the hard object, please contact the authorized dealer for repair or replacement.</p>
<ol>
<li><strong>Use standard lithium battery</strong></li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Note: </strong><em>Use the batteries attached or specified by the manufacturer. After cutting off the power supply, if the system clock cannot continue to work, please replace the standard 3V lithium battery on the main board.</em></p>
<p><strong>Warning: </strong><em>Turn off HD DVR before replacing the batteries, or you may be suffered from serious electric shock. Please properly dispose of the used batteries.</em></p>
<ol>
<li><strong>Put the equipment in a place with good ventilation.</strong></li>
</ol>
<p>The HD DVR system includes HDD, which produces large amount of heat during operation. As a result, do not block the ventilation openings(on the top, bottom, both sides and the reverse side) for cooling the system during operation. Install or put the equipment in the place with good ventilation.</p>
<ol>
<li><strong>The attached power adapter can only be used for 1 set of HD DVR.</strong></li>
</ol>
<p>Do not connect more equipment, or HD DVR may be restarted repeatedly because of insufficient power.</p>
<ol>
<li><strong>Prevent the equipment from water dropping or splashing.</strong></li>
</ol>
<p>Do not place objects containing water, such as flower vase, on the equipment.</p>
<h2>User Manual of Universal HD DVR</h2>
<blockquote><p>Read More :</p>
<ol>
<li><a href="https://www.dvrcms.com/cms-software/200/best-20-free-open-source-cctv-nvr-and-dvr-solutions/">Best 20 Free Open source CCTV, NVR and DVR solutions</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.dvrcms.com/cms-software/369/lorex-desktop-software/">How to Add Device to Hik-ProConnect</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.dvrcms.com/how-to/339/how-to-setup-dahua-toolbox/">Pivot CMS Setup Guide</a></li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark4"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark3"></a> Chapter 1 Overview of HD DVR</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark7"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark6"></a> Front Panel</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>HD DVR Front Panel, as shown below:</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="865" height="128" class="wp-image-563" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-1.jpeg" alt="word image 562 1" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 719" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-1.jpeg 865w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-1-300x44.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-1-768x114.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 865px) 100vw, 865px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 1-1 Front panel of 1HDD/2HDD case</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="866" height="180" class="wp-image-564" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-2.jpeg" alt="word image 562 2" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 720" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-2.jpeg 866w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-2-300x62.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-2-768x160.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 866px) 100vw, 866px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 1-2 Front panel of 4HDD/8HDD case</strong></p>
<p><strong><em>Note:</em></strong></p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark9"></a> &gt; <em>All above drawings are for reference only.</em></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark10"></a> Rear Panel</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>HD DVR Rear Panel, as shown below:</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="865" height="126" class="wp-image-565" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-3.jpeg" alt="word image 562 3" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 721" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-3.jpeg 865w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-3-300x44.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-3-768x112.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 865px) 100vw, 865px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 1-3 Rear panel of 1 HDD case</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="867" height="108" class="wp-image-566" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-4.jpeg" alt="word image 562 4" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 722" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-4.jpeg 867w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-4-300x37.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-4-768x96.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 867px) 100vw, 867px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 1-4 Rear panel of 2 HDD case</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="867" height="181" class="wp-image-567" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-5.jpeg" alt="word image 562 5" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 723" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-5.jpeg 867w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-5-300x63.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-5-768x160.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 867px) 100vw, 867px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 1-5 Rear panel of 4HDD/8HDD case</strong></p>
<p><strong><em>Note:</em></strong></p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark12"></a> &gt; <em>All above drawings are for reference only.</em></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark13"></a> USB Mouse Operation</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>A regular 3-button (Left/Right/Scroll-wheel) USB mouse can also be used with this HD DVR. To use a USB mouse: Plug USB mouse into one of the USB interfaces on the front or rear panel of the HD DVR. The mouse should automatically be detected.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Items</strong></td>
<td><strong>Action</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="3">Left-Click</td>
<td>Single-Click</td>
<td>Live view: Select channel and show the quick set menu.</p>
<p>Menu: Select and enter.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Double-Click</td>
<td>Live view: Switch between single-screen and multi-screen.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Click and Drag</td>
<td>Live view: Drag channel/time bar.</p>
<p>Alarm: Select target area.</p>
<p>Digital zoom-in: Drag and select target area.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Right-Click</td>
<td>Single-Click</td>
<td>Live view: Show main menu.</p>
<p>Menu: Exit current menu to upper level menu.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">Scroll-Wheel</td>
<td>Scrolling up</td>
<td>Menu: change the settings value to high</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Scrolling down</td>
<td>Menu: change the settings value to low</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 1-1 Key functions of USB Mouse Operation</p>
<p><strong><em>Note:</em></strong></p>
<p>&gt; <em>If in a rare case that the mouse is not detected, the possible reason may be that the two devices are not compatible, please refer to the recommended the device list from your provider.</em></p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark16"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark15"></a> 1.4 Input Method Description</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="858" height="201" class="wp-image-568" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-6.jpeg" alt="word image 562 6" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 724" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-6.jpeg 858w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-6-300x70.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-6-768x180.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 858px) 100vw, 858px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 1-6 Soft keyboard (1)</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="179" height="237" class="wp-image-569" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-7.jpeg" alt="word image 562 7" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 725"></p>
<p><strong>Figure 1-6 Soft keyboard (2)</strong></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Icon</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Symbols</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>0 9</td>
<td>Number</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enter</td>
<td>Exit</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>1 1</td>
<td>Space</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>■ <sup>z</sup>l</td>
<td>English letter</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Backspace</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-562-bookmark18"></a> Shift |</td>
<td>Lowercase/Uppercase</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table1-2 Description of the Soft Keyboard Icons</p>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark19"></a> HD DVR Connection
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark22"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark21"></a> Hard Disk Installation</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ol>
<p>Before installing Hard Disk (HDD), please make sure the power is disconnected with the HD DVR. Each capacity of Hard Disk please refer to HD DVR’s specifications. HD DVR without Hard Disk still support monitoring, but no recording or playback. If you correctly install the Hard Disk, the HDD indicator will blink regularly when the HD DVR is on work.</p>
<ol>
<li>Loosen the screws in back and right/left</li>
</ol>
<p>2. Place the HDD in the machine</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="363" height="204" class="wp-image-570" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-8.jpeg" alt="word image 562 8" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 726" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-8.jpeg 363w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-8-300x169.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 363px) 100vw, 363px" /> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="358" height="203" class="wp-image-571" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-9.jpeg" alt="word image 562 9" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 727" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-9.jpeg 358w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-9-300x170.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 358px) 100vw, 358px" /> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="363" height="213" class="wp-image-572" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-10.jpeg" alt="word image 562 10" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 728" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-10.jpeg 363w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-10-300x176.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 363px) 100vw, 363px" /> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="372" height="216" class="wp-image-573" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-11.jpeg" alt="word image 562 11" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 729" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-11.jpeg 372w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-11-300x174.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 372px) 100vw, 372px" /></p>
<p>side to open the cover.</p>
<p>and tight the screws.</p>
<p>3. Connect the power and data cables.</p>
<p>4. Install the cover and screws.</p>
<p><strong><em>Note:</em></strong></p>
<p>&gt; <em>If user requires higher performance HDD, it is strongly recommended to use special hard drive for security and protection.</em></p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark24"></a> &gt; <em>Please do not take out hard drive when HD DVR is running!</em></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark25"></a> Device Connection</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>We recommend you connect HD DVR with other monitoring devices like picture 2-4-1 or 2-4-2.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="768" height="432" class="wp-image-574" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-12.jpeg" alt="word image 562 12" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 730" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-12.jpeg 768w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-12-300x169.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 768px) 100vw, 768px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 2-4-1Device Connection</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="773" height="472" class="wp-image-575" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-13.jpeg" alt="word image 562 13" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 731" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-13.jpeg 773w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-13-300x183.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-13-768x469.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 773px) 100vw, 773px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 2-4-2Device Connection</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark28"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark27"></a> Network Connection</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Transmit signals of AHD camera and IP camera to HD DVR by the network cable, and connect VGA port and HDMI port for output.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="823" height="515" class="wp-image-576" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-14.jpeg" alt="word image 562 14" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 732" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-14.jpeg 823w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-14-300x188.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-14-768x481.jpeg 768w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-14-160x100.jpeg 160w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 823px) 100vw, 823px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 2-4 Device Connection</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark31"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark30"></a> Power Supply Connection</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark33"></a> Please use attached power adapter to connect HD DVR. Before power on, make sure the cables on the audio I/O ports and network port are well connected.</p>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark34"></a> Getting Started
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark37"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark36"></a> Start Up and Shut Down</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ol>
<p>Proper startup and shutdown procedures are crucial to expanding the life of the HD DVR, please check that the voltage of the extra power supply is the same with the HD DVR’s requirement, and the ground connection is working properly.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Starting up the HD DVR</strong></li>
</ul>
<p>Plug the power supply and turn on the power supply switch(if there is one). Power supply indicator blinking indicates turning on the video recorder. After the startup you will hear a beep. The default setting of video output is multiple-window output mode. If the startup time is within the recording schedule time, the timing video recording function will start up automatically. Then the recording indicator of corresponding channel will be blinking and the HD DVR is working normally. When operate a username and password is needed, the default username is “admin” and the password is 1234567u.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Shutting down the HD DVR</strong></li>
</ul>
<p>Click right of the mouse on the live view interface and choose “<strong>Main Menu</strong>&gt;<strong>Shutdown”, </strong>then click ok button, shown as figure 3-1.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="711" height="290" class="wp-image-577" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-15.jpeg" alt="word image 562 15" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 733" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-15.jpeg 711w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-15-300x122.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 711px) 100vw, 711px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 3-1 Shutdown Menu</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark40"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark39"></a> Using the Startup Wizard</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>By default, the Startup Wizard starts once the HD DVR has loaded, as shown in <strong>Figure 3-2.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="497" height="317" class="wp-image-578" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-16.jpeg" alt="word image 562 16" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 734" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-16.jpeg 497w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-16-300x191.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 497px) 100vw, 497px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 3-2 Startup Wizard</strong></p>
<p><strong>Operating the Startup Wizard:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>The Startup Wizard can walk you through some important settings of the HD DVR. If you don’t want to use the Startup Wizard at that moment, click the exit button. You can also choose to use the Startup Wizard next time by leaving the “enable” checkbox checked.</li>
<li>Click Next Step button to enter the general settings window, as shown in <strong>figure 3-3.</strong></li>
</ol>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="756" height="506" class="wp-image-579" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-17.jpeg" alt="word image 562 17" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 735" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-17.jpeg 756w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-17-300x201.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 756px) 100vw, 756px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 3-3 General settings</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>After the general settings, click Next Step button which takes you back to the record control Setup Wizard window, as shown in <strong>figure 3-4.</strong></li>
</ol>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="754" height="506" class="wp-image-580" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-18.jpeg" alt="word image 562 18" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 736" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-18.jpeg 754w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-18-300x201.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 754px) 100vw, 754px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 3-4 Record control settings</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>After the record control settings, click Next Step button which takes you to the HDD</li>
</ol>
<p>Manage Setup Wizard window, as shown in <strong>figure 3-5.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="608" height="405" class="wp-image-581" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-19.jpeg" alt="word image 562 19" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 737" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-19.jpeg 608w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-19-300x200.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-19-600x400.jpeg 600w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 608px) 100vw, 608px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 3-5 HDD Manage of Wizard</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Click Next button. You enter the Network Setup Wizard window, as shown in <strong>figure 3-6.</strong></li>
</ol>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="610" height="403" class="wp-image-582" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-20.jpeg" alt="word image 562 20" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 738" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-20.jpeg 610w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-20-300x198.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 610px) 100vw, 610px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 3-6 Network of Wizard</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Click Next button after you configured the network parameters, you enter the cloud</li>
</ol>
<p>service Setup Wizard window, as shown in <strong>figure 3-7.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="623" height="415" class="wp-image-583" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-21.jpeg" alt="word image 562 21" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 739" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-21.jpeg 623w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-21-300x200.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-21-600x400.jpeg 600w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 623px) 100vw, 623px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 3-7 Cloud of Wizard</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Click finished button to complete the startup Setup Wizard.
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark43"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark42"></a> Login and logout</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ol>
<p>• <strong>User Login</strong></p>
<p>If HD DVR has logged out, you must login the device before operating the menu and other functions.</p>
<p><strong>Steps:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Select the User Name in the dropdown list.</li>
<li>Input Password.</li>
<li>Click OK to log in.</li>
</ol>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="757" height="312" class="wp-image-584" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-22.jpeg" alt="word image 562 22" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 740" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-22.jpeg 757w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-22-300x124.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 757px) 100vw, 757px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 3-8Switch user</strong></p>
<p><strong><em>Note:</em></strong></p>
<p>&gt; <em>In the Login dialog box, if you enter the wrong password 7 times, the current user account will blockedfor 60 seconds and you will hear a beep consist about 5s.</em></p>
<p>• <strong>User Logout</strong></p>
<p>After logging out, the monitor turns to the live view mode and if you want to perform any operations, you need to enter user name and password log in again.</p>
<p><strong>Steps:</strong></p>
<p>1. Enter the Shutdown menu. Go to Main Menu &gt; Shutdown</p>
<p>2. Select logout and click ok button.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="770" height="315" class="wp-image-585" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-23.jpeg" alt="word image 562 23" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 741" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-23.jpeg 770w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-23-300x123.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-23-768x314.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 770px) 100vw, 770px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 3-9Shutdown</strong></p>
<p><strong><em>Note:</em></strong></p>
<p>&gt; <em>After you have logged out the system, menu operation on the screen is invalid. It is required to input a user name and password to unlock the system.</em></p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark45"></a> Chapter 4 HD DVR MENU</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark49"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark47"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark48"></a> HD DVR Menu Guide</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="865" height="852" class="wp-image-586" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-24.jpeg" alt="word image 562 24" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 742" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-24.jpeg 865w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-24-300x295.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-24-768x756.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 865px) 100vw, 865px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-1 HD DVR Menu Guide</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark52"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark51"></a> Live View
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark55"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark54"></a> Introduction of Live View</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Live view shows you the video image getting from each camera in real time. The HD DVR automatically enters Live View mode when powered on, as shown in figure 4-2.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="684" height="446" class="wp-image-587" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-25.jpeg" alt="word image 562 25" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 743" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-25.jpeg 684w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-25-300x196.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 684px) 100vw, 684px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-2 live view interface</strong></p>
<p>On live view screen, click on the channel &#8221; + &#8220;Button to enter the channel management interface HD DVR Automatically search for network segment IPC , And then select the IPC Click Add to.</p>
<p><strong><em>Note:</em></strong></p>
<p>&gt; <em>The transmission signals of IP camera to HD DVR is main stream under single or four screen s live view, and it is extra stream under multi- screen live view.</em></p>
<p>• <strong>Live View Icons</strong></p>
<p>In the live view mode, there are icons at the upper-left of the screen for each channel, showing the status of the record and alarm in the channel, so that you can know whether the channel is recorded, or whether there are alarm source as soon as possible.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Items</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>^=1 Recording state</td>
<td>Shown on channel preview when recording.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm detect</td>
<td>Shown on channel preview when alarm triggered.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Video lost</td>
<td>Shown on channel preview when video lost.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>a</p>
<p>Camera lock</td>
<td>No preview authority.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table4-1 Live view Icons</p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark58"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark57"></a> 4.2.2 Operations in Live View Mode</p>
<p><strong>In live view mode, there are many functions provided. The functions are listed below.</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Single Screen: </strong>showing only one screen on the monitor.</li>
<li><strong>Multi-screen: </strong>showing multiple screens on the monitor simultaneously.</li>
<li><strong>Tour: </strong>the screen is auto switched to the next one. And you must set the dwell time for each screen on the configuration menu before enabling the tour.</li>
<li><strong>Start Recording: </strong>continuous record and motion detection record are supported.</li>
<li><strong>Add IP Camera: </strong>the shortcut to the IP camera management interface.</li>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark60"></a><strong>Playback: </strong>playback the recorded videos for current day.
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark61"></a> Quick Setting Toolbar in Live View Mod</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>On the screen of each channel, there is a quick setting toolbar which shows when you move the arrow of mouse to the top of image.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="480" height="53" class="wp-image-588" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-26.jpeg" alt="word image 562 26" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 744" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-26.jpeg 480w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-26-300x33.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 480px) 100vw, 480px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-3 Quick Setting Toolbar in channel image</strong></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td colspan="3"><strong>Items</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>Instant Replay</td>
<td>In the preview channel window interface within ten minutes of video for playback.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3">■■□Zoom</td>
<td>Displays the selected channel in full screen, and displays a small window in the right corner of the area you want to zoom.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3"><strong>n</strong></p>
<p>■■■Manual Record</td>
<td>Quick switch video mode for this channel (only in manual and stop mode switching).</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3">^^Manual Snap</td>
<td>This channel the display resolution of the images that are captured in real time.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>Audio Preview</td>
<td>To listen Open channel monitor.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3"><strong>E3 </strong></p>
<p>■■Voice Intercom</td>
<td>Open-channel intercom functions, support IPC and web and mobile client to talk.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3">^^Channel Set</td>
<td>Quickly enter and locate a channel management interface.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3">^^^Face Detection</td>
<td>Quickly enable a blank area in preview to show the people’s face detected by the camera. (As shown in Figure 4-3-1)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>«o&gt;</td>
<td>PTZ</td>
<td>Quickly enter PTZ control interface.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 4-2 Description of the Quick Setting Toolbar</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="818" height="460" class="wp-image-589" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-27.jpeg" alt="word image 562 27" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 745" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-27.jpeg 818w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-27-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-27-768x432.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 818px) 100vw, 818px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-3-1 Face Detection Preview and snapshot at right column</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark64"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark63"></a> Desktop shortcut menu</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>In preview mode you can right click mouse to access the desktop shortcut menu, as shown in gure 4-4.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="214" height="634" class="wp-image-590" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-28.jpeg" alt="word image 562 28" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 746" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-28.jpeg 214w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-28-101x300.jpeg 101w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 214px) 100vw, 214px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-4 Desktop shortcut menu</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Main menu: </strong>The main menu includes playback, setting, maintain, backup and shutdown.</li>
<li><strong>Password retrieval: </strong>Modify administrator password or Reset password by e-mail.</li>
<li><strong>Automatic channel config: </strong>When you right click mouse and choose Auto Channel Config, it means that HD DVR will auto add the IP cameras which in the same LAN.</li>
<li><strong>IP channel: </strong>It is a shortcut access to IP channel interface.</li>
<li><strong>Channel Status: </strong>It is a shortcut access to channel status interface.</li>
<li><strong>Playback: </strong>It is a shortcut access to video playback interface.</li>
<li><strong>Quick Record: </strong>You can check current channel status: “o” means it is not selected, “•” Means it is selected.</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="481" height="228" class="wp-image-591" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-29.jpeg" alt="word image 562 29" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 747" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-29.jpeg 481w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-29-300x142.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 481px) 100vw, 481px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-5 Quick Record</strong></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Items</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>Schedule</strong></td>
<td>Record according to the configuration.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>Manual</strong></td>
<td>Click the button and the according channel will record immediately regardless of the current state.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>Stop</strong></td>
<td>Click the stop button and the according channel will stop recording regardless of the current state.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table4-3Quick Record</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>PTZ control: </strong>Operation interface is as shown in figure4-6. The functions include: PTZ direction control, speed, zoom, focus, iris, setup operation, patrol between spots, pattern, border, tour.</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="232" height="241" class="wp-image-592" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-30.jpeg" alt="word image 562 30" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 748"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="221" height="211" class="wp-image-593" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-31.jpeg" alt="word image 562 31" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 749"></p>
<p>PTZ</p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-6 PTZ Control</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Coaxial control: </strong>Operation interface is as shown in figure4-7. You can operate the OSD menu through this way, be noted that the HD camera must support coaxial control.</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="320" height="253" class="wp-image-594" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-32.jpeg" alt="word image 562 32" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 750" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-32.jpeg 320w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-32-300x237.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 320px) 100vw, 320px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-7Coaxial Control</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Color setting: </strong>it is a shortcut to settings -&gt;Channel management -&gt;Image color settings window.</li>
<li><strong>Outputs adjust: </strong>it is a shortcut access to settings -&gt;System settings -&gt;Output control interfaces.</li>
<li><strong>Mute: </strong>The speaker mute switch, Icon means speaker turns on, icon □</li>
</ul>
<p>means</p>
<p>speaker turns off.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Version: </strong>It’s a shortcut access to the System version.</li>
<li><strong>Logout: </strong>Shutdown, restart system, logout menu user and switch user, as shown in</li>
</ul>
<p>figure 4-8.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="327" height="182" class="wp-image-595" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-33.jpeg" alt="word image 562 33" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 751" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-33.jpeg 327w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-33-300x167.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 327px) 100vw, 327px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-8 Logout</strong></p>
<p>• <strong>Screen switch: </strong>Preview in single screen/four screens/eight screens /nine screens /sixteen screens according to your choice.</p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark67"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark66"></a> 4.3 Settings</p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark70"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark69"></a> 4.3.1 System</p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark72"></a> 4.3.1.1General setting</p>
<p>Click on the &#8220;setting -&gt; System -&gt; General &#8220;into the general interface, as shown in <strong>Figure 4-9.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-9 General</strong></p>
<p>• <strong>Language: </strong>English, Simplified Chinese,Italian, Russian, Portuguese, Turkish, Polski, Arabic, Cesky.</p>
<p>• <strong>Time zone: </strong>Select your corresponding time zone here.</p>
<p>• <strong>System time</strong>: Set the system data and time.</p>
<p>• <strong>Date format</strong>: Choose the data format: YMD, MDY, DMY.</p>
<p>• <strong>Time format: </strong>Choose list separator of the data format: dot, beeline and solidus.</p>
<p>• <strong>Time Format: </strong>Choose time format: 24-hour or 12-hour.</p>
<p>• <strong>DST</strong>: Choose the summer time option and pop the dialog box as followed.</p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-9 DST (week)</strong></p>
<p>DST</p>
<p>Day of Week Date</p>
<p>Start: 0 2016 &#8211; 03 &#8211; 01 01 : 00</p>
<p>End: 0 2016| -10-01 01 : 00</p>
<p>OK ■ Cancel</p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-9 DST (date)</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="867" height="651" class="wp-image-596" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-34.jpeg" alt="word image 562 34" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 752" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-34.jpeg 867w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-34-300x225.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-34-768x577.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 867px) 100vw, 867px" /> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="470" height="171" class="wp-image-597" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-35.jpeg" alt="word image 562 35" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 753" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-35.jpeg 470w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-35-300x109.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 470px) 100vw, 470px" /></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Auto Logout: </strong>Set the latency time in 0-60. 0 means no latency time.</li>
<li><strong>Startup Wizard: </strong>The startup wizard can guide you to finish some important settings of</li>
</ul>
<p>the AHD DVR. You can also choose to skip this step.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Device No.: </strong>When you are using one remote control to control several HD DVRs, you can give a number to each HD DVR as address for your management.</li>
<li><strong>Host Name: </strong>HD DVR’s name</li>
<li><strong>Smart Display: </strong>it will display smart alarm line or area after you enable this function
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark74"></a> Display Setting</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Click on the &#8220;settings -&gt; System -&gt;Display&#8221; into the display setting interface, as shown in <strong>Figure 4-10</strong>. In this pare you can adjust video output parameters.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="867" height="489" class="wp-image-598" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-36.jpeg" alt="word image 562 36" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 754" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-36.jpeg 867w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-36-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-36-768x433.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 867px) 100vw, 867px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-10 Display</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark76"></a> Tour setting</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Click on the &#8220;settings -&gt; System -&gt;Tour&#8221; into the tour setting interface. As shown in <strong>Figure 4-11.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="687" height="515" class="wp-image-599" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-37.jpeg" alt="word image 562 37" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 755" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-37.jpeg 687w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-37-300x225.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 687px) 100vw, 687px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-11 Tour</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Enable Tour: </strong>Tour on or off</li>
<li><strong>Interval: </strong>Interval time setting, the range of values is from 5s to 120s.</li>
<li><strong>View: </strong>View checking about tour</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark78"></a> 4.3.1.4 Account</p>
<p>Click on &#8220;Setting -&gt; System -&gt;Account&#8221; into the account interface, as shown in <strong>figure 4-12. </strong>There are two default accounts in the HD DVR: <strong>admin/guest</strong>, admin’s default password is 1234567u while the other is empty. The account of admin is an administrator, it has the permission to add and delete any user and configure user parameters</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="867" height="489" class="wp-image-600" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-38.jpeg" alt="word image 562 38" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 756" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-38.jpeg 867w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-38-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-38-768x433.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 867px) 100vw, 867px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-12 Account</strong></p>
<p><strong><em>Note :</em></strong></p>
<ul>
<li><em>The character length of name is 64 bits at most for the following users and users&#8217; group. Legal characters include: letter and number, other characters are forbidden.</em></li>
<li><em>The user management includes: group/ user. One user should belong to one group.</em></li>
<li><strong>Add Group: </strong>Add a user group and set the permission. There are 73 different permissions: control panel, real time surveillance, playback, recording setup, video file backup and so on.</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="758" height="395" class="wp-image-601" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-39.jpeg" alt="word image 562 39" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 757" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-39.jpeg 758w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-39-300x156.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 758px) 100vw, 758px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-13 Add group</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Add user: </strong>Add a user in the group and set the user permission. Enter the menu</li>
</ul>
<p>interface and input the user name and password. Choose the group and choose whether</p>
<p>using “Reuseable” function, this function allows multiple users use the same account to</p>
<p>login. User’s right cannot exceed group’s right. We recommend that the common user’s</p>
<p>permission is lower than the advanced user.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="765" height="515" class="wp-image-602" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-40.jpeg" alt="word image 562 40" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 758" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-40.jpeg 765w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-40-300x202.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 765px) 100vw, 765px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-14 Add user</strong></p>
<p>• <strong>Modify Group: </strong>Modify the existing groups’ attribute, as shown in <strong>figure 4-15.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-15 Modify group</strong></p>
<p>• <strong>Modify User: </strong>click icon ——to modify the existing users’ attribute, as shown in <strong>figure</strong></p>
<p><strong>4-16.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-16 Modify User</strong></p>
<p>• <strong>Modify password: </strong>You can set password among 1-64 bytes, legal characters include letter and number, other characters are not forbidden, as shown in <strong>figure 4-17.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="866" height="488" class="wp-image-603" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-41.jpeg" alt="word image 562 41" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 759" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-41.jpeg 866w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-41-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-41-768x433.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 866px) 100vw, 866px" /> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="866" height="488" class="wp-image-604" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-42.jpeg" alt="word image 562 42" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 760" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-42.jpeg 866w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-42-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-42-768x433.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 866px) 100vw, 866px" /></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="867" height="489" class="wp-image-605" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-43.jpeg" alt="word image 562 43" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 761" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-43.jpeg 867w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-43-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-43-768x433.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 867px) 100vw, 867px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-17 Modify password</strong></p>
<p><strong><em>Note:</em></strong></p>
<p>&gt; <em>The user who possesses the user control permission can modify his/her own or other user&#8217;s password.</em></p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark80"></a> 4.3.1.5 Restart</p>
<p>Click on &#8220;Setting -&gt; System -&gt;Restart&#8221; into the graphical interface, as shown in <strong>figure 4-18.</strong>The user can set the auto reboot time to maintain the device.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="866" height="488" class="wp-image-606" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-44.jpeg" alt="word image 562 44" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 762" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-44.jpeg 866w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-44-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-44-768x433.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 866px) 100vw, 866px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-18 Restart</strong></p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark83"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark82"></a> 4.3.2 Network</p>
<p>Before the HD DVR connects to the Network, you need to configure the related settings of Network. In this chapter, we can set the basic network configuration, WIFI, 3G/4G, P2P, DDNS, UPNP, Email, FTP, NTP, Access control, etc.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark85"></a> Base</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Click on &#8220;Setting -&gt; Network -&gt; Base&#8221; into the network base settings interface, as shown in <strong>figure 4-19. </strong>This page you can set the device IP Address, gateway, DNS As well as view MAC Address.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="867" height="489" class="wp-image-607" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-45.jpeg" alt="word image 562 45" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 763" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-45.jpeg 867w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-45-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-45-768x433.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 867px) 100vw, 867px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-19 Basic Setting of Network</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>DHCP: </strong>Obtain IP address automatically.</li>
<li><strong>IP Address: </strong>Set the IP address of HD DVR. Default is 192.168.1.9</li>
<li><strong>Subnet Mask: </strong>Default is 255.255.255.0.</li>
<li><strong>Gateway: </strong>Default is 192.168.1.1.</li>
<li><strong>MAC: </strong>the physical address of HD DVR.</li>
<li><strong>DNS setup: </strong>Domain Name Server, it translates the domain name into IP address, it contain primary DNS and secondary DNS.</li>
<li><strong>Internal IP: </strong>Set the beginning of IP addresses of those IP Cameras connected to POE panel. Default is 192.168.3.10. Make sure that this value should not be at the same subnet with the IP address of HD DVR.</li>
<li><strong>Max Users: </strong>The maximum number of users can simultaneously access the HD DVR. Default value is 10.</li>
<li><strong>HS Download: </strong>Download at a high speed on the network side.</li>
<li><strong>Transfer Mode: </strong>There are three modes: Quality preferred, Fluency preferred and Adaptive. The code stream will adjust itself according to the setting, adaptive is the tradeoff between the image quality preferred and fluency preferred, fluency preferred and adaptive are valid only when the sub-stream is turned on, otherwise, quality preferred is valid.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong><em>Note:</em></strong></p>
<p>&gt; <em>You can&#8217;t set internal IP address if the HD DVR is not support POE function.</em></p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark87"></a> 4.3.2.2 WIFI</p>
<p>Click on &#8220;Setting -&gt; Network -&gt;WIFI&#8221; Into the WIFI setting interface. This interface will display the search to WIFI Name, signal strength and encryption. You need to prepare a WIFI and connect to the USB connector of the HD DVR.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="865" height="648" class="wp-image-608" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-46.jpeg" alt="word image 562 46" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 764" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-46.jpeg 865w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-46-300x225.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-46-768x575.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 865px) 100vw, 865px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-20 WIFI Setting</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Enable: </strong>WIFI Enabling switch</li>
<li><strong>DHCP: </strong>Automatically obtain the IP Addresses and gateways.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark89"></a> 4.3.2.3 3G/4G</p>
<p>Click on click on &#8220;Setting -&gt; Network -&gt;3G &#8220;Into the graphical interface. This page can be set 3G Function, Status, 3G Signal types, and Access point, Dial- number, User Name, Password, and 3G IP Addresses. You need to prepare a 3G/4G network Data Card and connect to the USB connector of the HD DVR. The User name and Password need to be supplied by your ISP.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="865" height="485" class="wp-image-609" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-47.jpeg" alt="word image 562 47" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 765" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-47.jpeg 865w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-47-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-47-768x431.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 865px) 100vw, 865px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-21 3G Setting</strong></p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark91"></a> 4.3.2.4 P2P</p>
<p>HD DVR can be connected to Cloud service and users can visit the HD DVR by its Cloud ID through Cellphone APP or the website<a href="http://www.elevatep2p.com/" rel="nofollow noopener" target="_blank"> www.elevatep2p.com.</a></p>
<p>Click on &#8220;Setting -&gt; Network -&gt;P2P &#8220;Into the graphical interface. This page shows the iPhone or Android APP download links, and the cloud ID Identification code.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="671" height="442" class="wp-image-610" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-48.jpeg" alt="word image 562 48" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 766" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-48.jpeg 671w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-48-300x198.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 671px) 100vw, 671px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-22 P2P Setting</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Enable:</strong>P2P Function enabling switch.</li>
<li><strong>Status: </strong>Display P2P status.</li>
<li><strong>Cloud ID: </strong>P2P Identification number.</li>
<li><strong>IE Web: </strong>The P2P web address.</li>
</ul>
<p>You can visit HD DVR by entering<a href="http://www.elevatep2p.com/" rel="nofollow noopener" target="_blank"> www.elevatep2p.com </a>in the Web Browser of your computer, and click the option <strong>By Device</strong>, fill in the blank with the serial code Cloud ID, and Username, Password of HD DVR.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark93"></a> DDNS</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>DDNS is a service that can be used to automatically update DNS records if client PCs get their IP settings from a DHCP Server. If DDNS function is enabled on HD DVR, you can access the HD DVR by domain name provided by Internet Service Provider (ISP) provider.</p>
<p>Prior registration with your ISP is required before configuring the system to use DDNS.</p>
<p>Click on &#8220;Setting -&gt; Network -&gt;DDNS &#8220;Into the graphical interface.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="866" height="490" class="wp-image-611" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-49.jpeg" alt="word image 562 49" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 767" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-49.jpeg 866w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-49-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-49-768x435.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 866px) 100vw, 866px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-23 DDNS Setting</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Enable: </strong>DDNS enabling switch.</li>
<li><strong>DDNS Type: </strong>ISP of DDNS, including Oray DDNS, CN99 DDNS, DynDNS DDNS, NO-IP DDNS. This option can be customized according to the requirement of users.</li>
<li><strong>Domain name: </strong>Fill in the domain name provided by ISP. Maximum 63 characters can be filled in.</li>
<li><strong>User name/Password: </strong>Fill in the username and password input corresponds to the domain name.
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark95"></a> UPNP</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>UPnP is a networking standard that uses protocols on the Internet to allow electronic devices connected to a network to detect and identify each other.</p>
<p>Click on &#8220;Setting -&gt; Network -&gt;UPNP &#8220;Into the graphical interface. This page can set up Media Port, HTTP Port and Handset Port. Check UPNP Is enabled, the external port can automatically obtain and use.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="867" height="486" class="wp-image-612" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-50.jpeg" alt="word image 562 50" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 768" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-50.jpeg 867w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-50-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-50-768x431.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 867px) 100vw, 867px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-24 UPNP Setting</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark97"></a> Email</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>The system can be configured to send an Email notification to all designated users if an alarm event is detected, etc.; an alarm or motion event is detected.</p>
<p>The network must be connected to the Internet in order to connect to the Email SMTP server.</p>
<p>Click on the &#8220;settings -&gt; Network -&gt;E-mail&#8221; into the graphical interface.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="865" height="487" class="wp-image-613" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-51.jpeg" alt="word image 562 51" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 769" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-51.jpeg 865w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-51-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-51-768x432.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 865px) 100vw, 865px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-25 E-mail Setting</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Enable: </strong>Enable the Email service.</li>
<li><strong>SMTP Server</strong>: The SMTP Server IP address or host name.</li>
<li><strong>SMTP Port</strong>: The SMTP port. The default TCP/IP port used for SMTP is 25.</li>
<li><strong>Open SSL</strong>: Click the checkbox to enable SSL if required by the SMTP server.</li>
<li><strong>User Name/Password: </strong>The username and password of the sender email accounts.</li>
<li><strong>Sender: </strong>Displayed by the recipient of the message sender email address.</li>
<li><strong>Title: </strong>The title displayed in the email.</li>
<li><strong>Receiver: </strong>The Email address of user to be notified (3 receivers at most).</li>
</ul>
<p>After finishing the setting, you can click the button <strong>MailTest </strong>to try to verify the email service is available, and click the button <strong>Apply </strong>to activate the configuration.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark99"></a> FTP</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can upload the record file onto a FTP server by configuring the FTP settings. It allows you to upload the record file by the record type and record time.</p>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Setting -&gt; Network -&gt;FTP &#8220;Into the graphical interface.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="866" height="485" class="wp-image-614" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-52.jpeg" alt="word image 562 52" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 770" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-52.jpeg 866w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-52-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-52-768x430.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 866px) 100vw, 866px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-26 FTP Setting</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>FTP setting: </strong>divided into video FTP and pictures FTP ,you can set up your server IP, port, user name, password, directory, file length, and there are the Anonymous option, and FTP Setting whether the testing successful.</li>
<li><strong>Channel setting: </strong>you can select the channel to transmit, set up on weekday, as well as the time period.</li>
</ul>
<p>After finishing the setting, you can click the button <strong>FTP Test </strong>to try to verify the FTP service is available, and <strong>Copy To </strong>button is used to copy the configuration of current channel to other channels. Click the button Apply to activate the configuration.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark101"></a> NTP</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>A Network Time Protocol (NTP) Server can be configured on your HD DVR to ensure the accuracy of system date/time.</p>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Setting -&gt; Network -&gt;NTP &#8220;Into the graphical interface. This page can be set NTP server IP, server port, update schedule.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="865" height="487" class="wp-image-615" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-53.jpeg" alt="word image 562 53" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 771" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-53.jpeg 865w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-53-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-53-768x432.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 865px) 100vw, 865px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-27 NTP Setting</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Enable: </strong>Enable the NTP service.</li>
<li><strong>Server IP</strong>: The NTP Server IP address or host name.</li>
<li><strong>Port</strong>: Port of NTP server.</li>
<li><strong>Update Schedule</strong>: Time interval between the two synchronizing actions with NTP server. The unit is minute.</li>
</ul>
<p>Click the button <strong>Save </strong>to save the configuration.</p>
<p><strong><em>Note:</em></strong></p>
<p>&gt; <em>The time synchronization interval can be set from 1 to 65535min, and the default value is 10 min. If the HD DVR is connected to a public network, you should use a NTP server that has a time synchronization function, such as the server at the National Time Center.</em></p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark103"></a> 4.3.2.10 Access</p>
<p>In this chapter by setting the IP address to be blocked and trusted, you can block specific IP address or allow some trusted IP.</p>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Setting -&gt; Network -&gt; Access &#8220;into the graphical interface.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="825" height="466" class="wp-image-616" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-54.jpeg" alt="word image 562 54" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 772" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-54.jpeg 825w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-54-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-54-768x434.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 825px) 100vw, 825px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-28 Access</strong></p>
<p>• <strong>Blocked Sites: </strong>The IP Addresses which are added to blocked sites are not allowed to login HD DVR.</p>
<p>• <strong>Trusted Sites: </strong>Only the IP Addresses which are added to trusted sites are allowed to login HD DVR.</p>
<p>You can add IP or delete IP by clicking <strong>Add IP </strong>and <strong>Delete IP </strong>buttons. After the operation is finished, click the <strong>Save </strong>button.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark105"></a> Cloud Storage</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>In this chapter, you can set the Cloud Storage to upload your videos and picture recorded by your cameras.</p>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Setting -&gt; Network -&gt;Cloud Storage &#8220;into the graphical interface.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="797" height="599" class="wp-image-617" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-55.jpeg" alt="word image 562 55" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 773" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-55.jpeg 797w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-55-300x225.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-55-768x577.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 797px) 100vw, 797px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-29 Cloud Storage</strong></p>
<p>• <strong>Upload directory: </strong>The directory in your cloud storage where the videos and pictures to be saved, if not set, the video file will be saved at the root directory directly.</p>
<p>• <strong>File length: </strong>The space spared to save videos and pictures, the default number is ‘0’, which means the space will save the whole video and picture file as much as the original video file.</p>
<p>• <strong>Chanel: </strong>Choose which channel to upload video or picture.</p>
<p>• <strong>Upload type: </strong>Choose picture or video to be uploaded, and choose the type of the file, the type can be ‘Normal’ or ‘Event’.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark107"></a> SNMP</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an<a href="https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Internet_protocol_suite" rel="nofollow noopener" target="_blank"> Internet-standard protocol </a>for collecting and organizing information about managed devices on<a href="https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Internet_Protocol" rel="nofollow noopener" target="_blank"> IP </a>networks and for modifying that information to change device behavior.</p>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Set -&gt; Network -&gt;SNMP &#8220;into the SNMP configuration interface. There are 3 versions in SNMP. V1/V2 are shown in <strong>figure 4-30.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-30 SNMP V1/V2</strong></p>
<p>V1/V2 is basic encryption method, V3 is advanced one with more complicated encryption, as shown in <strong>figure 4-31.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-30 SNMP V3</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="788" height="592" class="wp-image-618" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-56.jpeg" alt="word image 562 56" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 774" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-56.jpeg 788w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-56-300x225.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-56-768x577.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 788px) 100vw, 788px" /> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="788" height="592" class="wp-image-619" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-57.jpeg" alt="word image 562 57" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 775" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-57.jpeg 788w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-57-300x225.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-57-768x577.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 788px) 100vw, 788px" /></p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark109"></a> 4.3.2.13 Multicast</p>
<p>In computer networking, multicast (one-to-many or many-to-many distribution) is group communication where information is addressed to a group of destination computers simultaneously.</p>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Set -&gt; Network -&gt;SNMP &#8220;into the SNMP configuration interface, set the Multicast IP and Multicast port within the required range. If different source devices want to apply the multicast, the multicast IP should be DIFFERENT. In the last, enable the function and apply. As shown in <strong>figure 4-32.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="789" height="592" class="wp-image-620" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-58.jpeg" alt="word image 562 58" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 776" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-58.jpeg 789w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-58-300x225.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-58-768x576.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 789px) 100vw, 789px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-32 Multicast</strong></p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark112"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark111"></a> 4.3.3 Alarm</p>
<p>The HD DVR supports video detection alarm, including motion detection, masking detection, video lost detection. And also exception warnings such as HDD error, no writable disk, disk no space, network disconnection or IP conflicted.</p>
<p><strong><em>Note:</em></strong></p>
<p>&gt; <em>Video detection should be supported by the IP Camera, so please refer the User Manual of IP Camera to confirm the video detection types. If the IP Camera does not support some types of the video detection, the configuration on the HD DVR would be unable to activate.</em></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark114"></a> Motion Detection</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Motion detection is to detect the movement of the channel. If any movement appears in the surveillance area, the HD DVR will detect it and respond according to the settings.</p>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Setting -&gt; Alarm -&gt; Motion&#8221; into the setting interface.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="685" height="515" class="wp-image-621" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-59.jpeg" alt="word image 562 59" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 777" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-59.jpeg 685w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-59-300x226.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 685px) 100vw, 685px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-33 Motion Detect</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Channel: </strong>Select the channel.</li>
<li><strong>Enable: </strong>Motion detection-enabled switch.</li>
<li><strong>Schedule: </strong>Set the time slot of motion detection. Here it supports 6 time slots at most. You can copy the setting to other days: click <strong>Copy</strong>, and select another weekday, click <strong>Paste </strong>to have it configured as the former one. Click <strong>Default </strong>to clear all the settings. (as shown in figure 4-31)</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="598" height="458" class="wp-image-622" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-60.jpeg" alt="word image 562 60" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 778" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-60.jpeg 598w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-60-300x230.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 598px) 100vw, 598px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-34 Schedule Setting</strong></p>
<p>• <strong>Interval: </strong>Set the time interval of each motion detection triggered.</p>
<p>• <strong>Trigger process: </strong>Set the handling action of motion detection, including alarm output, alarm delay, show massage, buzzer, send Email, record channels and record delay, PTZ act, tour and Snapshot. (as shown in <strong>figure 4-35</strong>). Maximum 4 channels can be chosen when you select the Snapshot.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="675" height="449" class="wp-image-623" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-61.jpeg" alt="word image 562 61" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 779" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-61.jpeg 675w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-61-300x200.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-61-600x400.jpeg 600w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 675px) 100vw, 675px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-35 Event Process</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Sensitivity: </strong>Set Sensitivity of motion detection, range from 1 to 6.</li>
</ul>
<p>You need to select the surveillance area on the screen, by click and drag the mouse, or you can click the button <strong>Select All </strong>to select all the surveillance area, or click the button <strong>Clear </strong>to reset the button:</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="771" height="263" class="wp-image-624" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-62.jpeg" alt="word image 562 62" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 780" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-62.jpeg 771w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-62-300x102.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-62-768x262.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 771px) 100vw, 771px" /> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="377" height="256" class="wp-image-625" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-63.jpeg" alt="word image 562 63" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 781" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-63.jpeg 377w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-63-300x204.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 377px) 100vw, 377px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-36 Select partially</strong></p>
<p>Click <strong>Apply </strong>button to save the settings.</p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-37 Select All</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark116"></a> Intelligent Detection</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="682" height="511" class="wp-image-626" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-64.jpeg" alt="word image 562 64" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 782" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-64.jpeg 682w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-64-300x225.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 682px) 100vw, 682px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-38 Intelligent Detection</strong></p>
<p>In this section UVR support different types of analyses when connect Qualvision IPC by private protocol. But only Line Crossing and Area Intrusion can be used in analogy channels after user enable the smart channel setting in part 4.3.5.1.3;</p>
<p><strong><em>Note:</em></strong></p>
<p>&gt; <em>The sum of the smart analyze may differ from different UVR product Line, but the principle is same;</em></p>
<p>&gt; we need IPC support corresponding smat analyses function from Qualvision.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark119"></a> Line Crossing</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Crossing detection is used to detect the object crossing the set virtual line. The direction can be set as bidirectional, or from side A to B, or from side B to A. If there&#8217;s object move from one side to another, it will trigger the alarm and the NVR will respond those actions as configured, such as record, show message, send email, etc.</p>
<p>Click on the &#8220;setting -&gt; Alarm -&gt; Intelligent detection -&gt; Line Crossing&#8221; into the graphical interface.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="751" height="558" class="wp-image-627" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-65.jpeg" alt="word image 562 65" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 783" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-65.jpeg 751w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-65-300x223.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 751px) 100vw, 751px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-39 Line Crossing</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Channel: </strong>Select the channel.</li>
<li><strong>Enable: </strong>Crossing detection enabled switch.</li>
<li><strong>Schedule: </strong>Set the time slot to detect crossing. You can take the setting of chapter 4.3.3.1 motion detection for reference.</li>
<li><strong>Interval: </strong>Set the time interval of each crossing detection triggered.</li>
<li><strong>Trigger process: </strong>Set the handling action of crossing detection; please take the setting of chapter 4.3.3.1 motion detection for reference.</li>
</ul>
<p>You can add virtual line to the surveillance area like following steps:</p>
<ol>
<li>Choose the line number, the maximum number of the line is 4.</li>
<li>Select the direction: A&lt;-&gt;B, A-&gt;B, B-&gt;A.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>A&lt;-&gt;B: </strong>Only the arrow on the B side shows; when an object going across the configured line with both direction can be detected and alarms are triggered.</p>
<p><strong>A-&gt;B: </strong>Only the object crossing the configured line from the A side to the B side can be detected.</p>
<p><strong>B-&gt;A: </strong>Only the object crossing the configured line from the B side to the A side can be detected.</p>
<ol>
<li>Adjust the sensitivity. Range from 1-100.The higher the value is, the more easily the detection alarm can be triggered.</li>
<li>Click the Apply button to save the settings.</li>
</ol>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="550" height="345" class="wp-image-628" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-66.jpeg" alt="word image 562 66" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 784" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-66.jpeg 550w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-66-300x188.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-66-160x100.jpeg 160w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 550px) 100vw, 550px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-39-1 Add Virtual Line</strong></p>
<p>After all the settings finished, click the button <strong>Apply </strong>to activate all the settings.</p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark121"></a> 4.3.3.2.2 Area Intrusion</p>
<p>Area Intrusion detection function detects people, vehicle or other objects which enter in a pre-defined virtual region from outside, and some certain actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.</p>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Setting -&gt; Alarm -&gt; Intelligent detection -&gt; Area Intrusion &#8220;into the graphical interface.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="745" height="559" class="wp-image-629" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-67.jpeg" alt="word image 562 67" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 785" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-67.jpeg 745w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-67-300x225.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 745px) 100vw, 745px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-40 Area Intrusion</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Channel: </strong>Select the channel.</li>
<li><strong>Enable: </strong>Intrusion detection enabled switch.</li>
<li><strong>Schedule: </strong>Set the time slot to detect intrusion. You can take the setting of chapter 4.3.3.1 motion detection for reference.</li>
<li><strong>Interval: </strong>Set the time interval of each intrusion detection triggered.</li>
<li><strong>Trigger process: </strong>Set the handling action of intrusion detection; please take the setting of chapter 4.3.3.1 motion detection for reference.</li>
</ul>
<p>You can add virtual area to the surveillance area like following steps:</p>
<ol>
<li>Choose the area number, the maximum number of the area is 4.</li>
<li>Set detect time threshold. For example, if you set the time threshold is 5 seconds and</li>
</ol>
<p>someone intrude your area about 3 seconds alarm cannot be triggered.</p>
<ol>
<li>Adjust the sensitivity. Range from 1-100. The higher the value is, the more easily the detection alarm can be triggered.</li>
<li>Percent. Range from 1-100. For example, if you set the percent is 50, alarm will be triggered only when the area be intruded more than half.</li>
<li>Click the Apply button to save the settings.</li>
</ol>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="741" height="467" class="wp-image-630" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-68.jpeg" alt="word image 562 68" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 786" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-68.jpeg 741w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-68-300x189.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-68-160x100.jpeg 160w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 741px) 100vw, 741px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-40-1 Set Intrusion Zone</strong></p>
<p>After all the settings finished, click the button <strong>Apply </strong>to activate all the settings.</p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark123"></a> 4.3.3.2.3 Region Entrance</p>
<p>Region Entrance function detects people, vehicle or other objects which enter in a forbidden pre-defined virtual region from outside, and some certain actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.</p>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Setting-&gt; Alarm-&gt;Intelligent detection -&gt; Region Entrance&#8221; into the graphical interface.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="745" height="558" class="wp-image-631" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-69.jpeg" alt="word image 562 69" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 787" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-69.jpeg 745w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-69-300x225.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 745px) 100vw, 745px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-41 Region Entrance</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Channel: </strong>Select the channel.</li>
<li><strong>Enable: </strong>Intrusion detection enabled switch.</li>
<li><strong>Schedule: </strong>Set the time slot to detect intrusion. You can take the setting of chapter 4.3.3.1 motion detection for reference.</li>
<li><strong>Interval: </strong>Set the time interval of each intrusion detection triggered.</li>
<li><strong>Trigger process: </strong>Set the handling action of intrusion detection; please take the setting of chapter 4.3.3.1 motion detection for reference.</li>
</ul>
<p>You can add virtual area to the surveillance area like following steps:</p>
<ol>
<li>.Choose the area number, the maximum number of the area is 4.</li>
<li>.Adjust the sensitivity. Range from 1-100. The higher the value is, the more easily the detection alarm can be triggered.</li>
<li>.Click the Apply button to save the settings.</li>
</ol>
<p>After all the settings finished, click the button <strong>Apply </strong>to activate all the settings.</p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark125"></a> 4.3.3.2.4 Region Exiting</p>
<p>Region Exiting function detects people, vehicle or other objects which exit a forbidden pre-defined virtual region from inside, and some certain actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.</p>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Setting -&gt; Alarm -&gt; Intelligent detection -&gt; Region Exiting &#8220;into the graphical interface.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="707" height="530" class="wp-image-632" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-70.jpeg" alt="word image 562 70" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 788" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-70.jpeg 707w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-70-300x225.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 707px) 100vw, 707px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-42 Region Exiting</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Channel: </strong>Select the channel.</li>
<li><strong>Enable: </strong>Intrusion detection enabled switch.</li>
<li><strong>Schedule: </strong>Set the time slot to detect intrusion. You can take the setting of chapter 4.3.3.1 motion detection for reference.</li>
<li><strong>Interval: </strong>Set the time interval of each intrusion detection triggered.</li>
<li><strong>Trigger process: </strong>Set the handling action of intrusion detection; please take the setting of chapter 4.3.3.1 motion detection for reference.</li>
</ul>
<p>You can add virtual area to the surveillance area like following steps:</p>
<ol>
<li>.Choose the area number, the maximum number of the area is 4.</li>
<li>.Adjust the sensitivity. Range from 1-100. The higher the value is, the more easily the detection alarm can be triggered.</li>
<li>.Click the Apply button to save the settings.</li>
</ol>
<p>After all the settings finished, click the button <strong>Apply </strong>to activate all the settings.</p>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark127"></a> .3.3.2.5 Fast Moving</li>
</ol>
<p>Fast Moving function detects people, vehicle and some other objects that move with forbidden speed, and some certain actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.</p>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Setting -&gt; Alarm -&gt; Intelligent detection -&gt; Fast Moving &#8220;into the graphical interface.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="766" height="576" class="wp-image-633" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-71.jpeg" alt="word image 562 71" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 789" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-71.jpeg 766w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-71-300x226.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 766px) 100vw, 766px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-43 Fast Moving</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Channel: </strong>Select the channel.</li>
<li><strong>Enable: </strong>Intrusion detection enabled switch.</li>
<li><strong>Schedule: </strong>Set the time slot to detect intrusion. You can take the setting of chapter</li>
</ul>
<p>4.3.3.1 motion detection for reference.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Interval: </strong>Set the time interval of each intrusion detection triggered.</li>
<li><strong>Trigger process: </strong>Set the handling action of intrusion detection; please take the setting</li>
</ul>
<p>of chapter 4.3.3.1 motion detection for reference.</p>
<p>You can add virtual area to the surveillance area like following steps:</p>
<ol>
<li>.Choose the area number, the maximum number of the area is 4.</li>
<li>.Adjust the sensitivity. Range from 1-100. The higher the value is, the more easily the detection alarm can be triggered.</li>
<li>.Click the Apply button to save the settings.</li>
</ol>
<p>After all the settings finished, click the button <strong>Apply </strong>to activate all the settings.</p>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark129"></a> .3.3.2.6 Unattended Object</li>
</ol>
<p>Unattended Object function detect articles that left in a certain pre-defined virtual region, and some certain actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.</p>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Setting -&gt; Alarm -&gt; Intelligent detection -&gt; Object Abandoned &#8220;into the graphical interface.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="746" height="559" class="wp-image-634" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-72.jpeg" alt="word image 562 72" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 790" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-72.jpeg 746w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-72-300x225.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 746px) 100vw, 746px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-44 Unattended Object</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Channel: </strong>Select the channel.</li>
<li><strong>Enable: </strong>Intrusion detection enabled switch.</li>
<li><strong>Schedule: </strong>Set the time slot to detect intrusion. You can take the setting of chapter 4.3.3.1 motion detection for reference.</li>
<li><strong>Interval: </strong>Set the time interval of each intrusion detection triggered.</li>
<li><strong>Trigger process: </strong>Set the handling action of intrusion detection; please take the setting of chapter 4.3.3.1 motion detection for reference.</li>
</ul>
<p>You can add virtual area to the surveillance area like following steps:</p>
<ol>
<li>.Choose the area number, the maximum number of the area is 4.</li>
<li>.Adjust the sensitivity. Range from 1-100. The higher the value is, the more easily the detection alarm can be triggered.</li>
<li>.Set detect time threshold. For example, if you set the time threshold is 5 seconds and someone intrude your area about 3 seconds alarm cannot be triggered.</li>
<li>.Click the Apply button to save the settings.</li>
</ol>
<p>After all the settings finished, click the button <strong>Apply </strong>to activate all the settings.</p>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark131"></a> .3.3.2.6 Object Missing</li>
</ol>
<p>Object Missing function detect articles that missing in a certain pre-defined virtual region, and some certain actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.</p>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Setting -&gt; Alarm -&gt; Intelligent detection -&gt; Object Missing &#8220;into the graphical interface.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="705" height="530" class="wp-image-635" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-73.jpeg" alt="word image 562 73" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 791" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-73.jpeg 705w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-73-300x226.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 705px) 100vw, 705px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-45 Object Missing</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Channel: </strong>Select the channel.</li>
<li><strong>Enable: </strong>Intrusion detection enabled switch.</li>
<li><strong>Schedule: </strong>Set the time slot to detect intrusion. You can take the setting of chapter 4.3.3.1 motion detection for reference.</li>
<li><strong>Interval: </strong>Set the time interval of each intrusion detection triggered.</li>
<li><strong>Trigger process: </strong>Set the handling action of intrusion detection; please take the setting of chapter 4.3.3.1 motion detection for reference.</li>
</ul>
<p>You can add virtual area to the surveillance area like following steps:</p>
<ol>
<li>.Choose the area number, the maximum number of the area is 4.</li>
<li>.Adjust the sensitivity. Range from 1-100. The higher the value is, the more easily the detection alarm can be triggered.</li>
<li>.Set detect time threshold. For example, if you set the time threshold is 5 seconds and someone intrude your area about 3 seconds alarm cannot be triggered.</li>
<li>.Click the Apply button to save the settings.</li>
</ol>
<p>After all the settings finished, click the button <strong>Apply </strong>to activate all the settings.</p>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark133"></a> .3.3.2.6 Face Detection</li>
</ol>
<p>Face detection function detect peoples’ faces in a certain pre-defined virtual region, and some certain actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.</p>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Setting -&gt; Alarm -&gt; Intelligent detection -&gt; Face Detection &#8220;into the graphical interface.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="674" height="505" class="wp-image-636" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-74.jpeg" alt="word image 562 74" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 792" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-74.jpeg 674w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-74-300x225.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 674px) 100vw, 674px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-46 Face Detection</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Channel: </strong>Select the channel.</li>
<li><strong>Enable: </strong>Face Detection enabled switch.</li>
<li><strong>Schedule: </strong>Set the time slot to detect intrusion. You can take the setting of chapter 4.3.3.1 motion detection for reference.</li>
<li><strong>Interval: </strong>Set the time interval of Face Detection triggered.</li>
<li><strong>Action: </strong>Set the handling action of intrusion detection; please take the setting of</li>
</ul>
<p>chapter 4.3.3.1 motion detection for reference.</p>
<p>You can add virtual area to the surveillance area like following steps:</p>
<ol>
<li>Choose the area number, the maximum number of the area is 4.</li>
<li>Adjust the sensitivity. Range from 1-100. The higher the value is, the more easily the detection alarm can be triggered.</li>
<li>Click the Apply button to save the settings.</li>
</ol>
<p>After all the settings finished, click the button <strong>Apply </strong>to activate all the settings.</p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark135"></a> 4.3.3.4 Masking</p>
<p>Detect video masked on a channel and take alarm response actions.</p>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Settings -&gt; Alarm -&gt;Masking&#8221; into the graphical interface.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="704" height="431" class="wp-image-637" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-75.jpeg" alt="word image 562 75" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 793" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-75.jpeg 704w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-75-300x184.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 704px) 100vw, 704px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-47 Masking</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Channel: </strong>Select the channel.</li>
<li><strong>Enable: </strong>Video masking enabled switch.</li>
<li><strong>Schedule: </strong>Set the time slot to detect video masking. You can take the setting of chapter 4.3.3.1 motion detection for reference.</li>
<li><strong>Trigger process: </strong>Set the handling action of masking detection; please take the setting of chapter 4.3.3.1 motion detection for reference.</li>
</ul>
<p>After all the settings finished, click the button <strong>Apply </strong>to activate all the settings.</p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark137"></a> 4.3.3.5 Video Lost</p>
<p>Detect video loss of a channel and take alarm response actions.</p>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Settings -&gt; Alarm -&gt; video lost &#8220;into the graphical interface.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="786" height="443" class="wp-image-638" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-76.jpeg" alt="word image 562 76" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 794" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-76.jpeg 786w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-76-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-76-768x433.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 786px) 100vw, 786px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-48 Video Loss</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Channel: </strong>Select the channel.</li>
<li><strong>Enable: </strong>Video loss enabled switch.</li>
<li><strong>Schedule: </strong>Set time slot to detect video loss.</li>
<li><strong>Trigger process: </strong>Set the handling action of video loss detection; please take the setting of chapter 4.3.3.1 motion detection for reference.</li>
</ul>
<p>After all the settings finished, click the button <strong>Apply </strong>to activate all the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark139"></a> Port</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Set the handling action of external sensor alarms, including alarm input and alarm output.</p>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Settings -&gt; Alarm -&gt;Port &#8220;into the graphic interface</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="737" height="415" class="wp-image-639" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-77.jpeg" alt="word image 562 77" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 795" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-77.jpeg 737w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-77-300x169.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 737px) 100vw, 737px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-49 Port</strong></p>
<p>Alarm input device is a kind of device which can detect the surveillance area by some sensors such as infrared sensor or temperature sensor, and when the environment is been changed, the sensor will detect information and alter the status.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Name: </strong>Set the name of the Alarm input device.</li>
<li><strong>Type: </strong>Normal Open/Normal Close. It means the system support those external sensor alarms which have two statuses: Open and Close. When the status switches from Open -&gt; Close, or from Close-&gt;Open, alarm will be triggered.</li>
<li><strong>Enable: </strong>Alarm in enabled switch.</li>
<li><strong>Schedule: </strong>Set time slot to detect video loss.</li>
<li><strong>Interval: </strong>Set the time interval of each Alarm in triggered.</li>
<li><strong>Trigger process: </strong>Set the handling action of alarm in detection; please take the setting of chapter 4.3.3.1 motion detection for reference.</li>
</ul>
<p>Alarm output device is a kind of device which can output warning signal such as sound or light, to remind the user that there&#8217;s alarm are triggered.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Name: </strong>Set the name of the Alarm output device.</li>
<li><strong>Type: </strong>Three types: Schedule/Manual/Stop. Schedule means the alarm output device will be activated when the NVR detects the alarm. Manual means the alarm output device will be activated after choosing the Manual and press the button Apply. Stop means the alarm output device is not on-guard.</li>
</ul>
<p>After all the settings finished, click the button <strong>Apply </strong>to activate all the settings. You can also click <strong>Copy to </strong>to copy the setting to another port shown as Figure 4-47.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="512" height="228" class="wp-image-640" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-78.jpeg" alt="word image 562 78" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 796" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-78.jpeg 512w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-78-300x134.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 512px) 100vw, 512px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-50 Copy to</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark141"></a> Abnormality</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Exception settings refer to the handling action of various exceptions, including No writable disk, Disk error, Disk no space, Network Disconnection, IP Conflicted.</p>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Settings -&gt; Alarm-&gt; Exception &#8220;into the graphical interface.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="716" height="537" class="wp-image-641" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-79.jpeg" alt="word image 562 79" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 797" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-79.jpeg 716w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-79-300x225.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 716px) 100vw, 716px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-51 Exception Alarm</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>No writable disk: </strong>If all HDD are set to only read, this exception will be triggered. It supports these methods to remind the user about the exception: Show Message, Buzzer, Send Email and Alarm Out.</li>
<li><strong>Disk Error: </strong>If writing HDD error or DHH is unformatted, this exception will be triggered. It supports these methods to remind the user about the exception: Show Message and Buzzer.</li>
<li><strong>Disk No Space: </strong>You can set minimum percentage of hard disk space. The handling actions of this exception are Show Message, Buzzer, Send Email and Alarm Out.</li>
<li><strong>Network Disconnection: </strong>If network is disconnected, this exception will be triggered. It supports these methods to remind the user about the exception: Show Message, Buzzer and Alarm out.</li>
<li><strong>IP Conflicted: </strong>Contain If IP conflict with other device at the same network, exception will be triggered. It supports these methods to remind the user about the exception: Show Message, Buzzer and Alarm out.</li>
<li><strong>S.M.A.R.T: </strong>This exception is about HDD health detection. It will be triggered when the HDD of device have some problems and not work under good condition. It supports these methods to remind the user about the exception: Show Message and Buzzer.</li>
</ul>
<p>After all the settings finished, click the button <strong>Apply </strong>to activate all the settings.</p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark144"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark143"></a> 4.3.4 Record</p>
<p>In this chapter we can make the schedule for the record by configuring the related parameters, and before these operations, please make sure that the HDD has already been installed and formatted. If not, please install the HDD and initialize it. For detailed information, please refer to chapter: Maintain-&gt;HDD management.</p>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Setting -&gt;Record -&gt;Schedule&#8221; into the graphical interface.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="865" height="649" class="wp-image-642" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-80.jpeg" alt="word image 562 80" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 798" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-80.jpeg 865w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-80-300x225.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-80-768x576.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 865px) 100vw, 865px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-52 Record Plan Setting</strong></p>
<p>On this schedule setting screen, we can set the record schedule for specific channels.</p>
<p>• <strong>Channel: </strong>Select the channel to configure</p>
<p>• <strong>Sub stream: </strong>To record as both main stream and sub stream. &lt;Only some models support sub stream record&gt;</p>
<p>• <strong>Pre-Record: </strong>The time to be pre-record on the created videos. Range from 0-30 seconds. Maximum 30s pre-record can be supported for each channel.</p>
<p>• <strong>Redundancy: </strong>The record will be backed up in redundant HDD, if there is redundant HDD device installed in the system. Please check the chapter 4.4.3 for the details.</p>
<p><strong><em>Note:</em></strong></p>
<p>&gt; <em>If there are several channels to be set with pre-record function, the pre-record time will be less than 30 seconds (the maximum value), because pre-record function will consume the system resources and it will adjust the time length to support many channels at the same time.</em></p>
<p>You can click the button <strong>Edit </strong>to enter the edit screen and set the schedule of the record.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="614" height="419" class="wp-image-643" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-81.jpeg" alt="word image 562 81" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 799" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-81.jpeg 614w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-81-300x205.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 614px) 100vw, 614px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-53 Record Plan Edit</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Week Day: </strong>The day to set the schedule, from Sunday to Saturday.</li>
<li><strong>Schedule 1-6</strong>: The time slot for the record, you can set 6 time slots during one day.</li>
<li><strong>Norm.</strong>: The type of the record, record as normal video.</li>
<li><strong>MD: </strong>The type of the record, record as motion detection video.</li>
<li><strong>Alarm: </strong>The type of the record, record as alarm video.</li>
</ul>
<p>You can check the All to select all the week day and set the schedule at the same time, or check several of them. If Norm, MD and Alarm are checked at the same time, it will record as a priority like: Alarm &gt; MD &gt; Norm. That means if the three type of detection occurred at the same time, the type of the record will be set as Alarm video.</p>
<p>You can also edit the schedule on the configuration graph screen, as shown in <strong>Figure 4-42.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="734" height="336" class="wp-image-644" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-82.jpeg" alt="word image 562 82" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 800" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-82.jpeg 734w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-82-300x137.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 734px) 100vw, 734px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-54 Edit graph</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>By selecting the checkbox on the right we can edit the corresponding bar on the left. For example, if we check the MD, and edit the corresponding bar, we will be able to edit the yellow part of the bar.</li>
<li>By clicking the icon eraser^ J , we can clear the setting of the bar at once.</li>
</ol>
<p>After all the settings finished, click the button <strong>Apply </strong>to activate all the settings.</p>
<p>You can copy the current channel setting to other channels by clicking the button <strong>Copy To</strong>. As shown in <strong>Figure 4-43.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="577" height="237" class="wp-image-645" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-83.jpeg" alt="word image 562 83" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 801" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-83.jpeg 577w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-83-300x123.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 577px) 100vw, 577px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-55 Copy To</strong></p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark118"></a> By clicking the button <strong>Default</strong>, you can reset all the settings.</p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark146"></a> 4.3.5 Channel</p>
<p>In this chapter you can do channel management. You can set channel type and protocols for each HD camera channel; also you can add the IP Cameras into the corresponding channel. Set encode, adjust the parameters of the Cameras, and set the OSD menu, privacy masking and PTZ functions. Before adding the IP Cameras to HD DVR corresponding channels, please make sure that the IP Cameras and HD DVR are in the same network, and IP Cameras are in active status.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark148"></a> Channel type</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Setting -&gt; Channel -&gt;Channel type&#8221; into the graphical interface. Where you can set the channel type and set the protocol for each HD camera. Without click “OK” button to confirm it won’t work when you change the channel type.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark150"></a> Channel set</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Setting -&gt; Channel -&gt;Channel type-&gt;channel set&#8221;. You can set the camera type for</p>
<p>turn to□. And</p>
<p>each channel, shown as figure 4-44, when the channel is configured, thel I will the protocol for each channel can be detected automatically and be displayed in the channel interface.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="720" height="541" class="wp-image-646" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-84.jpeg" alt="word image 562 84" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 802" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-84.jpeg 720w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-84-300x225.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 720px) 100vw, 720px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-56 channel set</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark152"></a> Protocol set</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Setting -&gt; Channel -&gt;Channel type-&gt;protocol set&#8221;. You can set the protocol for each HD channel, shown as figure 4-45, the HD DVR support AHD, TVI, CVI, CVBS.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="721" height="541" class="wp-image-647" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-85.jpeg" alt="word image 562 85" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 803" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-85.jpeg 721w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-85-300x225.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 721px) 100vw, 721px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-57 protocol set</strong></p>
<p><strong><em>Note:</em></strong></p>
<p>&gt; <em>The HD DVR can detect AHD, TVI and CVI HD camera automatically.</em></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark154"></a> Smart channel</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="763" height="573" class="wp-image-648" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-86.jpeg" alt="word image 562 86" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 804" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-86.jpeg 763w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-86-300x225.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 763px) 100vw, 763px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-58 Smart channel</strong></p>
<p>Here user can enable the smart channel function in channel type. Then in intelligent detection, there are two smart function types: Line Crossing &amp; Area intrusion. User can enable them with any brand analog cameras and any video signal format. Please refer to Part 4.3.3 Alarm.</p>
<p><strong><em>Note:</em></strong></p>
<p>&gt; <em>When the setting of smart channel changed, the device will restart to take the settings into</em></p>
<p><em>effect.</em></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark156"></a> IP Channel</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Setting -&gt; Channel -&gt;IP channel&#8221; into the graphical interface. This page also shows the information of real-time network bandwidth usage.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="688" height="519" class="wp-image-649" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-87.jpeg" alt="word image 562 87" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 805" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-87.jpeg 688w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-87-300x226.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 688px) 100vw, 688px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-59 IP Channel Setting</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark158"></a> Device edit</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>The list above shows the channel name for each channel, IP Address, connection protocols, connection status, and includes:</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Delete: </strong>Delete the IPC highlighted. Also you can click the icon <strong>^3 </strong>to delete the IP</li>
</ul>
<p>camera.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Clear All: </strong>Clear all the connected IPCs.</li>
<li><strong>Encode: </strong>Settings for the connected IPC fast encode settings. As shown in figure 4-47.</li>
</ul>
<p>Encode For the details, please refer to chapter 4.3.5.3 Encode.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="591" height="393" class="wp-image-650" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-88.jpeg" alt="word image 562 88" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 806" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-88.jpeg 591w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-88-300x199.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 591px) 100vw, 591px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-60 Encode Config</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Copy to: </strong>You can choose to copy some IPC Parameters to the remaining number of channels. As shown below<strong>.</strong></li>
</ul>
<p>Copy To</p>
<p><strong>All</strong></p>
<p>User Name Password Type</p>
<p><strong>Device Address Protocol</strong></p>
<p>Port Time sync</p>
<p>All</p>
<p>2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12<br />
13 14 15 16</p>
<p>Exit</p>
<p>OK</p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-61 Copy To</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Edit: </strong>Click the iconu , and enter the screen of Edit. Select channel, enter the user</li>
</ul>
<p>name and password of the IP Camera, select the time sync type, connection protocol type, modify or add IP address, port number. As shown in <strong>figure 4-49.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="526" height="435" class="wp-image-651" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-89.jpeg" alt="word image 562 89" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 807" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-89.jpeg 526w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-89-300x248.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 526px) 100vw, 526px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-62 IPC Edit</strong></p>
<p><strong>Preview: </strong>Click the iconL3, and you can see a preview of the connected channel IPC.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Upgrade: </strong>Click the icon □, and upgrade IPC connected. As shown in <strong>figure 4-50.</strong></li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="670" height="404" class="wp-image-652" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-90.jpeg" alt="word image 562 90" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 808" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-90.jpeg 670w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-90-300x181.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 670px) 100vw, 670px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-63 IPC upgrade</strong></p>
<p>After all the settings finished, click the button <strong>Apply </strong>to activate all the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark160"></a> IPC Searching</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>This list shows the device name, type of agreement, IP Address, port number and access networks of all IP cameras that have found in the same subnet.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Search: </strong>Scope search contains private agreements, ONVIF Protocol search and comprehensive search of both types of agreements. Click to search all of the devices under the same network segment. You can click the protocol drop box and select the corresponding protocol. Please refer to the Figure 4-51.</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="865" height="335" class="wp-image-653" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-91.jpeg" alt="word image 562 91" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 809" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-91.jpeg 865w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-91-300x116.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-91-768x297.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 865px) 100vw, 865px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-64 IPC Search</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Add: </strong>Device is selected click on the muscle can increase to the Edit bar and automatic connection.</li>
<li><strong>Quick Set: </strong>Click the button to add all IPCs to the digital channels automatically according to the found IP cameras list.</li>
<li><strong>Automatic IP: </strong>This operation will automatically allocate your network IPC(QVUII) IP address.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong><em>Note:</em></strong></p>
<p>&gt; <em>We highly recommend you create a strong password of your own choosing in order to enhance the security of the IP Camera. And we suggest that you change your password regularly. Reset your password monthly or weekly can improve the security level of the system and protect the information security.</em></p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark162"></a> 4.3.5.3 Encode</p>
<p>By configuring the encode parameters you can define the parameters which affect the image quality, such as the Compression type, Resolution, Frame Rate, Bit Rate Type, Quality, etc. The HD DVR support Dual Stream Encode, we can set the main stream encode and sub stream encode on this screen.</p>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Setting -&gt; Channel -&gt; Encode&#8221; into the graphical interface.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="749" height="562" class="wp-image-654" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-92.jpeg" alt="word image 562 92" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 810" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-92.jpeg 749w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-92-300x225.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 749px) 100vw, 749px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-65 Encode</strong></p>
<p>• <strong>Channel: </strong>Select the channel to configure.</p>
<p>• <strong>Stream Type: </strong>MainStream/SubStream/EventStream</p>
<p>• <strong>Compression: </strong>This is the compression protocol for encoding.</p>
<p>• <strong>Complexity level: </strong>Base Line/Main Profile/High Profile</p>
<p>• <strong>Resolution: </strong>The resolution of the encoding record.</p>
<p>• <strong>Frame Rate(FPS): </strong>The number of frames per second in the encoding video.</p>
<p>• <strong>Bit Rate Type: </strong>CBR/VBR.</p>
<p>• <strong>Image Quality: </strong>Lowest/Low/Standard/Good/Better/Best</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Bit Rate(Kb/s): </strong>Value of the Bandwidth</li>
<li><strong>IFrame Gop: </strong>I-frame setting, range from 10-100</li>
<li><strong>Video/Audio: </strong>To encode the Video and Audio in the record files. The video in mainstream is always enabled.</li>
<li><strong>H.264+: </strong>Enable smart encode technology, all the record file can reduce the HDD space</li>
</ul>
<p>maximum 80%-90% in static view.</p>
<p>After all the setting finished, click the button <strong>Apply </strong>to activate the configuration.</p>
<p>You can copy the configuration of selected channels to the one which you would like to apply the same configuration. By clicking <strong>Copy To </strong>button, select the channels and save the setting. Please refer to Figure 4-53 Copy To.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="577" height="237" class="wp-image-655" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-93.jpeg" alt="word image 562 93" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 811" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-93.jpeg 577w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-93-300x123.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 577px) 100vw, 577px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-66 Copy To</strong></p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark164"></a> 4.3.5.4 Color Setting</p>
<p>HD cameras and IP Cameras support image adjustment such as Brightness, Contrast, Saturation, Hue and Sharpness. Some high-end IP Cameras support advanced Settings such as Day/Night setting, Exposure, NR, WDR, Defog, etc. In this chapter you can configure the IP Camera to improve the image and make a better view experience.</p>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Settings -&gt; Channel -&gt;Color &#8220;into the graphical interface.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="865" height="487" class="wp-image-656" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-94.jpeg" alt="word image 562 94" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 812" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-94.jpeg 865w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-94-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-94-768x432.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 865px) 100vw, 865px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-67 Channel Color Setting</strong></p>
<p>• <strong>Channel: </strong>Select the channel to configure.</p>
<p>• <strong>Image Mode: </strong>The image mode for specific period of the configuration, there are Auto/Manual for options. Auto mode keeps the image settings for 24h, and Manual mode supports 2 period settings (Day period &amp; Night period). You can set independent image settings for different period.</p>
<p>• <strong>Start-End</strong>: Set the image mode as Manual, then enter the starting time and ending time for Day period or Night period</p>
<p>You can adjust the IP Camera parameters on this screen, if the IP Camera compatible with the HD DVR.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Functions</strong></td>
<td><strong>Parameters</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Image Adjust</td>
<td>Brightnes/Contrast/Saturation/Hue/Sharpness</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Exposure</td>
<td>Auto: Set exposure time automatically</p>
<p>Manual: Set exposure time by selecting exact value</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Backlight</td>
<td>Close/DWDR/WDR</p>
<p>Close: function disable</p>
<p>Limit: 0-100</p>
<p>Back Light Comp: when WDR disabled, BLC function can be activated</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>White balance</td>
<td>Auto/Manual</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Day/Night</td>
<td>Auto/Color On/Color Off</p>
<p>Switch Type: IR Synchronous Switch Filter Time: from 0-120 seconds Smart IR:Close/manual/auto</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Video Adjust</td>
<td>Close: function disable</p>
<p>Up down/Left right/Center: adjust the image by reversing</p>
<p>Rotate: Off/90° /180° /270°</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enhancement</td>
<td>NRLevel:0-6</p>
<p>Defog:</p>
<p>Close: function disable</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Auto: defog automatically</p>
<p>Manual: adjust the effect manually 0-100</p>
<p>Smart Light:</p>
<p>Close: function disable</p>
<p>Auto: the light will be trigged by smart analyze function when linked, 0-100</p>
<p>Manual: the light will be turned on manually, 0-100</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 4-4 IP Camera advanced setting</p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark166"></a> 4.3.5.5 OSD</p>
<p>You can configure the OSD (On-screen Display) settings for the camera, including Channel Name, Date/Time format, Record status, Alarm status, etc.</p>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Setting -&gt; Channel -&gt;OSD &#8220;Into the graphical interface.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="867" height="489" class="wp-image-657" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-95.jpeg" alt="word image 562 95" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 813" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-95.jpeg 867w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-95-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-95-768x433.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 867px) 100vw, 867px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-68 OSD Setting</strong></p>
<p>There are two parts for the setting: Channel Set and General Set. For Channel Set, you can configure the following items:</p>
<p>• <strong>Channel: </strong>Select the channel to configure.</p>
<p>• <strong>Channel Name: </strong>The name of the channel to be set.</p>
<p>• <strong>Show Name, Show Time: </strong>Enable the information of channel name and time on the screen.</p>
<p>• <strong>Date Format, Time Format: </strong>Set the format of the date and time.</p>
<p>For the General Set you can configure the following items:</p>
<p>• <strong>Time Title, Channel Title: </strong>Enable/disable the display of the time tile and channel title on the monitor screen.</p>
<p>• <strong>Record Status, Alarm Status: </strong>Enable/disable the display of the record status and alarm status on the screen.</p>
<p>After all the setting finished, click the button <strong>Apply </strong>to activate the configuration.</p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark168"></a> 4.3.5.6 Cover</p>
<p>You are allowed to configure the four-sided privacy mask zones that cannot be viewed by the operator. The privacy mask can prevent certain surveillance areas to be viewed or recorded.</p>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Settings -&gt; Channel -&gt;Cover &#8220;Into the graphical interface.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="869" height="487" class="wp-image-658" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-96.jpeg" alt="word image 562 96" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 814" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-96.jpeg 869w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-96-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-96-768x430.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 869px) 100vw, 869px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-69 Channel Cover Setting</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Channel: </strong>Select the channel to configure.</li>
<li><strong>Enable: </strong>Check the box to enable the feature.</li>
</ul>
<p>Use the mouse to draw a zone on the window. The zones will be marked with different frame colors. Up to 4 privacy masks zones can be configured and the size of each area can be adjusted. The configured privacy mask zones on the window can be cleared by clicking the corresponding Clear Region button with different colors on the bottom side of the preview window, or click <strong>Clear All Region </strong>to clear all regions. Please refer to <strong>Figure 4-57.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="552" height="407" class="wp-image-659" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-97.jpeg" alt="word image 562 97" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 815" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-97.jpeg 552w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-97-300x221.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 552px) 100vw, 552px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-70 Draw mask zone</strong></p>
<p>After all the setting finished, click the button <strong>Apply </strong>to activate the configuration.</p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark170"></a> 4.3.5.7 PTZ</p>
<p>This chapter is to show you how to set the actions which you want the PTZ Camera to respond when corresponding alarm occurred. Please make sure that the presets, patrols and patterns should be supported by PTZ protocols.</p>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Setting -&gt; Channel -&gt;PTZ &#8220;Into the graphical interface.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="781" height="506" class="wp-image-660" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-98.jpeg" alt="word image 562 98" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 816" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-98.jpeg 781w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-98-300x194.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-98-768x498.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 781px) 100vw, 781px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-71 PTZ Setting</strong></p>
<p>• <strong>Preset: </strong>This feature enables the camera to point to a specified position such as a</p>
<p>window when an event takes place. You can set up to 255 preset points. You can go to</p>
<p>preset by UTC control in PTZ.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="865" height="487" class="wp-image-661" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-99.jpeg" alt="word image 562 99" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 817" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-99.jpeg 865w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-99-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-99-768x432.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 865px) 100vw, 865px" /></p>
<p>• <strong>Patrol: </strong>Patrols can be set to move the PTZ to different key points and have it stay there</p>
<p>for a set duration before moving on to the next key point. The key points are corresponding to the presets. You can set up 4 cruise lines, each cruise line includes preset points and the time stayed in the preset point and cruising speed. Please refer to <strong>Figure 4-72.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="553" height="280" class="wp-image-662" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-100.jpeg" alt="word image 562 100" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 818" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-100.jpeg 553w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-100-300x152.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 553px) 100vw, 553px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-72 Patrol Setting</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Pattern: </strong>Patterns can be set by recording the movement of the PTZ. You can call the pattern to make the PTZ movement according to the predefined path.</li>
<li><strong>Border: </strong>Linear boundaries Including Left and right boundaries.</li>
<li><strong>Speed: </strong>Set the speed of the PTZ movement.</li>
</ul>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Items</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Direction button and the auto-cycle button</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>(t^ Zoom</strong></td>
<td>Zoom+, Zoom-</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>[+] Focus</strong></td>
<td>Focus+, Focus-</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>O Iris O</strong></td>
<td>Iris+, Iris-</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong><sup>r r</sup> &#8216;</strong></td>
<td>The speed of the PTZ movement</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 4-5 Description of PTZ Control Icons</p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark173"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark172"></a> 4.4 Maintain</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td colspan="3"><strong>Items</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>[ I</strong></td>
<td>System</td>
<td>Check the version of the device, upgrade device, check</p>
<p>channels/record/alarm status and PoE power info, manage online users</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3">Network</td>
<td>Check base settings of network, and network transmission info of LAN port</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3">HDD</td>
<td>Manage the base and advanced settings of HDD, and check HDD self-test results</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3">El r</p>
<p>■OBConfig</td>
<td>Backup parameters of device, and restore defaults</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>-rt-r</td>
<td>Log</td>
<td>Search the operations log of device</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 4-6 Control Panel description</p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark176"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark175"></a> 4.4.1 System</p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark178"></a> 4.4.1.1 Version</p>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Maintain &#8211;&gt; System -&gt; Version” into the graphical interface.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="592" height="450" class="wp-image-663" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-101.jpeg" alt="word image 562 101" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 819" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-101.jpeg 592w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-101-300x228.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 592px) 100vw, 592px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-73 Version of Software</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Analog channel: </strong>The number of HD camera channels by default.</li>
<li><strong>IP channel: </strong>The number of IP camera channels by default.</li>
<li><strong>Audio channel: </strong>The number of Audio input channels.</li>
<li><strong>Version: </strong>A version tag.</li>
<li><strong>Release date: </strong>The release date of the Firmware.</li>
<li><strong>MAC: </strong>The Mac address of HD DVR.</li>
<li><strong>Update firmware version: </strong>Make sure network connection is good. You can manually check if there is new version FW in cloud server by just check “Version” page in GUI. If we update our FWs, you will be remind like below way. By click OK confirm, device will download the new FW and upgrade by itself automatically.</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="669" height="504" class="wp-image-664" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-102.jpeg" alt="word image 562 102" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 820" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-102.jpeg 669w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-102-300x226.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 669px) 100vw, 669px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-74 Cloud Upgrade Check</strong></p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark180"></a> 4.4.1.2 Upgrade</p>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Maintain &#8211;&gt; System -&gt;Upgrade&#8221; into the graphical interface. On this page you can upgrade your device by use USB flash disk.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="866" height="649" class="wp-image-665" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-103.jpeg" alt="word image 562 103" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 821" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-103.jpeg 866w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-103-300x225.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-103-768x576.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 866px) 100vw, 866px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-75 Upgrades HD DVR</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Detect: </strong>Manually detect the USB flash disk on this device.</li>
<li><strong>Upgrade: </strong>Select the correct file and click the “upgrade” button to upgrade the device, then click “ok” button to reboot the device after upgrade successfully.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong><em>Note:</em></strong></p>
<p>&gt; <em>You will be asked to format HDD in order to enjoy new version FW which support many smart functions.</em></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="632" height="384" class="wp-image-666" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-104.jpeg" alt="word image 562 104" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 822" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-104.jpeg 632w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-104-300x182.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 632px) 100vw, 632px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-76 Format HDD</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark182"></a> Channel Status</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Maintain &#8211;&gt; System -&gt; Channel Status&#8221; into the graphical interface.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="813" height="482" class="wp-image-667" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-105.jpeg" alt="word image 562 105" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 823" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-105.jpeg 813w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-105-300x178.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-105-768x455.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 813px) 100vw, 813px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-77 Channel Status</strong></p>
<p>On this page you can check all the HD and IP channel status and the status of alarm occur include motion detect, video mask and video lost.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark184"></a> Record Status</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Maintain &#8211;&gt; System -&gt; Record Status&#8221; into the graphical interface.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="826" height="487" class="wp-image-668" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-106.jpeg" alt="word image 562 106" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 824" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-106.jpeg 826w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-106-300x177.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-106-768x453.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 826px) 100vw, 826px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-78 Channel Record Status</strong></p>
<p>On this page you can check all the channels record status, open or stop; stream type, frame/bite rate of channels stream; main/sub resolution of each channel; and whether open the redundancy function or not.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark186"></a> Alarm Status</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Maintain &#8211;&gt; System -&gt; Alarm Status&#8221; into the graphical interface.</p>
<p>Alarm status</p>
<p>Online User</p>
<p>( ] System Info</p>
<p><strong>■QSS2E2EESM WdJi&#8217;.ii.iJ.w.hiiMM</strong></p>
<p>40 Log Time</p>
<p>Disk</p>
<p>8</p>
<p>9</p>
<p>10</p>
<p>12</p>
<p>13</p>
<p>14</p>
<p>15</p>
<p>16</p>
<p>18</p>
<p>19</p>
<p>20</p>
<p>17-12-08 16:09:24</p>
<p>17-12-08 16:08:23</p>
<p>17-12-08 16:07:43</p>
<p>17-12-08 16:07:43</p>
<p>17-12-08 16:07:33</p>
<p>17-12-08 16:07:33</p>
<p>17-12-08 16:07:29</p>
<p>17-12-08 16:06:56</p>
<p>17-12-08 16:06:47</p>
<p>17-12-08 16:06:40</p>
<p>17-12-08 16:06:29</p>
<p>17-12-08 16:06:25</p>
<p>17-12-08 16:06:15</p>
<p>17-12-08 16:06:12</p>
<p>17-12-08 16:05:38</p>
<p>17-12-08 15:55:36</p>
<p>17-12-08 15:55:19</p>
<p>17-12-08 15:55:18</p>
<p>17-12-08 15:55:15</p>
<p>17-12-08 15:50:41</p>
<p>Event</p>
<p>Motion detect:1</p>
<p>Area Intrusion Alarm: 1(1)</p>
<p>Motion detect:1</p>
<p>Line Crossing Alarm:1(1)</p>
<p>Motion detect:1</p>
<p>Area Intrusion Alarm:1(1) Motion detect:1</p>
<p>Area Intrusion Alarm:1(1)</p>
<p>Area Intrusion Alarm:1(1)</p>
<p>Area Intrusion Alarm:1(1)</p>
<p>Area Intrusion Alarm:1(1)</p>
<p>Area Intrusion Alarm:1(1)</p>
<p>Area Intrusion Alarm:1(1)</p>
<p>Area Intrusion Alarm:1(1)</p>
<p>Area Intrusion Alarm:1(1)</p>
<p>Area Intrusion Alarm: 1(1)</p>
<p>Area Intrusion Alarm:1(1)</p>
<p>Area Intrusion Alarm:1(1)</p>
<p>Area Intrusion Alarm:1(1)</p>
<p>Area Intrusion Alarm:1(1)</p>
<p><strong>00000000000</strong></p>
<p>Playback</p>
<p>Set</p>
<p>Maintain</p>
<p>Backup</p>
<p>Shutdown</p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-79 Alarm Status</strong></p>
<p>On this page you can check all the alarm status according to <strong>Input/Output </strong>or <strong>Alarm</strong>. Detailed information can be displayed and provide fast locate alarm video.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark188"></a> Online Users</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Maintain &#8211;&gt; System -&gt; Online Users&#8221; into the graphical interface.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="861" height="483" class="wp-image-669" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-107.jpeg" alt="word image 562 107" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 825" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-107.jpeg 861w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-107-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-107-768x431.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 861px) 100vw, 861px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-80 Online Users</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>User Name: </strong>Remote device login this HD DVR device account.</li>
<li><strong>IP: </strong>User remote access devices IP Address.</li>
<li><strong>Login Type: </strong>Remote connection type.</li>
<li><strong>Disconnect: </strong>Disconnect the connected user, and disconnected users will reconnect</li>
</ul>
<p>automatically in a while.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Block: </strong>Shielding the connected user in a time that you set, and remote user will reconnect in that time, the maximum value is 65535 seconds.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark191"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark190"></a> 4.4.2 Network</p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark193"></a> 4.4.2.1 Base</p>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Maintain &#8211;&gt; Network -&gt; Base&#8221; into the graphical interface.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="801" height="515" class="wp-image-670" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-108.jpeg" alt="word image 562 108" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 826" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-108.jpeg 801w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-108-300x193.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-108-768x494.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 801px) 100vw, 801px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-81 Interface of Check Base Network</strong></p>
<p>This page shows device network parameters, and DHCP enable status.</p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark195"></a> 4.4.2.2 Flow</p>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Maintain &#8211;&gt; Network -&gt;Flow&#8221; into the graphical interface.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="801" height="487" class="wp-image-671" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-109.jpeg" alt="word image 562 109" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 827" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-109.jpeg 801w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-109-300x182.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-109-768x467.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 801px) 100vw, 801px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-82 Flow of Network</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Receive: </strong>Shows the bit rate that HD DVR device received in real-time.</li>
<li><strong>Transmit: </strong>Shows the bit rate that HD DVR device transmit in real-time.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark198"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark197"></a> 4.4.3 HDD</p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark200"></a> 4.4.3.1 Base</p>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Maintain &#8211;&gt; HDD -&gt; Base&#8221; into the graphical interface.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="865" height="487" class="wp-image-672" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-110.jpeg" alt="word image 562 110" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 828" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-110.jpeg 865w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-110-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-110-768x432.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 865px) 100vw, 865px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-83 Base Setting of HDD</strong></p>
<p>This page displays your device is plugged into the hard disk status, hard drive serial number, name, attributes, the type of hard drive, the total capacity / Remaining capacity, as well as belonging to a group, edit button and uninstall / Loaded button.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>HDD: </strong>Shows HDD serial number, &#8220;[1]sda&#8221; or&#8221;[2]sdb&#8221;.</li>
<li><strong>Status: </strong>Shows the state of HDD, &#8220;Unformatted&#8221; or &#8220;normal&#8221; or &#8220;no disk&#8221;.</li>
<li><strong>ATTR: </strong>HDD have Three types of ATTR, “Read/Write”, ”Read only”, “Redundant”.</li>
<li><strong>Type: </strong>Shows HDD connection type.</li>
<li><strong>Total: </strong>Size of the HDD total capacity.</li>
<li><strong>Free: </strong>Shows HDD remaining capacity size.</li>
<li><strong>Group: </strong>Shows which group the HDD belonged.</li>
<li><strong>Uninstall: </strong>Uninstall HDD.</li>
<li><strong>Add: </strong>Add the HDD from uninstall state.</li>
<li><strong>Format: </strong>Format the HDD manually.</li>
<li><strong>HDD: </strong>You can set the full strategy of hard disk, &#8220;stop&#8221; or &#8220;overwrite&#8221;.</li>
<li><strong>Auto-Delete Old Files: </strong>Support two mode of strategy, “never” and “Custom”. In the “Custom” mode you can set auto-delete time from 1-30 days before.</li>
<li><strong>Sleep: </strong>Open this function, your HDD will smart sleep when it not be used.</li>
<li><strong>Apply: </strong>Make sure all the operations effect.</li>
</ul>
<p>Click HDD the set button, interface shows as below.</p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-84 Edit of HDD</strong></p>
<p>On this page you can set HDD parameters, including ATTR and Group. <strong><em>Note:</em></strong></p>
<p>&gt; <em>Every HDD only can be set to one group in the same time.</em></p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark202"></a> 4.4.3.2 Advanced</p>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Maintain &#8211;&gt; HDD -&gt; Advanced&#8221; into the graphical interface.</p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-85 Advanced Setting of HDD</strong></p>
<p>This page you can switch the hard disk&#8217;s storage mode, including the &#8220;group&#8221;, &#8220;quotas (Capacity)&#8221;, and “Quota (Time)”. Change the storage mode requires that you restart the HD DVR device.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="865" height="487" class="wp-image-673" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-111.jpeg" alt="word image 562 111" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 829" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-111.jpeg 865w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-111-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-111-768x432.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 865px) 100vw, 865px" /> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="864" height="486" class="wp-image-674" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-112.jpeg" alt="word image 562 112" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 830" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-112.jpeg 864w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-112-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-112-768x432.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 864px) 100vw, 864px" /></p>
<p>i. <strong>Group: </strong>You can set 16 groups under group mode, and each channel is independent of</p>
<p>each group. If the channel do not belong to any group, none video file will saved, and if the channel belong to more than one group, the channel will used the space of these group one by one until all the group are full.</p>
<p><strong><em>Note:</em></strong></p>
<p>&gt; <em>Apply a new storage mode need restart the HD DVR device.</em></p>
<p>ii. <strong>Quota (Capacity): </strong>The quota of capacity mode support set disk space for every channel</p>
<p>manually.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="865" height="487" class="wp-image-675" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-113.jpeg" alt="word image 562 113" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 831" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-113.jpeg 865w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-113-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-113-768x432.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 865px) 100vw, 865px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-86 Quota of Capacity Mode</strong></p>
<p>• <strong>Record used: </strong>Shows the video files space that the channel you chosen has used in real-time.</p>
<p>• <strong>Picture used: </strong>Shows the pictures space that the channel you chose have used in real-time.</p>
<p>• <strong>Volumes: </strong>Total capacity of all hard drives.</p>
<p>• <strong>Record Quota: </strong>You can manually set the quota size of channel video.</p>
<p>• <strong>Picture quota: </strong>You can manually set the quota size of channel picture.</p>
<p>• <strong>Free volumes: </strong>Shows the free space minus the space you have set on other channels.</p>
<p>iii. <strong>Quota (Time): </strong>The quota of time mode supports set time for every channel manually.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="865" height="487" class="wp-image-676" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-114.jpeg" alt="word image 562 114" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 832" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-114.jpeg 865w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-114-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-114-768x432.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 865px) 100vw, 865px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-87 Quota of Time Mode</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Record used: </strong>Shows the video files space that the channel you chose has used in</li>
</ul>
<p>real-time.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Volumes: </strong>Total capacity of all hard drives.</li>
<li><strong>Record Quota (Day): </strong>Set a time for a channel from 0-60 days, and the new video files</li>
</ul>
<p>will not cover the old files in the time period.</p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark204"></a> 4.4.3.3 S.M.A.R.T</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="823" height="469" class="wp-image-677" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-115.jpeg" alt="word image 562 115" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 833" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-115.jpeg 823w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-115-300x171.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-115-768x438.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 823px) 100vw, 823px" /></p>
<p><strong>Attribute name</strong></p>
<p>Raw_Read_Error_Rate Spin_Up_Time</p>
<p>StartStopC ount</p>
<p>Reallocated_Sector_Ct Seek_Error_Rate Po wer_On_Hours Spin_R etry_C o unt</p>
<p>PowerCycleCount</p>
<p>End-to-End_Etror Reported_Uncorrect CommandTimeout</p>
<p>High_Fly_Writes</p>
<p>190 Airflow Temperature Cel</p>
<p><strong>Raw value 63075680</strong></p>
<p>Last test time 2016/04/13 15:45:50</p>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Maintain &#8211;&gt; HDD -&gt; S.M.A.R.T” into the graphical interface.</p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-88 Check HDD Status</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>NO.: </strong>Hard disk serial number.</li>
<li><strong>Status: </strong>Shows HDD self-test status and results.</li>
<li><strong>Last test time: </strong>The last time you test HDD.</li>
<li><strong>Temperature: </strong>Shows HDD temperature in real-time.</li>
<li><strong>Life time (hours): </strong>Shows how long the time have you used this HDD.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong><em>Note:</em></strong></p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark206"></a> &gt; <em>We provide two type of self-test, brief and extended. Extended type will be taking a little</em></p>
<p><em>longer time than brief type. And you can stop while it’s been self-testing if you want.</em></p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark207"></a> 4.4.4 Config</p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark209"></a> 4.4.4.1 Backup</p>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Maintain &#8211;&gt;Config -&gt;Backup&#8221; into the graphical interface.</p>
<p>On this page you can backup device parameters into USB flash disk.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="865" height="487" class="wp-image-678" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-116.jpeg" alt="word image 562 116" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 834" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-116.jpeg 865w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-116-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-116-768x432.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 865px) 100vw, 865px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-89 Backup Setting Status</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Detect: </strong>Detect the USB device.</li>
<li><strong>Name (type): </strong>File name and file type, and the backup file is “.coi” type.</li>
<li><strong>ATTR: </strong>Shows the file type.</li>
<li><strong>Export: </strong>Export the parameters backup file into USB disk.</li>
<li><strong>Import: </strong>Choose the backup file and click import button, your device parameters will</li>
</ul>
<p>change into the new one.</p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark211"></a> 4.4.4.2 Default</p>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Maintain &#8211;&gt;Config -&gt;Default &#8220;enter the graphic interface.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="750" height="562" class="wp-image-679" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-117.jpeg" alt="word image 562 117" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 835" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-117.jpeg 750w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-117-300x225.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 750px) 100vw, 750px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-90 Default</strong></p>
<p>On this page you can choose the function item, General/Channel Name/Record/Network/Motion Detect/PTZ/ Abnormality /Encode/Display/Channel type/IP channel/Image Setting, and after click execute button, the item what you chosen restore defaults. And you can also select the “select all” button, all the items will be selected. When the operation finish a hint will be displayed at the interface shown as figure 4-84. You can also click <strong>Restore factory settings </strong>button to restore all settings to factory.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="735" height="413" class="wp-image-680" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-118.jpeg" alt="word image 562 118" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 836" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-118.jpeg 735w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-118-300x169.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 735px) 100vw, 735px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-91 Restore default succeed hint</strong></p>
<p><strong><em>Note:</em></strong></p>
<p>&gt; <em>UVR will restart when you choose restore factory settings automatically.</em></p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark214"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark213"></a> 4.4.5 Log</p>
<p>Click on the &#8220;Maintain &#8211;&gt; Log &#8220;into the graphical interface.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="865" height="487" class="wp-image-681" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-119.jpeg" alt="word image 562 119" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 837" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-119.jpeg 865w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-119-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-119-768x432.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 865px) 100vw, 865px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-92 Search System Log</strong></p>
<p>You can check device operation log on this page.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Type: </strong>Search type include “System”, “Config”, “Storage”, “Alarm”, “Record”, “Account”, ”Clear”, ”Playback”.</li>
<li><strong>Start time/End time: </strong>Set the period of time you want to search.</li>
<li><strong>Search: </strong>After you set the time period and search type, click the search button, and device can save 4096 logs tops.</li>
<li><strong>Prev/Next: </strong>It can shows 1000 logs in one page, and you can check on more by click “Prev/Next” button.</li>
<li><strong>Clear: </strong>Delete all log information.</li>
<li><strong>Filter: </strong>On this page you can chose whether cover the log when it’s full, and decide which type operation log you want to save.</li>
<li><strong>Detect: </strong>Detect the USB device.</li>
<li><strong>Export: </strong>Export the operations log into the USB flash disk.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark217"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark216"></a> 4.5 Backup</p>
<p>Click the backup button, enter the backup interface.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Detect: </strong>Detect the USB flash disk device you have access to the HD DVR.</li>
<li><strong>Format: </strong>Format the USB device.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark220"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark219"></a> 4.5.1 General</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark222"></a> Video backup</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Click on &#8220;Backup -&gt;General -&gt; Video&#8221; into the graphical interface.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="829" height="466" class="wp-image-682" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-120.jpeg" alt="word image 562 120" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 838" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-120.jpeg 829w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-120-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-120-768x432.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 829px) 100vw, 829px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-93 Backup General Video File</strong></p>
<p><strong>How to backup the record:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Chose the record channel;</li>
<li>Chose the video file type, including “All Record”, “Event Record”, “Timing Record”, “Manual Record” four types. And DAV/AVI two file formats.</li>
<li>Set the time period you want check, and click on the search button. And search results column shows on the middle area. On this area you should chose the serial number of the backup file you need.</li>
<li>Check on the “Require/Remain” bar, make sure the required space smaller than your USB device. And click start button to start backup.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong><em>Note:</em></strong></p>
<p>&gt; <em>The file status marked red as search result shows is the file you locked in the playback interface. In case the file that you’re interesting covered by new files.</em></p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark224"></a> 4.5.1.2 Picture backup</p>
<p>Click on &#8220;Backup -&gt;General -&gt;Picture&#8221; into the graphical interface.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="781" height="535" class="wp-image-683" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-121.jpeg" alt="word image 562 121" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 839" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-121.jpeg 781w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-121-300x206.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-121-768x526.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 781px) 100vw, 781px" /> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="600" height="128" class="wp-image-684" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-122.jpeg" alt="word image 562 122" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 840" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-122.jpeg 600w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-122-300x64.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 600px) 100vw, 600px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-94 Backup Pictures</strong></p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark226"></a> The operations of backup pictures is the same as videos, please refer to the previous part.</p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark227"></a> 4.5.2 Event</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="796" height="450" class="wp-image-685" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-123.jpeg" alt="word image 562 123" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 841" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-123.jpeg 796w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-123-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-123-768x434.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 796px) 100vw, 796px" /></p>
<p>Click on &#8220;Backup -&gt; Event-&gt; Video &#8220;into the graphical interface.</p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-95 Backup Event Video File</strong></p>
<p>This page you can check the event video, and there are three event types, include “Alarm input”, “Motion detect”, ”IA Detect”. And “IA Detect” contains two sub types “Crossing detect” and “Area intrusion detect”.</p>
<ol>
<li>Set search time period, and channels you’re interesting.</li>
<li>Click on the button of search. And search results shows on the middle area. On this area you should chose the serial number of the backup file you need. And DAV/AVI two file formats.</li>
<li>Check on the “Require/Remain” bar, make sure the required space smaller than your USB device. And click start button to start backup.</li>
</ol>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark230"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark229"></a> 4.5.3 Smart Search</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="773" height="439" class="wp-image-686" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-124.jpeg" alt="word image 562 124" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 842" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-124.jpeg 773w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-124-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-124-768x436.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 773px) 100vw, 773px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-96 Smart Search</strong></p>
<p>In this GUI you can search all the face detection information for convenience backup. First you should select a channel or all the channels, second specify the start time and end time, then click search button, Face detection results can be shown as below;</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="675" height="475" class="wp-image-687" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-125.jpeg" alt="word image 562 125" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 843" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-125.jpeg 675w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-125-300x211.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 675px) 100vw, 675px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-97 Face Detection search result</strong></p>
<p>Then you can select the video section or picture you want to backup them to your flash disk by USB.</p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark233"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark232"></a> 4.6 Playback</p>
<p>Right click and select the “Record Playback” to enter the playback interface and you can also click on the playback button in the main menu to enter the playback interface, as shown in the <strong>figure-76.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="865" height="482" class="wp-image-688" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-126.jpeg" alt="word image 562 126" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 844" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-126.jpeg 865w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-126-300x167.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-126-768x428.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 865px) 100vw, 865px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-98 Main Interface of Playback</strong></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Items</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>1</td>
<td>Playback Type</td>
<td>HD DVR support four types playback mode “Normal Play”, “Event Play”, “Label Play”, “Time Division Play”, “Normal Play (Picture)”</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2</td>
<td>Display</td>
<td>The windows display videos</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>3</td>
<td>Channels</td>
<td>You can select the channels for playback in this area</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>4</td>
<td>Date</td>
<td>Shows the date that have video files and marked blue</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>5</td>
<td>Time of File</td>
<td>Shows the start time and the end time of files in HDD</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>6</td>
<td>Time Line</td>
<td>Shows files playing course in this area.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 4-7 Area Functions Introduce of Playback</p>
<p><strong><em>Note:</em></strong></p>
<p>&gt; <em>The second line shows all the files of the channels you selected. And the first line shows the files of the channel you chose by mouse on the display area. And event files marked red, normal files marked blue.</em></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td colspan="3"><strong>Key title</strong></td>
<td><strong>Key function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>1</td>
<td></td>
<td>* * r *</td>
<td></td>
<td>Full screen playback the channels</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>Close the playback interface back to preview interface</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><em>3</em></td>
<td colspan="4">S3/EZ3</td>
<td>Change time line interval</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><em>4</em></td>
<td colspan="4"><strong>KU</strong></td>
<td>Switch of playback channel audio</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>5</td>
<td colspan="4"><strong>E/E3</strong></td>
<td>Cut the interest video of playing channel</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>6</td>
<td colspan="4"></td>
<td>Snap a picture of playing channel</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>7</td>
<td colspan="4"><strong>EJ</strong></td>
<td>Lock the file in case over written in HDD</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>8</td>
<td colspan="4"><strong>□</strong></td>
<td>Default label, Label the file</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>9</td>
<td colspan="4"><strong>□</strong></td>
<td>File manager, Mange the cut file/locked file/labeled file</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>10</td>
<td colspan="4"><strong>El</strong></td>
<td>Zoom, Zoom the playing channel</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>11</td>
<td colspan="4"><strong>^3/H</strong></td>
<td>Sync/Async, Switch button of playback mode</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>12</td>
<td colspan="2"><strong>El</strong></td>
<td>■h</td>
<td></td>
<td>Main/Sub Stream, Switch button of stream type</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>13</td>
<td colspan="4"><strong>□</strong></td>
<td>Start/Pause, Control button of start/pause playback</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>14</td>
<td colspan="4"><strong>□</strong></td>
<td>Backward Playback/Pause, Control button of backward playback</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>15</td>
<td colspan="4"><strong>□</strong></td>
<td>Stop Playing, Control button of stop playback</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>16</td>
<td colspan="4"><strong>d/Q|</strong></td>
<td>Frame Control, Control step frame and backward frame</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>17</td>
<td></td>
<td>!►</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>Slow playback, slow down play speed of playing channels</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>18</td>
<td></td>
<td>T</td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>Speed up, speed up playing channels</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">19</td>
<td></td>
<td>H 3DS</td>
<td>1 <sup>H</sup></p>
<p>30S</td>
<td></td>
<td rowspan="2">Forward/Backward 30 sec, forward/backward 30sec playing channel</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>20</td>
<td colspan="4"></td>
<td>Normal record, file color marked the file type, green means normal</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>21</td>
<td colspan="4"></td>
<td>Event record, event record marked red</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 4-8 Buttons of Playback Interface</p>
<p><strong><em>Note:</em></strong></p>
<p>&gt; <em>The HD DVR device supports five types of playback.</em></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark236"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark235"></a> Normal play</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>The default playback mode is “Normal playback”. And when you select the channels the date will turn into blue on the date area that means the channels you selected have files in that day. And you can select the date you want to playback on the date area.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="866" height="487" class="wp-image-689" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-127.jpeg" alt="word image 562 127" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 845" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-127.jpeg 866w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-127-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-127-768x432.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 866px) 100vw, 866px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-99 Normal Playback Modes</strong></p>
<p>This HD DVR device support 16 channels playback. And 6 channels playback in real-time the other 10 channels playback in key frame.</p>
<p>All the operations of these buttons to control the playback, you can refer to the previous table. And the “Cut” button will cut all the files of the channels you’re playing, you can check the files you cut in the “File Manage”.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="864" height="611" class="wp-image-690" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-128.jpeg" alt="word image 562 128" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 846" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-128.jpeg 864w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-128-300x212.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-128-768x543.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 864px) 100vw, 864px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-100 Clip files</strong></p>
<p>And you can backup the clip files in this interface.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="865" height="611" class="wp-image-691" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-129.jpeg" alt="word image 562 129" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 847" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-129.jpeg 865w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-129-300x212.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-129-768x542.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 865px) 100vw, 865px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-101 Backup the Clip files</strong></p>
<p>The “Lock Record” button will lock the file in case this file be covered by new file. You can check and backup the locked files in “File Manage”. And you can unlock the locked files in this interface.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="865" height="608" class="wp-image-692" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-130.jpeg" alt="word image 562 130" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 848" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-130.jpeg 865w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-130-300x211.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-130-768x540.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 865px) 100vw, 865px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-102 Lock Files</strong></p>
<p>Click the “Default Label” button will mark the video as a default label, you can edit the label and check in the “File Manage”.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="865" height="611" class="wp-image-693" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-131.jpeg" alt="word image 562 131" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 849" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-131.jpeg 865w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-131-300x212.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-131-768x542.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 865px) 100vw, 865px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-103 Label Manage</strong></p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark238"></a> The “Main/Sub stream” button can change the video stream into sub stream from main stream, the “Speed up” button can speed up 32 times the channel you selected and speed up 16 channels 2 times top.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark239"></a> Event play</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Select the “Event Play” enters the event playback mode.</p>
<ol>
<li>You need chose the event main type, including three event types “Alarm input”,</li>
</ol>
<p>“Motion detect” and “IA Detect”. And the main type of “IA Detect” including two sub types event “Crossing detect” and “Area intrusion detect”.</p>
<ol>
<li>Select the channels you want to search. Then set time period, and click search button. Search results as shown in the figure, “Source” means alarm channel and “Chan” means record channel of linkage operations, “Time” means when the alarm happened.</li>
<li>The next area shows all the alarm items and you can change the page to find the alarm item you want. And then you can set the play time period before/after of the alarm</li>
</ol>
<p>time.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="865" height="487" class="wp-image-694" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-132.jpeg" alt="word image 562 132" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 850" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-132.jpeg 865w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-132-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-132-768x432.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 865px) 100vw, 865px" /></p>
<p>Figure 4-104 Search Result of Event Playback</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Key Picture</strong></td>
<td><strong>Key Title</strong></td>
<td><strong>Key Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>1</strong></td>
<td>First</td>
<td>Quickly go to the first page of event search results.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Prev</td>
<td>Go to the previous page of event search results.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Next</td>
<td>Go to the next page of event search results.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>5T</strong></td>
<td>Last</td>
<td>Quickly go to the last page of event search results.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>L_^</td>
<td>Goto</td>
<td>Click jump to the page you entered into the entry bar.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 4-9 Buttons of Event Search Results</p>
<p>You can change the alarm types and channels by click the return button back to the last interface.</p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark241"></a> As for the operations of these buttons you can refer to the previous table. But you can’t use the “Sync/Async”, “Main/Sub stream”, “Frame Control” button in event playback mode.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark242"></a> Label Play</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Select the “Label Play” enters the label playback mode.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="865" height="487" class="wp-image-695" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-133.jpeg" alt="word image 562 133" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 851" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-133.jpeg 865w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-133-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-133-768x432.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 865px) 100vw, 865px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-105 Search Result of Label Playback</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Select the channels, and set the time period of search.</li>
<li>Click the search button, search results as shown in the figure.</li>
<li>“Label” means label’s name that you can edit in file manage and “Chan” means the channel you tagged, “Time” means the time that was playing when you tag.</li>
<li>The next area shows all the labels and you can change the page to find the label items you want. And then you can set the play time period before/after of the label time.</li>
<li>You can change the search channels by click the return button back to the last interface.</li>
<li>As for the operations of these buttons you can refer to the previous table. But you can’t use the “Sync/Async”, “Main/Sub stream”, “Frame Control” button in label playback mode.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong><em>Note:</em></strong></p>
<p>&gt; <em>The operations of these buttons you can refer to the last part.</em></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark245"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark244"></a> Smart Play</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Select “Smart Play” enters this playback mode. In this section UVR support analyze exist video according to specific rules. Now the rules include “line accrossing, Area Intrusion, Motion Detection and Face Detection”.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark247"></a> Draw Line</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="787" height="443" class="wp-image-696" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-134.jpeg" alt="word image 562 134" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 852" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-134.jpeg 787w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-134-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-134-768x432.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 787px) 100vw, 787px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-106 Smart Playback &#8211; Draw Line</strong></p>
<p>1. First you need select a channel and click “Paly”, then the icon of “Draw Line” can be active. You can click to draw a line on the video interface;</p>
<p>2. Click “Setting” button you can specify some setting for playback like “Skip NonFocus Video” and specify the playback speed for NonConcerned-Video and Attention-Video, also you can specify the time before and after the events from 0 to 600 seconds.</p>
<p>3. Click “Search” button then the result will be shown like figure 4-87, video with line accrossing will be marked color “green”, and the video will be played by the setting as you made at step 2.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark249"></a> Draw Quadrilateral</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="787" height="445" class="wp-image-697" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-135.jpeg" alt="word image 562 135" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 853" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-135.jpeg 787w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-135-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-135-768x434.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 787px) 100vw, 787px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-107 Smart Playback &#8211; Draw Quadrilateral</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>First you need select a channel and click “Paly”, then the icon of “Draw Quadrilateral” can be active. You can click to draw a quadrilateral on the video interface;</li>
<li>Click “Setting” button you can specify some setting for playback like “Skip NonFocus Video” and specify the playback speed for NonConcerned-Video and Attention-Video, also you can specify the time before and after the events from 0 to 600 seconds.</li>
<li>Click “Search” button then the result will be shown like figure 4-88, video with Area Intrusion will be marked color “green”, and the video will be played by the setting as you made at step 2.
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark251"></a> MotionDraw Retangle</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ol>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="790" height="444" class="wp-image-698" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-136.jpeg" alt="word image 562 136" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 854" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-136.jpeg 790w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-136-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-136-768x432.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 790px) 100vw, 790px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-108 Smart Playback &#8211; MotionDraw Retangle</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>First you need select a channel and click “Paly”, then the icon of “MotionDraw Retangle” can be active. You can click it to draw an area on the video interface;</li>
<li>Click “Setting” button you can specify some setting for playback like “Skip NonFocus Video” and specify the playback speed for NonConcerned-Video and Attention-Video, also you can specify the time before and after the events from 0 to 600 seconds.</li>
<li>Click “Search” button then the result will be shown like figure 4-89, video with Motion will be marked color “green”, and the video will be played by the setting as you made at step 2.
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark253"></a> MotionFullScreen</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ol>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="785" height="442" class="wp-image-699" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-137.jpeg" alt="word image 562 137" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 855" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-137.jpeg 785w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-137-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-137-768x432.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 785px) 100vw, 785px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-109 Smart Playback &#8211; Motion Full Screen</strong></p>
<p>1. First you need select a channel and click “Paly”, then the icon of “MotionFullScreen” can be active. You can click it to draw an area on the full video interface;</p>
<p>2. Click “Setting” button you can specify some setting for playback like “Skip NonFocus Video” and specify the playback speed for NonConcerned-Video and Attention-Video, also you can specify the time before and after the events from 0 to 600 seconds.</p>
<p>3. Click “Search” button then the result will be shown like figure 4-90, video with Motion will be marked color “green”, and the video will be played by the setting as you made at step 2.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark255"></a> Face search</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="789" height="445" class="wp-image-700" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-138.jpeg" alt="word image 562 138" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 856" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-138.jpeg 789w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-138-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-138-768x433.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 789px) 100vw, 789px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-110 Smart Playback &#8211; Face Search</strong></p>
<p>1. First you need select a channel and click “Paly”, then the icon of “Face search” can be active. The full video interface will be detected by default;</p>
<p>2. Click “Setting” button you can specify some setting for playback like “Skip NonFocus Video” and specify the playback speed for NonConcerned-Video and Attention-Video, also you can specify the time before and after the events from 0 to 600 seconds.</p>
<p>3. Click “Search” button then the result will be shown like figure 4-90, video with people’s</p>
<p>face will be marked color “green”, and the video will be played by the setting as you made at step 2.</p>
<p><strong><em>Note:</em></strong></p>
<ul>
<li><em>Face Detection only work with Qualvision 6 series UVR.</em></li>
<li><em>Face Detection only work with Qualvision IPCs which support this feature.</em>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark257"></a> Clear all</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>When you click this button that means clear all the lines and rectangles you have drawn before.</p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark259"></a> Then you can draw new lines and specify new rules.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark260"></a> Time Division play</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Select the “Time Division Play” enters the time division playback mode.</p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-111 Time Division Playback</strong></p>
<p>4. First you need chose the channel and select division windows number to display, from 1-16 windows. For example, if you chose the windows number is 4, the files of the date you chose will be divided into 4 parts.</p>
<p>5. You can change the playing channel but do not need to stop. And change the windows division number when the channel is playing.</p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark262"></a> As for the operations of these buttons you can refer to the previous table.</p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark263"></a> 4.6.6 Normal Play (Picture)</p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-112 Normal Playback of Picture</strong></p>
<p>1. Select the “Normal Play (Picture)” enters the normal playback of pictures mode.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="869" height="489" class="wp-image-701" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-139.jpeg" alt="word image 562 139" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 857" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-139.jpeg 869w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-139-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-139-768x432.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 869px) 100vw, 869px" /> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="865" height="487" class="wp-image-702" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-140.jpeg" alt="word image 562 140" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 858" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-140.jpeg 865w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-140-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-140-768x432.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 865px) 100vw, 865px" /></p>
<p>2. Select the channels, the search result as shown in the figure. As for the button of control playback including “File Manage”, ”Sync/Async”, “Start/Pause”, “Backward play”, ”Stop Playing”, “Slow down”, ”Speed up”, and “Time-line Stretch”, “Time-line Shorten”.</p>
<p>The sources of pictures you play are manual snap on preview interface and the manual snap in playback interface.</p>
<p><strong><em>Note:</em></strong></p>
<ul>
<li><em>You can stop playback by right click, and exit the playback interface by keep right click.</em></li>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark265"></a><em>If you chose more than one channels to playback, double click can make the channel shows in one screen.</em></li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark266"></a> 4.7 Shutdown</p>
<p>Click Shutdown, as shown in the figure.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="667" height="275" class="wp-image-703" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-141.jpeg" alt="word image 562 141" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 859" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-141.jpeg 667w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-141-300x124.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 667px) 100vw, 667px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 4-113 Shutdown</strong></p>
<p>• <strong>Shutdown: </strong>Exit system, and then shut down device.</p>
<p>• <strong>Restart: </strong>Exit system, then restart device.</p>
<p>• <strong>Log out: </strong>Password is needed to re-enter the menu after logout.</p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark268"></a> • <strong>Switch user: </strong>Switch the user and use another account to login.</p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark269"></a> Chapter 5 WEB Application<br />
Manager</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark272"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark271"></a> Plug-in download and installation</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<ol>
<li>Open your web browser and input the IP address of HD DVR, such as <a href="http://192.168.1.9/" rel="nofollow">http://192.168.L9 </a>(the default IP address), if your IP address has been changed, you can use the new IP address, and press the Enter key to enter the login interface.</li>
<li>If it is the first time to login, it will notice you to install the plug-in, you can find it either in CD or download from web site.
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark275"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark274"></a> Web Application Manager Login</li>
</ol>
</li>
<li>After plug-in installation, please input the user name and password (The default username is admin and the password is 1234567u), and select language in the interface, shown as <strong>figure 5-2.</strong></li>
<li>Click on login button to go to web preview interface.</li>
<li><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="168" height="142" class="wp-image-704" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-142.jpeg" alt="word image 562 142" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 860"> If you enable the “Save Password”, your password and user name will be remembered the next time you login.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>English</strong></p>
<p><strong>Password</strong></p>
<p><strong>Innovative Video Technology</strong></p>
<p>ELEVATE <strong>SERIES</strong></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-2 Login Interface</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark278"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark277"></a> Preview</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>After you login successfully, you will enter the preview interface, as show in <strong>figure 5-3.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="867" height="467" class="wp-image-705" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-143.jpeg" alt="word image 562 143" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 861" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-143.jpeg 867w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-143-300x162.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-143-768x414.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 867px) 100vw, 867px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-3 Preview Interface</strong></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Items</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>1</td>
<td>Function Tab</td>
<td>Main Menu Includes preview, playback, Alarm, Config and Logout.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2</td>
<td>Preview</p>
<p>channels</td>
<td>The connection channel of HD DVR.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>3</td>
<td>Device channels</td>
<td>You can open the preview channel in main/sub stream and close the preview channel.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>4</td>
<td>Video control</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>Open ALL(Main): Open all the preview channels in main</li>
</ul>
<p>stream</p>
<ul>
<li>Open ALL(Sub):Open all the preview channels in sub stream</li>
<li>Local replay: Replay record on local</li>
<li>Close All: Close all the preview channels.</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>5</td>
<td>Windows division</td>
<td>Split-screen switch button, it can be adjusted to preview in 1/4/5/6/8/9/13/16/20/25/36 channels</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>6</td>
<td>Color control</td>
<td>Adjust the Brightness, Contrast, Saturation and Hue of the color.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>7</td>
<td>PTZ control</td>
<td>Control PTZ directions, add preset and tour etc.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>8</td>
<td>Other function</td>
<td>You can set the saving path of the pictures / local record, and set the size of video, and click the reboot button to restart the HD DVR.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-1 Function Description of preview area</p>
<p>After login the HD DVR, you can choose a channel and preview the channel in real time.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="866" height="471" class="wp-image-706" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-144.jpeg" alt="word image 562 144" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 862" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-144.jpeg 866w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-144-300x163.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-144-768x418.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 866px) 100vw, 866px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-4 Channel Preview Interface</strong></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Items</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>IP] <strong><em>r </em></strong>■ Capture</td>
<td>Capture a picture and save it in the picture path you have set before.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>□ Record</td>
<td>Record a video and click it again to stop recording, and save it in the record path you have set before.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>QI Listening</td>
<td>Turn On/Off the audio.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>^3/^3 Stop</td>
<td>Click the^Sbutton to open the preview channel ,and click ^3 to close it.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-2 function description of preview interface</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark281"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark280"></a> Playback</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<ol>
<li>Click the playback button to enter playback interface, show as <strong>figure 5-5.</strong></li>
</ol>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="835" height="524" class="wp-image-707" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-145.jpeg" alt="word image 562 145" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 863" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-145.jpeg 835w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-145-300x188.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-145-768x482.jpeg 768w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-145-160x100.jpeg 160w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 835px) 100vw, 835px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-5 Playback Interface</strong></p>
<p>It supports 4 channels playback at the same time, it displays the intraday videos of 1/2/3/4 channel by default. On this page, you can select the any channel and date you want, and then</p>
<p>click the Search button, it will display the results of your research.</p>
<p>2. Click the switch button to anther interface, show as in <strong>figure 5-6.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="866" height="450" class="wp-image-708" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-146.jpeg" alt="word image 562 146" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 864" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-146.jpeg 866w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-146-300x156.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-146-768x399.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 866px) 100vw, 866px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-6 Switch Playback Interface</strong></p>
<p>Set the start time and end time of the videos you want to see, click the Search button, and then it will display the matched results. Each video will display its start time and its type, and all the videos in the same channel will display in chronological order.</p>
<p>3. Click the More buttons, you will turn to the interface of setting more parameters, as</p>
<p>show in <strong>figure 5-7.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="864" height="524" class="wp-image-709" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-147.jpeg" alt="word image 562 147" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 865" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-147.jpeg 864w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-147-300x182.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-147-768x466.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 864px) 100vw, 864px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-7 More Detail Parameters Setting Interface</strong></p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark283"></a> In this interface, you can set the more detail parameters such as start time, end time, channel, stream type, the type of records, and click the Search button, and then all matched records will be listed below. Check the record file you want to download and click the Download button. System will download the record file in sequence and save to PC. After downloading finishes, the check box of “Download Completed!” will be pop-up.</p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark284"></a> 5.5 Alarm</p>
<p>Click the alarm button to enter the alarm setting interface, shown as in the <strong>figure 5-8.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="865" height="487" class="wp-image-710" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-148.jpeg" alt="word image 562 148" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 866" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-148.jpeg 865w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-148-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-148-768x432.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 865px) 100vw, 865px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-8 Alarm Setting interface</strong></p>
<p>After checking Listen Alarm box, and select the alarm type below, when the device trigger the corresponding alarm, it will display an alarm message to notify you. And link operation will be active.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Message: </strong>Auto jump to this page when alarm triggered.</li>
<li><strong>Local captures: </strong>Auto-grab screenshots of alarm channel.</li>
<li><strong>Open the video: </strong>Opens the channel automatically which trigger the alarm.</li>
<li>Play alarm sound: Play sound when alarm triggered.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark287"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark286"></a> 5.6 Config</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark290"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark289"></a> Local Set</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Click “Config -&gt; Local Set” to enter the interface, as shown in the <strong>figure 5-9.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="865" height="487" class="wp-image-711" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-149.jpeg" alt="word image 562 149" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 867" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-149.jpeg 865w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-149-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-149-768x432.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 865px) 100vw, 865px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-9 Dynamic Tracking Setting Interface</strong></p>
<p><strong><em>Note:</em></strong></p>
<p>&gt; <em>The IPC must support the function</em><strong><em>, </em></strong><em>or even if HD DVR enable the function of Dynamic</em></p>
<p><em>Tracking ,it will not make effect.</em></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark293"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark292"></a> Maintain
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark295"></a> VerInfo</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Click “Config -&gt;Maintain -&gt;VerInfo ” to enter the interface, as shown in the <strong>figure 5-10.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="866" height="469" class="wp-image-712" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-150.jpeg" alt="word image 562 150" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 868" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-150.jpeg 866w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-150-300x162.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-150-768x416.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 866px) 100vw, 866px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-10 Version Information of HD DVR</strong></p>
<p>It displays the MAC address of HD DVR, channel numbers, the number of audio input and output, the number of alarm input and output, system version, the release date of software version.</p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark297"></a> 5.6.2.2 Log</p>
<p>Click “Config -&gt;Maintain -&gt;Log ” to enter the interface, as shown in the <strong>figure 5-11.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="865" height="464" class="wp-image-713" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-151.jpeg" alt="word image 562 151" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 869" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-151.jpeg 865w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-151-300x161.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-151-768x412.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 865px) 100vw, 865px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-11 Log Search Results</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Set the log search conditions to refine your search, including the Start Time, End Time and Type.</li>
<li>Click the Search button to start search log files, the matched log files will be displayed on the list shown below</li>
</ol>
<ul>
<li><strong>Backup: </strong>Back up all log files to the local PC.</li>
<li><strong>Clear: </strong>Clear all log files.</li>
<li><strong>Filter: </strong>You can select the filter items to save the log files, the max number of logs is 4096, when the number of log is beyond 4096, “log full coverage “or “stop” are for choice.</li>
<li><strong>Prev / Next: </strong>Up to 900 log files can be displayed each time ,when the number of the matched logs beyond 900, you can click on Prev/ Next button to view more log files.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark300"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark299"></a> 5.6.3 Setting</p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark302"></a> 5.6.3.1 General</p>
<p>Click “Config -&gt;Setting -&gt;General” to enter the interface, as shown in the <strong>figure 5-12.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="865" height="462" class="wp-image-714" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-152.jpeg" alt="word image 562 152" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 870" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-152.jpeg 865w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-152-300x160.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-152-768x410.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 865px) 100vw, 865px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-12 General Setting Interface</strong></p>
<p>Configure the following settings, and then click Save button to save the settings.</p>
<p>• <strong>Time Zone: </strong>Select the time zone</p>
<p>• <strong>System Time: </strong>Select the system date and time.</p>
<p>• <strong>Date Format: </strong>Select the date format</p>
<p>• <strong>Time Format: </strong>Select the date format</p>
<p>• <strong>Language: </strong>There are Simplified Chinese, English, Italian, Russian, Portuguese, Turkish,</p>
<p>Persian, and Arabic.</p>
<p>• <strong>HDD full: </strong>Overwrite and Stop are for choice.</p>
<p>• <strong>Device No.</strong>: The default number is 8 ,if it is modified to any other number ,remote control will not make effect to the HD DVR.</p>
<p>• <strong>Host Name: </strong>Set the name of HD DVR.</p>
<p>• <strong>SyncPC: </strong>The time zone and the system time can synchronize your local PC.</p>
<p>• <strong>Smart Display: </strong>Click the Smart Display check box, the pre-defined virtual line and pre-defined virtual region will display in the preview channels.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark304"></a> Encode</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Click “ Config -&gt;Setting -&gt;Encode ” to enter the interface ,as shown in <strong>figure 5-13.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="865" height="462" class="wp-image-715" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-153.jpeg" alt="word image 562 153" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 871" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-153.jpeg 865w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-153-300x160.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-153-768x410.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 865px) 100vw, 865px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-13 Encode Setting Interface</strong></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>1</td>
<td>Set channel name for each channel .</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2</td>
<td>The left column is used to set the relevant parameters of main stream for each channel, the right column is used to set the relevant parameters of sub stream for each channel.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>3</td>
<td>Overlay Sets the selected channel of the area covered and the time and channel headings displayed, this model HD DVR Position control of the channel and time headers are not supported.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-3 Function Description of Encode Setting Areas</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark306"></a> Display</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Click “ Config -&gt;Setting -&gt;Display ” to enter the interface, show as <strong>figure 5-14.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-14 Display Adjustment Interface</strong></p>
<p>You can click the check box of time title, channel title, alarm state and record state to enable these function, if time title and channel title are set as enabled, they will appear on the screen of current HD DVR system. You can modify the parameters of top/bottom/left/right to adjust TV display.</p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark308"></a> 5.6.3.4 Record</p>
<p>Click “ Config -&gt;Setting -&gt;Display ” to enter the interface, as show in <strong>figure 5-15.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-15 Record Schedule Interface</strong></p>
<p>The parameters should be consistent with HD DVR local setting .Green stands for normal record, yellow stands for motion detection ,red stands for I/O trigger record .</p>
<p>• <strong>Channel: </strong>set record type for each channel ,mainstream and substream are for choice.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="865" height="462" class="wp-image-716" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-154.jpeg" alt="word image 562 154" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 872" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-154.jpeg 865w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-154-300x160.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-154-768x410.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 865px) 100vw, 865px" /> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="859" height="462" class="wp-image-717" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-155.jpeg" alt="word image 562 155" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 873" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-155.jpeg 859w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-155-300x161.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-155-768x413.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 859px) 100vw, 859px" /></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Pre-record: </strong>Set the pre-record time for each channel.</li>
<li><strong>Record Control: </strong>Three kinds of video control such as schedule, manual and stop.</li>
</ul>
<p>•</p>
<p><strong>How to configure Record Schedule:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>You can choose the day to which you want to set schedule, click the set button on the right.</li>
<li>The default is to schedule an all-day recording, to arrange other schedule, set the Start/End time for each period.</li>
<li>Select the record type on the right hand side</li>
<li>Click Ok to save all the settings.</li>
<li>Repeat the above edit schedule steps to schedule recording for other days in the week. If the schedule can also be applied to other days, click the day you want to configure the same schedule, and click OK.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Note:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><em>Up to 8 periods can be configured for each day. And the time periods can&#8217;t be overlapped each other.</em></li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark310"></a> 5.6.3.5 Network</p>
<p>Click “ Config -&gt;Setting -&gt;Network ” to enter the interface, as show in <strong>figure 5-16.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="866" height="464" class="wp-image-718" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-156.jpeg" alt="word image 562 156" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 874" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-156.jpeg 866w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-156-300x161.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-156-768x411.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 866px) 100vw, 866px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-16 Network Setting Interface</strong></p>
<p>HD DVR support Static/DHCP/PPPOE/3G/Wifi modes. System default network type is static. User can set these parameters as required ,including IP Address, MAC, Sub Net Mask, Gateway ,DNS ,Secondary DNS, Internal IP, Max Users, Media Port, HTTP port, Handset Port.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>HS Download: </strong>Enable the function, you can download video faster.</li>
<li><strong>Transfer Mode : </strong>You can choose a different network policies, quality preferred, fluency preferred and adaptive are for choice</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark312"></a> 5.6.3.5.1 E-mail</p>
<p>Click “ Config -&gt;Setting -&gt;Network-&gt;Email ” to enter the interface, as shown in the <strong>figure 5-17.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="867" height="445" class="wp-image-719" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-157.jpeg" alt="word image 562 157" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 875" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-157.jpeg 867w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-157-300x154.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-157-768x394.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 867px) 100vw, 867px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-17 E-mail Setting by Web</strong></p>
<p>Before you configure these parameters, you have to click enable button .Then set the relevant parameters ,including SMTP server, port, username, password, the email address of sender and receiver .Click Save to save all the settings, Click MaiTest button to confirm whether the setting is effective.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>SMTP Server: </strong>The SMTP Server IP address or host name (e.g.smtp.263.net).</li>
<li><strong>Port: </strong>The SMTP port. The default TCP/IP port for SMTP is 25.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark314"></a> 5.6.3.5.2 FTP</p>
<p>Click “ Config -&gt;Setting -&gt;Network-&gt;FTP ” to enter the interface, as show in <strong>figure 5-18.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="836" height="450" class="wp-image-720" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-158.jpeg" alt="word image 562 158" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 876" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-158.jpeg 836w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-158-300x161.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-158-768x413.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 836px) 100vw, 836px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-18 FTP Setting Interface</strong></p>
<p><strong>How to configure the FTP:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Choose the type of FTP</li>
<li>Click the enable check box</li>
<li>Configure the FTP Server, port username, password , directory and file length</li>
<li>Click save button to save all the settings</li>
<li>Click FTP Test button to confirm whether the setting is effective.</li>
<li>Set the schedule for each channel</li>
<li>Click OK to save all the settings.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Note:</strong></p>
<p>&gt; <em>Up to 2 periods can be configured for each channel. And the time periods can&#8217;t be overlapped each other.</em></p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark316"></a> 5.6.3.5.3 NTP</p>
<p>Click “ Config -&gt;Setting -&gt;Network-&gt;NTP ” to enter the interface, as show in <strong>figure 5-19.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="867" height="465" class="wp-image-721" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-159.jpeg" alt="word image 562 159" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 877" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-159.jpeg 867w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-159-300x161.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-159-768x412.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 867px) 100vw, 867px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-19 NTP Setting Interface</strong></p>
<p>A Network Time Protocol (NTP) Server can be configured on your HD DVR to ensure the accuracy of system date/time.</p>
<p>1. Check the Enable checkbox to enable this feature.</p>
<p>2. Configure the parameters, including ServerIP, Port and Update Time.</p>
<p>3. Click Save button to save all the settings.</p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark318"></a> 5.6.3.5.4 Cloud</p>
<p>Click “ Config -&gt;Setting -&gt;Network-&gt;Cloud ” to enter the interface, as show in <strong>figure 5-20.</strong></p>
<p>Click on Enable checkbox to enable the function of cloud. When the Status is connected, it means cloud function is available for use. You can download iPhone/Android InVid Elevate clientsoftware by scanning QR code. How to use Invid Elevate please refer to <strong>User Manual of InVid Elevate.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="867" height="460" class="wp-image-722" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-160.jpeg" alt="word image 562 160" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 878" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-160.jpeg 867w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-160-300x159.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-160-768x407.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 867px) 100vw, 867px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-20 Cloud Setting Interface</strong></p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark320"></a> 5.6.3.5.5 DDNS/UPNP</p>
<p>• <strong>DDNS</strong></p>
<p>Click “ Config -&gt;Setting -&gt;Network-&gt;DDNS ” to enter the interface, as show in <strong>figure 5-21.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Click on the Enable to enable the function of DDNS.</li>
<li>Select DDNS Type: four types are selectable, such as Oray DDNS, CN99 DDNS, DynDNS DDNS,</li>
</ol>
<p>NOIP DDNS.</p>
<p>3. Set the Domain Name, User Name and Password .</p>
<p>4. Click Save to save the settings.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="840" height="453" class="wp-image-723" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-161.jpeg" alt="word image 562 161" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 879" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-161.jpeg 840w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-161-300x162.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-161-768x414.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 840px) 100vw, 840px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-21 DDNS Setting Interface</strong></p>
<p><em>•</em><strong> UPNP</strong></p>
<p>Click “ Config -&gt;Setting -&gt;Network-&gt;UPNP ” to enter the interface, as show in <strong>figure 5-22.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="867" height="467" class="wp-image-724" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-162.jpeg" alt="word image 562 162" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 880" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-162.jpeg 867w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-162-300x162.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-162-768x414.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 867px) 100vw, 867px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-22 UPNP Setting Interface</strong></p>
<p><strong><em>Note:</em></strong></p>
<p>• <em>To ensure this function can be used normally, please make sure the router UPNP function has been enabled.</em></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark322"></a> Access control</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Click “ Config -&gt;Setting -&gt;Network-&gt;Access control ” to enter the interface, as show in figure 5-23. Select the type of restricted list, Blocked Sites and Trusted Sites are selectable. Input the IP</p>
<p>Address manually, click Add IP button on the right, click save button to save the settings. If you want to delete the IP you have set before, left-click an IP address from the IP Blocked list /IP</p>
<p>Allowed and click Delete IP, shown as <strong>Figure 5-23.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="856" height="421" class="wp-image-725" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-163.jpeg" alt="word image 562 163" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 881" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-163.jpeg 856w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-163-300x148.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-163-768x378.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 856px) 100vw, 856px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-23 Access Control Interface</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark324"></a> Cloud Storage</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Click “ Config -&gt;Setting -&gt;Network-&gt;Cloud Storage ” to enter the interface, as show in figure 5-24.</p>
<p>You can set the Cloud Storage to upload your videos and picture recorded by your cameras.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="867" height="467" class="wp-image-726" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-164.jpeg" alt="word image 562 164" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 882" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-164.jpeg 867w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-164-300x162.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-164-768x414.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 867px) 100vw, 867px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-24 Cloud Storage</strong></p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark326"></a> 5.6.3.6 Image Setting</p>
<p>Click “ Config -&gt;Setting -&gt;Image Setting ” to enter the interface, as show in <strong>figure 5-25.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="861" height="464" class="wp-image-727" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-165.jpeg" alt="word image 562 165" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 883" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-165.jpeg 861w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-165-300x162.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-165-768x414.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 861px) 100vw, 861px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-25 Image Setting Interface</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Select a channel and then set the relevant parameters ,when all the parameters have been configured ,</li>
<li>Click Save button to save your configuration.</li>
<li>IF you want to configure the same parameters to another channel ,click the Copy button and select any channel you want ,</li>
<li>Click OK button to save.</li>
</ol>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark328"></a> 5.6.3.7 Configuration</p>
<p>Click “ Config -&gt;Setting ^Configuration ” to enter the interface, as show in <strong>figure 5-26.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="864" height="465" class="wp-image-728" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-166.jpeg" alt="word image 562 166" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 884" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-166.jpeg 864w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-166-300x161.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-166-768x413.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 864px) 100vw, 864px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-26 Configuration Setting Interface</strong></p>
<p>1. Click on the checkbox of those item you want to restore, and click the Default button ,then all the configurations of the selected item will restore to the default value.</p>
<p>2. Click Export button to export all the configurations of the network camera in a .coi file.</p>
<p>3. Click Import button to import all the configurations of the network camera from a .coi file.</p>
<p><strong><em>Note:</em></strong></p>
<p>&gt; <em>If Network has been choose in the list, the IP address is also restored to the default IP address, please be careful for this action.</em></p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark330"></a> 5.6.3.8 Channel Management</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark332"></a> Channel Type</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Click <strong>Config-&gt;Setting-&gt; Channel Management-&gt;Channel Type</strong>. You can set each channel’s type and it’s protocol for AHD cameras, shown as <strong>Figure 5-27.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="866" height="469" class="wp-image-729" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-167.jpeg" alt="word image 562 167" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 885" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-167.jpeg 866w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-167-300x162.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-167-768x416.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 866px) 100vw, 866px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-27 Digital Config of HD DVR</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark334"></a> Channel Config</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Click <strong>Config-&gt;Setting-&gt; Channel Management-&gt;Channel Config</strong>. You can search the IPC in the Internet and set their parameters, including IP address, port, username/password, protocol, syn channel time switch and connection type. As show in <strong>figure 5-28.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="867" height="470" class="wp-image-730" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-168.jpeg" alt="word image 562 168" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 886" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-168.jpeg 867w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-168-300x163.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-168-768x416.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 867px) 100vw, 867px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-28 Channel Config of HD DVR</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark336"></a> Channel Status</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Click <strong>Config-&gt;Setting-&gt; Channel Management-&gt;Channel Status</strong>. On this page you can check the channel name, channel connection status and alarm status, including Motion Detect, Video Shelter and Video Lost. As show in <strong>figure 5-29.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="480" height="358" class="wp-image-731" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-169.jpeg" alt="word image 562 169" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 887" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-169.jpeg 480w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-169-300x224.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 480px) 100vw, 480px" /> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="34" height="31" class="wp-image-732" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-170.jpeg" alt="word image 562 170" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 888"><strong>Configuration</strong></p>
<p><strong>Channel Management</strong></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-29 Channel Status of HD DVR</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark339"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark338"></a> Alarm
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark341"></a> Motion Detect</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Click the <strong>Config-&gt;Alarm-&gt;Motion Detect</strong>. As show in <strong>figure 5-30.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="867" height="466" class="wp-image-733" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-171.jpeg" alt="word image 562 171" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 889" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-171.jpeg 867w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-171-300x161.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-171-768x413.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 867px) 100vw, 867px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-30 Motion Detect Setting by Web</strong></p>
<p>The feature is similar to the local alarm of HD DVR. Event types are composed of motion detection, video loss and video shielding.</p>
<p>Taking motion detection for example to illustrate:</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Region: </strong>Set the alarm area.</li>
<li><strong>Sensitivity: </strong>Change the sensitivity of the motion detection. The higher the sensitivity, the easier to trigger alarm.</li>
<li><strong>Channel: </strong>Can be set for each channel.</li>
<li><strong>Enable: </strong>Motion detection-enabled switch.</li>
<li><strong>Schedule: </strong>Set the alarm time.</li>
<li><strong>Alarm Linkage Control: </strong>Include alarm output, show message, buzzer, send Emails, alarm recording, PTZ Act and tour.
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark343"></a> Alarm In/Alarm Out</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Click the <strong>Config-&gt;Alarm-&gt;Alarm In/Alarm Out</strong>. You can set up alarm port and linkage operations.</p>
<p>• <strong>Alarm In</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="776" height="417" class="wp-image-734" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-172.jpeg" alt="word image 562 172" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 890" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-172.jpeg 776w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-172-300x161.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-172-768x413.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 776px) 100vw, 776px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-31 Alarm In Setting by Web</strong></p>
<p>• <strong>Alarm Output</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="867" height="437" class="wp-image-735" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-173.jpeg" alt="word image 562 173" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 891" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-173.jpeg 867w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-173-300x151.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-173-768x387.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 867px) 100vw, 867px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-32 Alarm Out Setting by Web</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark345"></a> Abnormality</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Click the <strong>Config-&gt;Alarm-&gt;Abnormality</strong>. It is similar to the local abnormality of the HD DVR. You can set the alarm recording, screen tips, buzzer alarm, sending Emails, alarm output.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="866" height="466" class="wp-image-736" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-174.jpeg" alt="word image 562 174" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 892" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-174.jpeg 866w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-174-300x161.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-174-768x413.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 866px) 100vw, 866px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-33 Abnormality Setting of HD DVR by Web</strong></p>
<p>• <strong>No writable disk: </strong>There is no disk or the disk status is not available, such as read-only disk.</p>
<p>• <strong>Hard disk error: </strong>The connection between the disk and the device is error, such as the data lines are broken.</p>
<p>• <strong>Disk No Space: </strong>Alarm when the remaining space of the hard disk reaches the set value.</p>
<p>• <strong>Network Disconnection: </strong>Alarm when the network cable is disconnected.</p>
<p>• <strong>IP Conflict: </strong>Alarm when the IP address is the same as the others.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark348"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark347"></a> Advance Option
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark350"></a> Tour</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Click the <strong>Config-&gt; Advance Option-&gt;Tour</strong>. It is similar to the HD DVR local settings.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="867" height="467" class="wp-image-737" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-175.jpeg" alt="word image 562 175" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 893" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-175.jpeg 867w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-175-300x162.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-175-768x414.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 867px) 100vw, 867px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-34 Tour Setting</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Interval time: </strong>Channel switching time.</li>
<li><strong>Channels choose: </strong>You can set different channels to switch between back and forth.</li>
</ul>
<p>You can choose single channel or multi channels to display on your screen at regular</p>
<p>intervals.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark352"></a> HDD</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Click the <strong>Config-&gt; Advance Option-&gt;HDD</strong>. It is similar to the HD DVR local settings.</p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark354"></a> 5.6.5.2.1 Base</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="866" height="454" class="wp-image-738" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-176.jpeg" alt="word image 562 176" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 894" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-176.jpeg 866w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-176-300x157.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-176-768x403.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 866px) 100vw, 866px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-35 Base Setting of HDD</strong></p>
<p>This page shows the status of the device‘s hard disk. You can set the state of the hard disk read and write. You can decide whether or not to sleep hard disk after a few minutes. In addition, you can also format or delete the hard disk.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Hard disk: </strong>Hard disk serial number “[1]sda &#8220;Or&#8221; [2]sdb &#8220;.</li>
<li><strong>Status: </strong>&#8220;Unformatted&#8221; or &#8220;normal&#8221; or &#8220;no disk&#8221;.</li>
<li><strong>Read\write: </strong>The video can be recorded and can be played back.</li>
<li><strong>Read only: </strong>The video only can be played back but not be recorded.</li>
<li><strong>Redundant: </strong>You can find a completely identical video in the redundant disk. It is a function similar to that of a copy. The entire premise is that you have more than one hard disk.</li>
<li><strong>Group: </strong>Set which group the hard disk belongs to.</li>
<li><strong>Delete: </strong>Disconnect the connection between the hard disk and the device in logic. Of course, you can also restore the connection between them by clicking on the “Add” button.</li>
<li><strong>Format: </strong>Format the hard disk.</li>
<li><strong>Sleep: </strong>If the hard disk does not record or not play back in a few minutes, the disk will fall into sleep. This function can enhance the life of the hard disk.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark356"></a> 5.6.5.2.2 Advanced</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="866" height="467" class="wp-image-739" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-177.jpeg" alt="word image 562 177" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 895" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-177.jpeg 866w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-177-300x162.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-177-768x414.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 866px) 100vw, 866px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-36 Advanced Setting of HDD</strong></p>
<p>This page you can switch the hard disk&#8217;s storage mode, including the &#8220;group&#8221; or &#8220;quotas&#8221;. Your device will restart when you switch the mode.</p>
<p>• <strong>Group mode: </strong>You can select several channels attached to a disk group. Then their videos will be recorded in the group.</p>
<p>Select one disk group number.</p>
<p>Select several channels attached to the disk group.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Quota mode: </strong>You can save videos or pictures for each channel that does not exceed the total volume of space.</li>
<li><strong>Record Quota: </strong>You can manually set the quota size of the channel video.</li>
<li><strong>Photo Quota: </strong>You can manually set the channel quota size to save the screenshots. Select one channel to set the quota size.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark358"></a> 5.6.5.2.3 S.M.A.R.T.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="866" height="410" class="wp-image-740" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-178.jpeg" alt="word image 562 178" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 896" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-178.jpeg 866w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-178-300x142.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-178-768x364.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 866px) 100vw, 866px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-37 SAMRT Detect of HDD Setting by Web</strong></p>
<p>It is used to detect the hard disk status.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>S.M.A.R.T: </strong>To detect the hard disk whether it meets the basic requirements for</li>
</ul>
<p>storage.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>NO.: </strong>Access the hard disk serial number.</li>
<li><strong>Status: </strong>Can display the self-test progress in real time. And there will be a test result showing that the hard disk is “Passed &#8220;Or&#8221; Failed &#8220;.</li>
<li><strong>Last test time: </strong>A recent self testing time on the hard disk.</li>
<li><strong>Temperature: </strong>Display the hard disk temperature in real time.</li>
<li><strong>Life time: </strong>The time hours that your hard disk have been used for.
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark360"></a> Upgrade</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Click the <strong>Config-&gt;Advance Option-&gt;Upgrade.</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="867" height="397" class="wp-image-741" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-179.jpeg" alt="word image 562 179" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 897" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-179.jpeg 867w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-179-300x137.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-179-768x352.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 867px) 100vw, 867px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-38 Upgrade HD DVR by Web</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Select the upgrade file from local.</li>
<li>Click the upgrade, the device will automatically reboot in remote.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong><em>Note:</em></strong></p>
<p>&gt; <em>In general, the extension of the upgrade file is ***.upf.</em></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark362"></a> Record control</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Click the <strong>Config-&gt;Advance Option-&gt;Record Control</strong>. You can quickly set the record control</p>
<p>mode for each channel. It is similar to the HD DVR local settings.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="829" height="447" class="wp-image-742" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-180.jpeg" alt="word image 562 180" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 898" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-180.jpeg 829w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-180-300x162.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-180-768x414.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 829px) 100vw, 829px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-39 Quick Record Control by Web</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark364"></a> Account</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Click the <strong>Config-&gt;Advance Option-&gt;Account</strong>. It is similar to the HD DVR local settings.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="867" height="445" class="wp-image-743" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-181.jpeg" alt="word image 562 181" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 899" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-181.jpeg 867w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-181-300x154.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-181-768x394.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 867px) 100vw, 867px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-40 Account Setting of HD DVR by Web</strong></p>
<p>• <strong>User accounts: </strong>Select the account you want to edit, the page will display this user&#8217;s editing privileges.</p>
<p>• <strong>The formula bar: </strong>Support to add and modify user rights, change password operation, add or delete the user and group.</p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark366"></a> 5.5.5.6 Auto Maintenance</p>
<p>Click the <strong>Config-&gt;Advance Option-&gt;Auto Maintenance</strong>. It is similar to the HD DVR local settings.</p>
<p>You can set the time for automatic restart of the HD DVR.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="866" height="466" class="wp-image-744" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-182.jpeg" alt="word image 562 182" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 900" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-182.jpeg 866w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-182-300x161.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-182-768x413.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 866px) 100vw, 866px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 5-41 Auto Restart Setting by Web</strong></p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark369"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark368"></a> 5.7 Logout</p>
<p>Click the logout button, click OK, you will exit to the login page.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="396" height="266" class="wp-image-745" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-183.jpeg" alt="word image 562 183" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 901" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-183.jpeg 396w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-183-300x202.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 396px) 100vw, 396px" /></p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark371"></a><strong>Figure 5-42 Logout the Web Client</strong></p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark372"></a> Chapter 6 P2P</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark375"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark374"></a> Login by username</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Web -Remote management of equipment in another way is through P2P Connection access.</p>
<p>Open the web browser and input the <a href="http://www.elevatep2p.com" rel="nofollow noopener" target="_blank"><strong>www.elevatep2p.com</strong></a>, and press the Enter key to enter the login interface.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="971" height="393" class="wp-image-746" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-184.jpeg" alt="word image 562 184" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 902" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-184.jpeg 971w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-184-300x121.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-184-768x311.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 971px) 100vw, 971px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 6-1 Main Interface of P2P</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark378"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark377"></a> Register</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Click on the &#8220;register&#8221; button to enter the graphical interface, input your registration information to register. It will show a success message, and then you can login with your account.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="655" height="394" class="wp-image-747" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-185.jpeg" alt="word image 562 185" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 903" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-185.jpeg 655w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-185-300x180.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 655px) 100vw, 655px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 6-2 Register</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark381"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark380"></a> My device</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>This page displays the name and the connection status of have added devices. You can refresh the device status and login in a device manually.</p>
<p>After you add a device, according to prompts you can click Add device, shown as an IP Interface address connection, specific operations see section.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="865" height="591" class="wp-image-748" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-186.jpeg" alt="word image 562 186" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 904" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-186.jpeg 865w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-186-300x205.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-186-768x525.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 865px) 100vw, 865px" /></p>
<p><strong>Figure 6-3 Main Interface of P2P after Login</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark384"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark383"></a> Device Manage</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>It is empty for the first time when using video surveillance list. Click the Add button and enter the device ID, device name, account number and then select Add channel.</p>
<p>You can modify and delete the devices that have been added.</p>
<p><strong>Figure 6-4 Device Manager of P2P</strong></p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark387"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark386"></a> 6.1.4 User Info</p>
<p>You can change the password on this page.</p>
<p><strong>Figure 6-5 User Info of P2P</strong></p>
<p><a id="post-562-bookmark390"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark389"></a> 6.1.5 Logout</p>
<p>Click the Logout button.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="809" height="429" class="wp-image-749" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-187.jpeg" alt="word image 562 187" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 905" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-187.jpeg 809w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-187-300x159.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-187-768x407.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 809px) 100vw, 809px" /> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="803" height="376" class="wp-image-750" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-188.jpeg" alt="word image 562 188" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 906" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-188.jpeg 803w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-188-300x140.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-188-768x360.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 803px) 100vw, 803px" /> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="284" height="187" class="wp-image-751" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-189.jpeg" alt="word image 562 189" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 907"></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="269" height="64" class="wp-image-752" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-190.jpeg" alt="word image 562 190" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 908"> <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="196" height="168" class="wp-image-753" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-191.jpeg" alt="word image 562 191" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 909"></p>
<p>Language: English</p>
<p>Innovative Video Technology</p>
<p>ELEVATE SERES</p>
<p><strong>By User By Device</strong></p>
<p>Log in monitoring system</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-562-bookmark393"></a><a id="post-562-bookmark392"></a> Login by Cloud ID</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>By cloud ID is another way to achieve P2P connections.</p>
<p><strong>Remote Monitor of Network</strong></p>
<p><strong>Figure 6-7 Login by Cloud ID of HD DVR</strong></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="851" height="456" class="wp-image-754" src="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-192.jpeg" alt="word image 562 192" title="User Manual of Universal HD DVR 910" srcset="https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-192.jpeg 851w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-192-300x161.jpeg 300w, https://www.dvrcms.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/word-image-562-192-768x412.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 851px) 100vw, 851px" /></p>
<p>Type device for the cloud ID and account, click Log into the graphical interface.</p>
<p><strong>Figure 6-8 Main Interface After Login by Cloud ID of HD DVR</strong></p>
<p><strong><em>Note:</em></strong></p>
<p>&gt; <em>After login by cloud ID successfully, the interface are the same as you login by IP</em></p>
<p><em>address and the operations also. Please refer to IP address connection parts.</em></p>
<p><strong>Thank you for reading, if you have any problem, please contact us, thank you.</strong></p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
					<wfw:commentRss>https://www.dvrcms.com/user-manual-of-universal-hd-dvr/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
			<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>Best 20 Free Open source CCTV, NVR and DVR solutions</title>
		<link>https://www.dvrcms.com/best-20-free-open-source-cctv-nvr-and-dvr-solutions/</link>
					<comments>https://www.dvrcms.com/best-20-free-open-source-cctv-nvr-and-dvr-solutions/#respond</comments>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[admin]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Thu, 04 May 2023 20:44:54 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[PC Software]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[BioSuite Professional]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Bluecherry]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[CCTV cameras.]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ContaCam]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[DeepCamera]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Dolphin DVR Player]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[DVR solutions]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Frigate]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[iSpy]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[iVideon]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[JeVois]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Kerberos]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[MONITOR]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Motion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[motionEyeOS]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[onvif]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[OpenCCTV]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Raspberry Pi]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Shinobi]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Simple NVR]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[software]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[tutorial]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Viseron]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[web browser]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[WebCam]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Windows]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Yawcam]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[zmNinja]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ZoneMinder]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.dvrcms.com/?p=200</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[Best 20 Free Open source CCTV, NVR and DVR solutions CCTV or closed-circuit television system makes use of camera networks ... <p class="read-more-container"><a title="Best 20 Free Open source CCTV, NVR and DVR solutions" class="read-more button" href="https://www.dvrcms.com/best-20-free-open-source-cctv-nvr-and-dvr-solutions/#more-200" aria-label="Read more about Best 20 Free Open source CCTV, NVR and DVR solutions">Read More</a></p>]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>Best 20 Free Open source CCTV, NVR and DVR solutions CCTV or closed-circuit television system makes use of camera networks and monitor to watch and monitor of interior and exterior of a property. Companies, museums, art galleries, and houses are using CCTV networks for video surveillance and security.There are dozens of commercial CCTV software packages.However, as they vary in price and features, they are also not for everyone. In this article, we present a collection of free and open-source CCTV and DVR (Digital video recorder) solutions. Our primary goal is to promote open-source and offer reliable alternatives to commercial solutions.</p>
<h2>Best 20 Free Open source CCTV, NVR and DVR solutions</h2>
<p><strong><u>Free Open-source CCTV, NVR and DVR packages</u></strong></p>
<p>Load More : <a href="https://www.dvrcms.com/cms-software/193/10-best-free-security-camera-software/">10 Best Free Security Camera Software</a></p>
<h2 id="1ispy">1- iSpy</h2>
<figure class="kg-card kg-image-card"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="kg-image" src="https://medevel.com/content/images/2022/10/Screen-Shot-2022-10-28-at-10.20.08.png" sizes="auto, (min-width: 720px) 720px" srcset="https://medevel.com/content/images/size/w600/2022/10/Screen-Shot-2022-10-28-at-10.20.08.png 600w, https://medevel.com/content/images/2022/10/Screen-Shot-2022-10-28-at-10.20.08.png 916w" alt="Screen Shot 2022 10 28 at 10.20.08" width="916" height="292" title="Best 20 Free Open source CCTV, NVR and DVR solutions 917"></figure>
<p><a href="https://www.ispyconnect.com/" target="_blank" rel="noopener nofollow">iSpy</a> is a free and open-source multi-platform CCTV system that offers DVR agents and a rich plugin list.</p>
<p>You can run it on Windows, Linux, macOS, even ARM, and Docker. It also supports 32 and 64 bit.</p>
<p>Agent DVR features multi-monitor support, unlimited cameras, multiple camera types (like USB cameras), data recording, sensor support, thermal cameras, recording with GPU support, alerts, remote access, and a long list of integration-ready service sockets.</p>
<p>However, if you want to use it remotely with other fancy features, you can subscribe for about $8/ month for the basic plan.</p>
<h2 id="2zoneminder">2- ZoneMinder</h2>
<figure class="kg-card kg-image-card"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="kg-image" src="https://medevel.com/content/images/2022/10/Screen-Shot-2022-10-28-at-10.20.28.png" sizes="auto, (min-width: 720px) 720px" srcset="https://medevel.com/content/images/size/w600/2022/10/Screen-Shot-2022-10-28-at-10.20.28.png 600w, https://medevel.com/content/images/2022/10/Screen-Shot-2022-10-28-at-10.20.28.png 882w" alt="Screen Shot 2022 10 28 at 10.20.28" width="882" height="373" title="Best 20 Free Open source CCTV, NVR and DVR solutions 918"></figure>
<p><a href="https://zoneminder.com/" target="_blank" rel="noopener nofollow">ZoneMinder</a> is a free open-source video surveillance software package for home security, industrial usage, and house care.</p>
<p>ZoneMinder features a scalable NVR/ DVR system, install wizard, developer-friendly API, mobile and desktop apps, third-party plugins, and integrations.</p>
<p>Furthermore, It supports remote access, all sort of known cameras, 4k cameras, GPU image processing, and Raspberry Pi setup.</p>
<h2 id="3shinobi">3- Shinobi</h2>
<figure class="kg-card kg-image-card"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="kg-image" src="https://medevel.com/content/images/2022/10/Screen-Shot-2022-10-28-at-10.21.11.png" sizes="auto, (min-width: 720px) 720px" srcset="https://medevel.com/content/images/size/w600/2022/10/Screen-Shot-2022-10-28-at-10.21.11.png 600w, https://medevel.com/content/images/size/w1000/2022/10/Screen-Shot-2022-10-28-at-10.21.11.png 1000w, https://medevel.com/content/images/2022/10/Screen-Shot-2022-10-28-at-10.21.11.png 1063w" alt="Screen Shot 2022 10 28 at 10.21.11" width="1063" height="729" title="Best 20 Free Open source CCTV, NVR and DVR solutions 919"></figure>
<p><a href="https://shinobi.video/" target="_blank" rel="noopener nofollow">Shinobi</a> is a free and open-source web-based CCTV system. It is written with Node.js and offers an easy-to-use interface.</p>
<p>Because it is easy to install and configure, Shinobi can be used for baby monitors, stores, houses, and constructions sites, and more.</p>
<p>Shinobi utilizes WebSocket technology, which provides you with a real-time video stream directly to your browser. It also supports recording in modern video formats like MP4 and Web.</p>
<p>Shinobi comes in two editions: Shinobi CE; a free community edition under GPL v3 for small office setup and houses, and Shinobi Pro; a professional edition with a commercial license for a large setup.</p>
<h2 id="4kerberos">4- Kerberos</h2>
<p><a href="https://kerberos.io/" target="_blank" rel="noopener nofollow">Kerberos</a> is an open-source security platform to build scalable and distributed video surveillance security systems.</p>
<p>The project consists of:</p>
<ol>
<li>an agent (Kerberos Agent) to record video streams and scale cameras with Kubernetes,</li>
<li>a Vault (Kerberos Vault) which store videos with full offline and on-premise support and offers a machine-learning integration</li>
<li>a hub (Kerberos Hub) which analyzes the video streams and video files.</li>
</ol>
<p>Kerberos Agent is a complete security system that works on the web, desktop, and mobile. Besides, it has a Raspberry Pi image, and a docker container that runs on AMD, ARM7, and ARM64.</p>
<p>While the agent is a free open-source project for anyone to download and use, the other parts are built for enterprise use.</p>
<h2 id="5bluecherry">5- Bluecherry</h2>
<p><a href="https://www.bluecherrydvr.com/" target="_blank" rel="noopener nofollow">Bluecherry</a> is a free open-source Linux-based video surveillance application. It has a low memory footprint, supports ONIVF, and uses GPU for motion detection.</p>
<p>Bluecherry features automatic camera detection and adding, a web client for configuration, a cross-platform client, multiple user support with roles and permissions, and an easy-to-install wizard.</p>
<p><strong><em>Unfortunately, Bluecherry is no longer available. We have listed it here, because it is still usable, as it has many users.</em></strong></p>
<h2 id="6motion">6- Motion</h2>
<p><a href="https://motion-project.github.io/" target="_blank" rel="noopener nofollow">Motion</a> is an open-source video surveillance monitor program that supports many cameras and devices.</p>
<p>With Motion, you can record from IP cameras, save videos or pictures, invoke or trigger certain scripts when certain events occur, log all activities into a database, follow and track motion detection.</p>
<p>Furthermore, Motion supports network cameras visa RTSP, RTMP and HTTP, Raspberry Pi cameras, V4L2 Webcams, Video Capture cards, and more.</p>
<p>Motion app also works as a video analytic software for existing video and movie files.</p>
<h2 id="7deepcamera">7- DeepCamera</h2>
<p><a href="https://github.com/SharpAI/DeepCamera" target="_blank" rel="noopener nofollow">DeepCamera</a> or SharpAI is open-source software packages that add AI Face Recognition/ Person Detection to NVR “Network Video Recorder” systems.</p>
<p>It turns any camera into an AI-powered machine. It runs on Raspberry Pi, Android, PC, or even AWS.</p>
<p>Not only that, but it works seamlessly on Nvidia Nano GPU and uses a Telegram bot for notification.</p>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<h2 id="8opencctv">8-  OpenCCTV</h2>
<p><a href="https://github.com/ait-vgl/OpenCCTV" target="_blank" rel="noopener nofollow">OpenCCTV</a> is an open-source server application that provides an analytic platform for CCTV cameras. It consists of 3 components: a web application (OpenCCTV), OpenCCTV server, and an analytic Server.</p>
<h2 id="10jevois">10- JeVois</h2>
<p><a href="http://jevois.org/" target="_blank" rel="noopener nofollow">JeVois</a> is an open-source intelligent machine vision quad-core camera. It works with all sorts of cameras like Webcam and CCTV cameras.</p>
<p>JeVois aims to help developers build artificial intelligence apps. It comes with a dozen of samples and libraries.</p>
<h2 id="9monitor">9- MONITOR</h2>
<p><a href="https://sourceforge.net/projects/fm-cctv-ip-camera/" target="_blank" rel="noopener nofollow">Monitor</a> is a free open-source monitor software for security cameras, IP cameras, Radios, and TVs.</p>
<p>It features.m3u playlist support, video display, video recording, many video formats support, multiple monitors, web MRLs and IPTV channels.</p>
<p>Monitor works in a portable mode, which means no installation is required.</p>
<h2 id="10biosuite-professional">10- BioSuite Professional</h2>
<figure class="kg-card kg-image-card"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="kg-image" src="https://medevel.com/content/images/2021/10/1--2-.png" sizes="auto, (min-width: 720px) 720px" srcset="https://medevel.com/content/images/size/w600/2021/10/1--2-.png 600w, https://medevel.com/content/images/2021/10/1--2-.png 930w" alt="1 2" width="930" height="607" title="Best 20 Free Open source CCTV, NVR and DVR solutions 920"></figure>
<p><a href="https://sourceforge.net/projects/biosuitepro/" target="_blank" rel="noopener nofollow">BioSuite Professional</a> is a complete security suite for employees and a security camera management system.</p>
<p>BioSuite supports internet cameras, CCTV, Webcam. It also has a built-in employee and personnel manager, fingerprint identification system, and barcode and smart card recognition.</p>
<p>Moreover, it offers a session manager and multiple computer interfaces for corporate and enterprise usage.</p>
<p>The project source code is available in C#.</p>
<h2 id="11dolphin-dvr-player">11- Dolphin DVR Player</h2>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<figure class="kg-card kg-image-card"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="kg-image" src="https://medevel.com/content/images/2021/10/1--1-.png" sizes="auto, (min-width: 720px) 720px" srcset="https://medevel.com/content/images/size/w600/2021/10/1--1-.png 600w, https://medevel.com/content/images/2021/10/1--1-.png 810w" alt="1 1" width="810" height="525" title="Best 20 Free Open source CCTV, NVR and DVR solutions 921"></figure>
<p>This software package is a custom CCTV, HVR, NVR, and DVR video player. <a href="https://sourceforge.net/projects/dolphin-dvr-player/" target="_blank" rel="noopener nofollow">Dolphin DVR Player</a> makes it easy to browser, display, export, and manage security videos easily.</p>
<p>It is a lightweight Windows app that works for Windows XP, Vista, 7, 8, and 10.</p>
<h2 id="12frigate">12- Frigate</h2>
<figure class="kg-card kg-image-card"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="kg-image" src="https://medevel.com/content/images/2021/10/Screen-Shot-2021-10-12-at-14.09.49.png" sizes="auto, (min-width: 720px) 720px" srcset="https://medevel.com/content/images/size/w600/2021/10/Screen-Shot-2021-10-12-at-14.09.49.png 600w, https://medevel.com/content/images/size/w1000/2021/10/Screen-Shot-2021-10-12-at-14.09.49.png 1000w, https://medevel.com/content/images/size/w1600/2021/10/Screen-Shot-2021-10-12-at-14.09.49.png 1600w, https://medevel.com/content/images/2021/10/Screen-Shot-2021-10-12-at-14.09.49.png 2376w" alt="Screen Shot 2021 10 12 at 14.09.49" width="2000" height="1226" title="Best 20 Free Open source CCTV, NVR and DVR solutions 922"></figure>
<p><a href="https://github.com/blakeblackshear/frigate" target="_blank" rel="noopener nofollow">Frigate</a> is a free and open-source NVR solution with real-time object detection for IP cameras. It is designed for Home Assistant and comes with a rich set of features.</p>
<p>It utilizes TensorFlow and communicates with other devices over MQTT, which eases device integration.</p>
<p>Frigate features video recording, re-streaming, motion detection, and supports multiprocessing.</p>
<h2 id="13zmninja">13- zmNinja</h2>
<p><a href="https://github.com/ZoneMinder/zmNinja" target="_blank" rel="noopener nofollow">zmNinja</a> is a cross-platform client for ZoneMinder built on the Ionic platform.</p>
<p>zmNinja works on Android, iOS, Windows, macOS, Linux, and the web.</p>
<p>Its features include multiple ZM server support, live view, even view, timeline view, push notifications, responsive design, and smooth performance.</p>
<p>Even though, the project released a discontinuation notice this year, it still has many users worldwide.</p>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<h2 id="14viseron">14- Viseron</h2>
<p><a href="https://github.com/roflcoopter/viseron" target="_blank" rel="noopener nofollow">Viseron</a> is a self-hosted NVR system that comes with object detection. The system is written in the Python programming language.</p>
<p>It offers real-time video analysis, object detection, face recognition, motion detection, CUDA support for GPU, and full NVIDIA Jetson Nano support.</p>
<p>A specific image can be built for Raspberry Pi3B+, Raspberry Pi 4, and NVIDIA Jetson Nano.</p>
<p>Viseron offers camera control over MQTT, Home assistant integration via MQTT, zone to limit detection, and multi-arch Docker containers.</p>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<h2 id="15simple-nvr">15- Simple NVR</h2>
<p><a href="https://github.com/TomHumphries/simple-nvr" target="_blank" rel="noopener nofollow">Simple NVR</a> is a new open-source simple network video recorder written in Node.js.</p>
<p>The project connects multiple camera streams using FFmpeg over TCP and UDP. Besides, it allows saving the stream into .mp4 files.</p>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<h2 id="16motioneyeos">16- motionEyeOS</h2>
<p><a href="https://github.com/ccrisan/motioneyeos" target="_blank" rel="noopener nofollow">motionEyeOS</a> is a Linux distribution that turns single-board computers (SBCs) into a complete video surveillance system.</p>
<p>It works smoothly on Raspberry Pi, Orange Pi, and many other SBCs. It requires tech knowledge to install, configure and run.</p>
<p>Here is a <a href="https://www.tomshardware.com/how-to/raspberry-pi-security-camera#:~:text=MotionEyeOS%2C%20a%20free%20open%2Dsource,as%20Google%20Drive%20or%20Dropbox." target="_blank" rel="noopener nofollow">tutorial</a> on how to get it working on <strong>Raspberry Pi</strong>.</p>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<h2 id="17contacam">17- ContaCam</h2>
<p><a href="https://www.contaware.com/contacam.html" target="_blank" rel="noopener nofollow">ContaCam</a> is a Video Surveillance software for Windows (7 to 10) machines.</p>
<p>ContaCam features CCTV support with motion detection, multilingual support, manual records, multiscreen support, easy installation, re-streaming of the video feeds, and Webcam support with the audio feed.</p>
<p>Note that, ContaCam does not have Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008 support, as it was dropped by its developers.</p>
<h2 id="18yawcam">18 -Yawcam</h2>
<p><a href="https://www.yawcam.com/" target="_blank" rel="noopener nofollow">Yawcam</a> (Yet another WebCam) software that turns your webcam into a security surveillance device. It features real-time video streaming, motion detection, text and image overlays, FTP upload, time-lapse movies, web browser view, runs in the background, and multiple languages support.</p>
<p>Although the package is written in Java, it is released only for Windows machines.</p>
<h2 id="19ivideon">19- Ivideon</h2>
<p><a href="https://www.ivideon.com/ivideon-server-linux/" target="_blank" rel="noopener nofollow">Ivideon</a> is a CCTV solution for Linux. It does not require a state-of-art computer machine to run, rather than Intel® Atom™ Processor, 1 GB RAM, 500 MB for the software, and 11 GB for daily video archive recording.</p>
<p>It is an affordable solution for businesses, homes, and industrial use. Not only that, but it also offers iOS and Android apps.</p>
<p>Although it is available for Ubuntu-based desktops, Windows, and macOS.</p>
<h2 id="20onvif">
20- ONVIF</h2>
<p><a href="https://www.onvif.org/" target="_blank" rel="noopener nofollow">ONVIF</a> is an open industry forum and a community to promote and standardize interfaces for IP-based physical security products.</p>
<p>ONVIF offers specifications, schemas, and guidelines.</p>
<h2 id="in-the-end">In the end</h2>
<p>Here, we listed our finds of the best open-source CCTV and DVR solutions. We hope it will serve as a guide for those who are looking for reliable solutions.</p>
<p>If you know of any other similar solutions that we didn&#8217;t mention, please let us know.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
					<wfw:commentRss>https://www.dvrcms.com/best-20-free-open-source-cctv-nvr-and-dvr-solutions/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
			<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		
		
			</item>
	</channel>
</rss>
